pCO CONTROLLER USE AND

CONFIGURATION MANUAL

Software FLBB0mCRCP

Service version
For Datatech+ units

1
2
INDEX
1 GENERAL 7
1.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL 7
1.2 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS 7
2 SYSTEM HARDWARE 9
2.1 I/O CARDS 9
2.1.1 Small, Medium and Large Boards 9
2.2 USER INTERFACE 10
2.2.1 pGD1 10
2.3 HARDWARE FOR DATATECH+ UNITS 11
2.3.1 The Power+ driver 11
2.3.2 Serial cards for Datatech+ operation 12
2.4 SERIAL CARDS FOR REMOTE MONITORING AND ASSISTANCE (BMS) 12
2.5 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE 13
2.6 INTEGRATED HUMIDIFIER 14
2.6.1 Integrated humidifier interface board 15
2.6.2 Types available for the cylinders and relative parameters 15
2.7 LOCAL NETWORK FOR PCO* 16
2.7.1 Addressing network elements 17
3 PROGRAMMING THE PCO* 19
3.1 BIOS AND BOOT VERIFICATION 19
3.2 SETTING THE SOFTWARE ADDRESS OF THE TERMINALS AND BOARDS 19
3.2.1 Addressing the 6-key PGD terminal 19
3.2.2 pCO* boards addressing software 20
3.2.3 Procedure to assign the list of terminals for the pCO* boards on the network 21
3.2.4 Network error messages 22
3.2.5 Network status 22
4 HARDWARE TROUBLESHOOTING 24
4.1 FAULTS IN THE NETWORK 24
4.2 OTHER FAULTS 24
5 SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS AND OPERATIONS 26
5.1 GENERAL 26
5.2 CONTROLLER OPERATING PRINCIPLE 26
5.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL 26
5.3.1 Direct expansion cabinets (ED) 27
5.3.2 Heating 27
5.3.3 Other temperature functions 28
5.3.3.1 High/low return and supply temperature alarms and disabling dehumidification 28
5.3.3.2 Supply temperature limit 29
5.3.3.3 Proportional + Integral Control (P+I) 29
5.4 HUMIDITY CONTROL 29
5.4.1 Humidification 30
5.4.2 Dehumidification 30
5.4.3 Other humidity functions 31
5.4.3.1 High/Low humidity alarm 31
5.5 COMPRESSORS 31
5.5.1 Cooling capacity control with inverter driven compressors (BLDC) and ON/OFF compressors 31
5.5.2 BLDC compressors starting and stopping 32
5.5.3 BLDC compressors speed management 32
5.5.4 BLDC compressors envelope management 32
5.5.4.1 Custom maximum condensing pressure (or temperature) limit 34
5.5.4.2 Custom minimum evaporating pressure limit 34
5.5.5 Oil return management for BLDC compressors 34
5.5.6 Operating times 34
5.5.6.1 Minimum start-up time (ON) 34
5.5.6.2 Minimum shutdown time (OFF) 34

3
 5.5.6.3 Minimum interval between start-ups of different compressors 35
5.5.6.4 Minimum interval between start-ups of the same compressor 35
5.5.7 Management of liquid line solenoid valve 35
5.5.8 Compressor alarms 35
5.5.8.1 High pressure 35
5.5.8.2 Low pressure 35
5.5.8.3 Prevention of high and low pressure alarms 36
5.5.8.4 Compressor thermal protection 36
5.5.8.5 Out of envelope alarm (only for BLDC compressors) 36
5.5.9 Power+ alarms 36
5.6 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (EEV) 36
5.7 CONDENSATION FANS (FOR AIR CONDENSED UNITS) 38
5.8 CONDENSATION VALVE (FOR WATER CONDENSED UNITS) 38
5.9 HEATING DEVICES 40
5.9.1 Electrical heaters 40
5.9.2 Hot water coil valve 40
5.9.3 Hot gas post heating 40
5.9.4 Heating devices alarms 40
5.9.5 Excluding the heaters via a digital input 40
5.10 HUMIDIFIER 40
5.10.1 Integrated humidifier control 40
5.10.2 External humidifier control 42
5.10.3 Excluding the humidifier via a digital input 43
5.11 SUPPLY AIR FAN 43
5.12 FREE COOLING 45
5.12.1 Water free cooling (FcW) 45
5.12.2 Air free cooling (ED and CW) 47
5.13 DUAL COOLING 47
5.14 LIMITING THE SUPPLY TEMPERATURE IN FREE COOLING AND DUAL COOLING MODE 47
5.15 ANTI-STICKING FUNCTION FOR DUAL COOLING AND FREE COOLING UNITS 48
5.16 AIR SUPPLY DAMPER CONTROL 49
5.17 MANUAL CONTROL OF THE DEVICES 49
5.18 UNIT ALARMS 49
5.18.1 Alarms that stop the unit 49
5.18.2 Minor and serious alarms 50
5.18.3 Low pressure alarm controlled automatic reset 50
5.18.4 Water flow switch control 50
5.18.5 Configurable alarm potential free contacts (Alarm Board) 51
5.18.6 Alarm log 53
5.18.7 Sending alarm messages via a GSM network 53
5.19 ADVANCED LOG 53
5.20 DATALINK P-LAN LOCAL NETWORK 57
5.20.1 Running/Stand-by 57
5.20.2 Forced by temperature 58
5.20.3 Stand-by mode 58
5.20.4 Distributed Control 58
5.21 CLOCK AND OPERATION BASED ON TIME SCHEDULER 59
5.21.1 Time bands scheduler 59
5.21.2 Holiday periods scheduler 59
5.21.3 Special days scheduler 59
5.22 DEFAULT PROGRAMMING BACKUP 60
5.22.1 Saving a set of parameters 60
5.22.2 Retrieving a set of parameters 60
5.23 REFRIGERANT TABLE CONTROL 60
5.24 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT 60
5.25 DISPLAY LANGUAGES 60
6 BMS SUPERVISION 61
6.1 MODBUS RS485 SLAVE EXTENDED PROTOCOL 61
6.2 BACNET PROTOCOL 61
6.3 LON PROTOCOL 61

4
7 INPUT AND OUTPUT TABLE 62
7.1 DIRECT EXPANSION UNIT (ED) WITH BLDC COMPRESSORS 62
8 SOFTWARE MENU, INTERFACE MASKS AND PARAMETERS 64
8.1 GENERAL 64
8.1.1 Menu tree 64
8.2 H. MANUFACTURER MENU 65
8.2.1 Ha. Unit config. 65
8.2.2 Hb. Cooling circuit 68
8.2.2.1 Power+ inverter configuration 69
8.2.2.2 Compressors configuration loop 71
8.2.2.3 EVD EVO configuration loop 78
8.2.3 Hc. Supply air fan 85
8.2.4 Hd. Heating 86
8.2.5 He. Humidifier 86
8.2.6 Hf. I/O Config. 88
8.2.7 Hg. Initialization 89
8.3 G. SERVICE MENU 91
8.3.1 Ga. Change language 91
8.3.2 Gb. Information 91
8.3.3 Gc. Charts 93
8.3.4 Gd. Working hours 94
8.3.5 Ge. BMS config. 95
8.3.6 Gf. Service settings 96
8.3.6.1 Gfa. Reset working hours 96
8.3.6.2 Gfb. Probe adjustment 96
8.3.6.3 Gfc. Thermoregulation 97
8.3.6.4 Gfd. Condensation 100
8.3.6.5 Gfe. EVD EVO 102
8.3.6.6 Gff. Supply air fan 102
8.3.6.7 Gfg. Heating 104
8.3.6.8 Gfh. Humidity control 105
8.3.6.9 Gfi. Advanced 107
8.3.7 Gg. Manual management 107
8.4 F. USER MENU 113
8.4.1 Fa. Thermoregulation 113
8.4.2 Fb. Supply air fan 118
8.4.3 Fc. Alarm management 118
8.4.4 Fd. Datalink 121
8.4.5 Fe. Advanced settings 124
8.5 E. DATA LOGGER 125
8.6 D. INPUT/OUTPUT 126
8.7 C. CLOCK/SCHEDULER 133
8.8 B. SETPOINT 136
8.9 A. UNIT ON/OFF 138
8.10 I. INFO MENU (OR MAIN MENU) 138
9 ALARMS 147
9.1 ALARM TABLE 147
9.1.1 Power+ inverter alarm A026 157
9.1.2 CPY board alarm A069 and warning A070 159

5
6
1 GENERAL

1.1 Purpose of the manual

The scope of this manual is to provide all necessary information for the installation, programming and use of
the pCO controller for Close Control units.
This is the “Service” version of the manual, intended for factory and service engineers only.
We would like to thank in advance anyone wishing to collaborate by reporting errors, omissions, sections
requiring further explanation or operations that have not been included.

1.2 Controller functions

The pCO electronic microprocessor controller with the FLBB0mCRCP software has been designed to control
Direct Expansion (ED) close control units with up to 4 compressors on 2 circuits, with or without integrated
chilled water coil for Energy Saving/Backup operation, and Chilled Water (CW) or Dual Water (DW) units with
water coil.
In this first software development step, the FLBB0mCRCP software is intended only for Datatech+ units (ED
units with at least one BLDC compressor).
The main functions of the controller can be summarised as follows:

• temperature and humidity control in technological and civil environments;

• control of up to 4 hermetic compressors with 1 or 2 cooling circuits; compressors on each circuit can be
arranged in single or tandem configuration;
• control of different heating devices: 1 or 2 electric heaters (up to 3 steps with binary operation),
modulating electrical heaters, hot water coil with ON/OFF or modulating valve, hot gas post-heating coil
with ON/OFF or modulating control;
• 0-10V modulating cooling valves for Dual Cooling or Free Cooling versions;
• control of an integrated immersed electrode or external (modulating) humidifier with proportional control;
• control of forced dehumidification via reduced supply fan speed;
• control of remote condenser (modulating fan speed);
• control of condensing water valve (modulating valve motor);
• control of alarms, alarm log and signals on programmable digital outputs;
• control of various time intervals of controlled devices;
• energy saving management (Dual Cooling, Free Cooling);
• BLDC inverter control;
• electronic expansion valve control;
• connectivity with local supervision network (Datalink) and BMS networks (Carel, Modbus, LonWorks,
Bacnet, SNMP protocols, etc.).

The following operations are possible at any time using the display terminal:

• switching the unit ON/OFF;

• display the status of active devices;
• display analogue inputs and outputs of the machine;
• display digital inputs and outputs status of the machine;
• calibrate the reading of analogue inputs;
• detect and display alarms;
• see alarms history;
• configure the main parameters of the machine in different password-protected environments (User,
Service, Manufacturer);
• set the clock and scheduler (password-protected);
• choose the display language from available ones.

The following functions can be managed via p-LAN network:

• Running/Stand-by: time or event-based automatic rotation control of a maximum of 16 units with at least
one unit in stand-by;

7
• Distributed control: temperature and humidity control of a maximum of 16 units connected via p-LAN
network with Running/Stand-by mode, using the average temperature & humidity as reference for all units
in Run mode;
• Reading and control of all network units using one shared terminal.

A 6-key terminal is used to configure and display unit operation.

8
2 SYSTEM HARDWARE
This chapter describes the essential parts of the system and any accessories together with their connection
and functions.

2.1 I/O cards

The pCO controller family consists of three boards that differ in the number of inputs and outputs and are
referred to as “Small”, “Medium” and “Large”.
All the boards are installed in a closed plastic shell and are fitted with removable terminals.

This software version requires Small, Medium or Large boards to be used in this system, in accordance with
the configuration requirements.
A panel mounted terminal with a 8 rows x 22 columns LCD display is provided to connect the unit. The
terminal has 6 keys to be used on the unit, in remote control and to be shared with other units on the network.
Besides the boards and terminal, which are essential components, the system includes a few accessories,
such as:

• various boards for serial connections;

• BLDC inverters for BLDC compressors;
• drivers for electronic expansion valves;
• board to control a integrated humidifier.

In some cases it is useful, if not necessary, to use suitable T-connectors in order to facilitate the connection
between the boards and the terminal.

2.1.1 Small, Medium and Large Boards

The system may have a Small, Medium or Large board, depending on the unit configuration and options.

The “Small” board has 5 analogue inputs including 4 universal and 2 passive, 8 digital inputs, 4 analogue
outputs and 8 digital outputs.

The "Medium" board has 8 analogue inputs including 6 universal and 2 passive, 14 digital inputs, 4 analogue
outputs and 13 digital outputs.

The "Large" board has 10 analogue inputs including 6 universal and 4 passive, 18 digital inputs, 6 analogue
outputs and 18 digital outputs.

An example of a “Large” board is shown in the figure below, with the intent of giving a picture of the
component. The smaller “Medium” and “Small” cards differ from the “Large” in the number of inputs and
outputs, the “Small” being also shorter in length.
For more information and details about the pCO5+ boards features, connections, programming and others,
please refer to the manual provided by the manufacturer Carel.

9
2.2 User interface
2.2.1 pGD1
The PGD1 6-key user interface is designed for panel mounting and the backlit LCD consists of 6 rows and 22
columns.
A user interface can be installed on board the unit (panel mounted), remotely (in this case, set up to be wall-
mounted) or both.

pGD1 user interface

The functions of the six keys are described below:

This key, hereinafter referred to as the Up Arrow, is used to scroll the masks of the various
sections, which are modified by increasing the values in the various fields.

This key, hereinafter referred to as the Down Arrow, is used to scroll the masks of the
various sections, which are modified by decreasing the values in the various fields.

This key, hereinafter referred to as the Enter key, confirms the selection made to access the
various sections and to modify parameters.

This key, hereinafter referred to as the Alarm Key, is used to display the active alarms and
delete them, if necessary.

This key, hereinafter referred to as the Prog key, is used to access the loop of masks of the
various sections.

10
 This key is used to return to the upper mask level.

2.3 Hardware for Datatech+ units

For Datatech+ units the hardware shown on the previous chapter is used, with the addition of new
components as follows:

pCO

EVD EVO driver CPY

pGD1

Power +
Electronic
Expansion Valve

2.3.1 The Power+ driver

Power+ is designed to drive a permanent magnet (PM) brushless DC compressor / BLAC sensorless or
asynchronous induction motors. For the latter you can choose between vector or V/f control.
It is designed with integrated heat sink. The configuration and programming, as well as the start / stop and
the reference speed, are managed by the pCO controller via RS485 serial link with Modbus ® protocol.
For a detailed description of the drive and its programming procedure see the separate manual given by the
drive manufacturer.

11
 2.3.2 Serial cards for Datatech+ operation

On pCO it is necessary to install a RS485 serial card (Carel code PCO100FD10); the card will be installed on
the FieldBus1 slot of the controller.
The Power+ inverter will be connected to this serial card.

2.4 Serial cards for remote monitoring and assistance (BMS)

When a serial board is installed, the unit can be connected to monitoring and remote assistance systems.
Various options are available depending on the required communication protocol.
• The RS485 serial board with PCOS004850 code enables communication with Carel and Modbus
networks, using Carel proprietary protocol or Modbus protocol.
• The serial board with PCO10000F0 code (FTT10 interface) enables communication in LonWorks®
networks.
• The PCO1000BB0 board enables connection to RS485 BACnet™ networks.
• The RS232 serial board with PCO100MDM0 code enables the controller to connect to a modem for
standard PSTN telephone connections and GSM connection to send SMS messages.
• The pCO Web (PCO1000WB0) board enables connection to Ethernet networks with SNMP, http and
BACnet™ over IP protocol.

PCOS004850 PCO1000F0 PCO1000WB0 PCO100MDM0 BacNet™

RS485 serial board LonWorks® serial board pCO Web board serial board serial board

The serial boards must be inserted in the correct slot (BMS1) where an edge card connector is present.
The Serial Card door must be removed from the controller for these to be installed:

12
 The serial board is installed by fitting it on the two plastic
supports that are an integral part of the pCO* controller
container.

Once the board has been inserted, the door must

be set back in place by aligning the exposed
board connector with the hole of the door itself.

For further information about serial card installation, please refer to the control board manufacturer manuals
and instructions.

2.5 Electronic expansion valve

The EVD EVO driver module controls the electronic expansion valves with a serial network, thereby allowing
precise suction superheat adjustment for more efficient and versatile operation of the cooling unit.

13
When an electronic expansion valve is used (standard on Datatech +, option on Datatech ED), besides the
Driver and the valve itself, a temperature probe and a pressure transducer are also required, both installed on
the cooling side of the evaporator end part (on the compressor suction piping). Refer to Figure 2-1 to better
understand a typical system layout.

Condenser

Serial
Compressor

Motor Temperature
EEV connection

Pressure

Evaporator

Figure 2-1

EVD EVO driver is connected to FieldBus2 port of pCO controller. Network addresses for EVD EVO drivers
are respectively 198 for circuit 1 and 199 for circuit 2.

2.6 Integrated Humidifier

The pCO* boards control all the functions: from reading the humidifier parameters to controlling its devices via
relays (fill-up, drain, capacity). The humidifier values (current, conductivity, level) are not read directly but via
an interface board (CPY).

14
 The integrated humidifier is an immersed electrode
type. The key indicates the main components:

1. Supporting structure
2. Cylinder
3. Drain solenoid valve
4. 90° adjustable drain fitting (4a: straight
fitting - supplied as standard)
5. Fill-tank + conductivity metre
6. Fill-up solenoid valve

2.6.1 Integrated humidifier interface board

The CPY interface board allows the control of CAREL KUE range OEM humidifiers and the interface with the
pCO* board; it features all the inputs and outputs required to completely control the humidifier. The values
read by the humidifier probes are read and converted by the CPY board and sent to the pCO* board through
serial connection (Carel RS485 master protocol), while the pCO control board calculates the humidity request
(by the difference between read humidity value and humidity setpoint) and send a proportional 0-100%
request to the CPY control board.
The humidifier devices (water fill, water drain and power contactor) are controlled directly via the relays of the
CPY board.
The CPY board features also three LEDs to indicate active alarms present (red LED), steam production
(yellow LED), 24 Vac power supply (green LED).

CPY
Board

The connection between CPY board and pCO board is done through FieldBus2 serial port (Carel RS485
master protocol).
Refer to the unit wiring diagram and to the CPY board manual for information regarding the connections.

2.6.2 Types available for the cylinders and relative parameters

Humidifier control parameters are set up on the pCO display. Single cylinder humidifiers, ranging from 1.5
kg/h single phase to 15 kg/h three-phase with a power supply voltage ranging from 208 to 575 Volt, can be

15
managed. The software controls the humidifier steam production and operating conditions in accordance with
the humidifier current signals and the ambient humidity. It also controls all the conditions and alarms.

2.7 Local network for pCO*

The p-LAN network, also called Datalink, allows the various elements that compose the system communicate
with each other via the standard RS485 serial with a baud rate of 65.2 kbit/s, using the Carel Multimaster
protocol.
The number of elements composing the system varies according to complexity; ranging from a basic
configuration, which consists of an I/O board and a unit management terminal, to a more complex
configuration, which consists of an I/O board, a local and remote terminal and other I/O boards for any other
network units.
The boards are identified within the network via their p-LAN address.
The 6-key terminal and the pCO* boards are addressed via software, as described further on.
2
The boards on the p-LAN network are connected by means of two wires with a minimum section of 0.5 mm
plus a sheath or shield.
The connection must be made by connecting RxTx+ and RxTx- to the corresponding terminals of the various
boards (connector J11 on the pCO* board).
If the distance between the terminal and the pCO* board that powers it is less than 50 m, the terminal
connection can be direct via a 6-way telephone cable.

If the terminal is to be connected at a distance greater than 50 m but within 200 m, or if two terminals are to
be connected to the same I/O board, use three pairs of braided wires inside a shield with a minimum section
2
of 0.5 mm and T-switches as shown in the figure.

16
If the terminal is to be remote controlled at a distance greater than 200 m but within 500 m, the terminal must
not be powered by the pCO* board but separately.

The T-switch sets the three telephone connectors in parallel with the terminal board.

T-switch

Cable connections must be made as shown in the table below.

2
Cable AWG24 (with power supply) sec. 0.5 mm
Terminal Function Cable connection
0 Earth Shield
1 + VRL (30 Vdc) First duplex cable A
2 GND Second duplex cable A
3 Rx/Tx- Third duplex cable A
4 Rx/Tx+ Third duplex cable B
5 GND Second duplex cable B
6 + VRL (30 Vdc) First duplex cable B

2.7.1 Addressing network elements

Each active network element is identified by its serial address. The I/O boards and the interface terminals are
active elements.
The address of the board and of the 6-key terminal is assigned via a specific software procedure (see
paragraph 3.2).

17
Hereunder are the addresses to be set on the boards and terminals:

Unit no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I/O board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
address
Private
terminal 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 (32)
address

If a single shared terminal is to be used for all the network units, this will be assigned address 32. If a
maximum network is to be configured, consisting of 16 units and 16 terminals, one of the following two
options must be selected:

• All private terminals (one for each unit);

• Limit the network to 15 units (address 32 will remain free for a shared terminal).

The main Menu mask on the terminals displays the address of the connected board in the lower right corner.

18
3 PROGRAMMING THE PCO*
Programming the boards involves the uploading of the application software.
The microprocessor requires at least the application, the bios.bin file and the boot.bin file in the flash memory
of the pCO* boards for it to work. The LCT and PVT files are required if the variable log recording is also
managed.
Normally, Carel inserts the latest official version of the bios.bin and boot.bin files in the pCO* boards.
Since applications are tested and released with a specific version of the bios.bin and boot.bin files, it is
important for the files forming part of the "package" accompanying the application to always be loaded even
though the update of the boot file should not be required.
The boards can be programmed via the USB key (pCO5), or with a computer using “pCO_manager” software
and a USB cable or a USB-RS485 converter (CVSTDUTLF0).
When the key is used, the memory of the pCO* board is always completely overwritten (except for the BOOT
file); when pCO_manager is used, the various software components to be loaded can be selected.
Please refer to specific pCO* card manual for additional instructions relevant to the uploading of the software
with the key.

3.1 Bios and boot verification

The user may need to know the version of the bios and boot on the pCO* boards before loading an
application.
Press the Alarm and Enter buttons simultaneously for 5 seconds and select SYSTEM INFORMATION to
display the hidden masks:

BOOT V 4.01 13/04/06

BIOS V 3.92 11/04/06
>2+7MB <
595E-1641-BC52-B001_________

The currently installed boot and bios versions appear respectively in the first and second rows. The physical
memory dimension appears in the third row (for the application and log recording).
The same information can be also found in the Service menu (see further) once the software is installed.

3.2 Setting the software address of the terminals and boards

The board software addressing procedure is not required when this is programmed via a key or with pCO
Manager software and that which has been copied corresponds with the configuration to be entered.
The procedure must be followed when a board is to be programmed with an address that differs from that set
by the software.

3.2.1 Addressing the 6-key PGD terminal

The 6-key PGD terminal is addressed via software.
The terminal must be powered for the procedure to be activated, then press the Up Arrow, Down Arrow and
Confirmation Arrow simultaneously 5 seconds and the mask below will appear.

Display address
setting ... 17
I/O Board address: 01

Press the “confirmation arrow” for the cursor to move beneath the terminal addressing field.
Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to modify the terminal address.
The terminal address in the figure is 17 (terminal of board no. 1).
After setting the terminal address correctly, press the Confirmation Arrow and the cursor will move to the
address selection field of the board associated with the terminal.
Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to modify the board of which the terminal displays the parameters.
The board address in the figure is 1.

19
The addressing procedure of the 6-key PGD terminal is now complete. Press any key apart from the
Confirmation Arrow to exit the configuration phase, and Enter to access the configuration of the network
terminals, which is described in the following chapter.

3.2.2 pCO* boards addressing software

The pCO* board does not have the micro switches to set the P-LAN address. The address must be set by
following a particular procedure:

1. Disconnect the power to the pCO*;

2. Set up a terminal with the “0” address:

a. Press UP, DOWN, ENTER at the same time to enter the address change screen
b. Set the display address to “0” for the point-to point connection. Confirm with ENTER

3. Connect the terminal to the pCO*;

4. Disconnect any devices connected in P-LAN from the pCO* (e.g. the J11 connector);
5. Power the pCO* by pressing the Up Arrow and Alarm keys simultaneously
6. The following view appears after a few seconds:

7. Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow to modify the address and then press Enter to confirm.
8. Set the pCO* card address according to requirements of the installation.

20
3.2.3 Procedure to assign the list of terminals for the pCO* boards on the network
This procedure enables the terminal/s set up on the network to display the parameters of the I/O boards
present.
Network management provides the possibility of enabling a terminal to display the parameters of a specific
board, which is referred to as a private terminal, or boards, which is considered to be a shared terminal.
A pCO* board can communicate with a maximum of three terminals, of which only one can be configured as
shared. The other two must be configured as private.
The configuration procedure of the terminals in a network via 6-key terminals is a continuation of their
assignment procedure.
The previous paragraph describes the procedure to assign an address to the terminal, after which, Enter is
pressed to access the addressing procedure of the terminals on the network and the mask below appears.

Terminal config
Press ENTER
to continue

The following mask appears after having pressed Enter.

P:01 Adr Priv/Shared

Trm1 17 Pr
Trm2 None –
Trm3 None – Ok?N

This mask must be interpreted and used as follows:

P: Indicates the address of the connected board;

Adr: Indicates the column in which the addresses of the terminals must be selected;
Priv/Shared: Indicates the column in which the user selects whether the terminal will be private or
shared;
Trm1-2-3; These are the terminals to be configured;
None; This is where the address of the terminal to be controlled is selected by means of the
arrows. Once the terminal address is selected, press the Confirmation Arrow or Enter,
depending on whether a 6-key or 15-key terminal is used, to move to the next field;
--; The fields in this column indicate private Pr or shared Sh for each addressed terminal. The
selection is made via the arrows and confirmed by pressing Enter;
Ok?N: After the selection has been completed and when the cursor is positioned under the letter
N, use the arrows to change it to Y and press Enter to confirm the configuration.

Press the Confirmation Arrow for the cursor to move to the field where the address of the first adr and trm1
terminal is set.
Value 17 must be entered in order to maintain uniformity of both the addresses and that set previously in the
terminal address.
After having pressed the Confirmation Arrow for the terminal to be assigned address 17 and the I/O board to
be displayed at address 1, the cursor will move beneath the column in which the terminal features will be
assigned.
Press the “confirmation arrow” for the cursor to move to the second row for a second terminal to be
configured.
Since the software allows a number of units to be connected, Pr or Sh (i.e. board parameters displayed at
address 1) can also be set from a shared terminal.
If no other terminals are to be set up, press the Confirmation Arrow to skip all the fields leaving them
unchanged (None and —) right through to the last field “Ok?No” where the Up Arrow or Down Arrow is used
to change “No” to “Yes” in order to confirm the selections made.
After having set Yes, press the Confirmation Arrow and the software will automatically exit the network
terminal configuration procedure.
The configuration procedure of the terminals in a network via a 1-15 key terminal is slightly different.
The command to enter the procedure is the same as that of the 6-key terminal, i.e. by pressing the Up Arrow,
Down Arrow and Enter simultaneously. The following mask will appear after five seconds:

21
 Terminal Adr: 17
I/O Board Adr: 1

The address of the terminal set via the micro switches appears in the first row.
The address of the connected I/O board appears in the second row.
Having followed the address assignment procedure, the values that appear should be those shown in the
figure below.
After having confirmed by pressing Enter, the following mask appears.

Terminal config
Press ENTER
to continue

Here on, the procedure is the same as that for 6-key terminals.

3.2.4 Network error messages

During network operation, connection and communication problems may arise between components and
network alarm masks will appear on the terminal. See the Network troubleshooting paragraph to resolve
these problems.

I/O Board xx faulty

This mask appears if a power board with the xx address is faulty, not connected to the network or if there are
communication problems.

NO LINK

This mask appears if a terminal does not receive network messages (synchronisation signals) for more than
10 seconds. This alarm is indicated by the green LED on the addressing board being OFF.

3.2.5 Network status

The network status can be monitored during operation. All terminals and connected power boards are
displayed in a specific mask with symbols, the position of which identifies their address.
The network status mask is accessed by pressing the same keys used to access the terminal addressing
masks for at least 10 seconds.
The following mask will appear:

NetSTAT 1- - - - - - 8
T: xx 9 - - - - - -16
Enter 17 - - - - - -24
To EXIT 25 - - - - 32

T: xx; This is the address of the active terminal

Enter to EXIT: press Enter to exit the network status mask

The - symbol in each row represents a useful address.

If the address has been assigned to a terminal, the ▀ symbol will appear instead of “-”. If it has been a
assigned to a power board, the “ ” symbol will appear.

22
Example 1:

1 − -- - - - 8
9 - - - - - - - - 16
17 ▀ ▀ - - - - - - 24
25 − − − − - - - ▀ 32

Two I/O boards with address 1 and 2, and two terminals with address 17 and 18 (presumably private) are
present on the network together with a shared terminal with address 32 (presumably shared).
The same information can be found also in the User menu inside the Datalink submenu (see further), once
the software is installed.

23
4 HARDWARE TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 Faults in the network

The main problems that can occur in a line are:

Problem Possible cause and relative solution

The terminal buzzer rings for no - The same address has been assigned to several elements;
reason and when it stops, the Check the configuration of the addresses.
display is cleared (hardware One or more terminals have the address set to 0.
reset) Check the configuration of the addresses.
- The network connections have not been set up correctly.
- The data lines (tx+ / rx+ and/or tx- / rx-) may be short-circuited to earth
or disconnected;
Check the connections.
- A Pco board may be damaged.
Data does not appear on the Enter the configuration procedure. If “-” is in the address field in the “I/O
display of a terminal even though board Adr” row, the terminal has not been configured.
it is powered Proceed with the terminal configuration.
The “NO LINK” alarm mask - The terminal does not receive signals from the network - the
appears connections are interrupted.
Check all connections to the network.
There are no network elements connected to the terminal
The "I/O board xx fault" alarm - The power board with “xx” address does not function correctly.
message appears Check the LEDs of the corresponding serial addressing board.
The green LED of the pCO* board - The relative board is not receiving the network signal; the connections
does not go on are incorrect.
Check all connections.
No other elements are connected to the network.
The green LED of the pCO* board - See the first point.
goes ON and OFF periodically
The unit does not start-up (the Verify that the network is powered;
network presence LED on the
pCO* is OFF, LCD is OFF, other
LEDs are OFF)

4.2 Other faults

Problem Possible cause and relative solution
Upon start-up, the line LEDs or - Problems with the Flash Memory;
the three P-LAN LEDs are ON or Contact Technical Assistance.
no text or random messages
appear on the display
Input signals read incorrectly - Verify input calibration (via the programme).
- Verify that the pCO* and probes are powered correctly.
- Separate the power supply of the digital inputs from the pCO* power
supply using a 24 Vac/24 Vac transformer of at least 12 VA.
- Verify that the probe wires are connected correctly.
- Verify that the probe wires are sufficiently distant from possible
sources of electromagnetic interference such as power cables, high
voltage cable contactors and connected high start-up absorption
devices.
- If there is a probe error or a pCO* conversion error, see the “Verifying
the analogue inputs” paragraph.

24
Problem Possible cause and relative solution
Dubious alarm signal from digital - Check the input status from the relative mask in the I/O section.
input - Verify the voltage on the input in question between terminal “C” and
the relative “Cn” terminal.
If 24V are measured, the input is closed. If 0V are measured the input
is open (normally, the controller indicates an alarm signal if the input is
open).
The controller repeatedly enters - Verify that no power cables are placed near the controller.
Watch-dog mode (it goes OFF - Verify that the capacity of the power supply transformer is correct.
and ON again as though there
were brief power failures or it
randomly activates some digital or
analogue outputs).
The user terminal is blocked (it - Verify that the terminal is not disconnected; if so, re-connect it and
does not respond when keys are switch the controller OFF and ON again with the terminal connected.
pressed).

25
5 SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS AND OPERATIONS

5.1 General
This software is designed to manage Close Control units, used to condition the air on a number of different
environments requiring precise temperature and humidity control.
Particular attention has been paid to the Energy Saving aspect and for this purpose, specific controls have
been included to make use of environmental conditions in favour of energy saving.

5.2 Controller operating principle

This paragraph briefly summarises the basic operating principles of the controller.
The main target of the controller is to bring the temperature and relative humidity to the set-points using the
cooling, heating and humidification devices in the unit.
Besides the compressors, the chilled water coil, the hot water coil, the heaters and the humidifier, the
controller will also control the supply fan in ON/OFF or modulating (0-10V) mode via the relative operating
modes and alarms.
Accessories/options can also be combined for better control of the operating conditions, which may be: dirty
filters alarm, flood alarm, fire/smoke alarm, external and supply air dampers, condensate drain pump alarm, 5
programmable digital outputs, remote exclusion of heater and humidifier operation, water flow switch control,
limited automatic reset of serious HP/LP alarms, remote variation of the temperature set-point, chiller set-
point compensation, possibility of entering the default backup values, etc.
These functions are described in the following paragraphs.
The units can be combined on the P-LAN network for Running/Stand-by or Distributed Control.
All parameters that are referred to (set-points, differentials, calibrations, delays, etc.) can be modified within
the relative masks.

5.3 Temperature control

The heating and cooling devices are controlled according to the temperature read by the return or supply
temperature probe. This temperature is compared with the desired value (set point) and the most suitable
devices are activated according to the difference between read value and set point.
The unit control continuously compare cooling and dehumidification requirement and consider the biggest one
in order to activate the suitable devices.
From the User menu, it is possible to choose between thermoregulation on air return temperature or on air
supply temperature, considering that thermoregulation on air supply temperature is physically possible only
with modulating cooling and heating devices. Different cooling and heating bands and dead zones can be set
for thermoregulation both on return air temperature and on supply air temperature.
In case of thermoregulation on supply air temperature, both return air temperature and supply air temperature
set points will be shown in the set point menu, because if the “Auto-POC” fan control mode is active the air
flow regulation will refer always to the return air temperature (for further explaining, see chapter about
ventilation control).
The proportional band identifies the air conditioner's adjustment range and separated heating and cooling
values can be set.
The dead zone (d.z.), typically of 0.5°C, detects the cut-off range of the devices around the set-point (this
prevents fluctuations and instability).

The following diagram illustrates the behaviour of the cooling and heating and devices, both ON/OFF and
modulating.

26
 100% 100%

Modulating
Modulating
heating 0% cooling
device
device

R1+R2 R2 R1
R2 R1 C1 C2

R1 C1
Heating band d.z. d.z. Cooling band

Set-point Ambient T
Figure 5-1

5.3.1 Direct expansion cabinets (ED)

The units can be single or dual circuit models with one or two compressors on each circuit and with air or
water condensation. One compressor can be a variable speed model, with BLDC (BrushLess Direct Current)
motor.
Besides the standard set-up, the compressors can be combined with additional components for the following
versions:
• “Dual Cooling” (DC);
• “Water Free cooling” (FcW);
• “Air Free cooling” (FcA).

The remote condensing fans in air condensation units can be controlled directly by the controller in
modulating (0-10V) mode, in pressure, with pre-ventilation during stand-by.
The compressors in water condensing units can be deactivated due to no water being present by means of a
specific digital input indication (usually given by a water flow switch).
The controller can manage up to 4 compressors, which may be inverter driven (BLDC) or ON/OFF, on 1 or 2
cooling circuit; on each circuit, compressors can be arranged in single or tandem configuration. Only 1 BLDC
compressor is used, even in units with 2 cooling circuits. In the case of multiple compressors, the cooling
proportional band is equally divided between the steps available; the BLDC compressor is always the first one
to start running and the last one to stop.
Heating (or post-heating) can be performed by different devices: electric heaters, hot water coil or hot gas
post heating coil (see further).
The functions of these controls are described in the following paragraphs.

5.3.2 Heating
This function heats the air to be treated so as to meet the temperature set-point.
The post-heating function can be controlled by different devices:
• electrical heaters: 1 stage, 2 stages, binary mode, modulating;
• hot water coil with ON/OFF or modulating valve;
• hot gas post heating coil with ON/OFF or modulating control.
The devices can also be combined, thus having a primary and a secondary heating device. Not all
combinations can be done, due to the number of analogue and digital outputs available on the control board,
see next table for possible combinations:

27
 ADDITIONAL HEATING DEVICE

1 stage 2 stage Binary Modulating Hw coil

Post hot gas Post hot gas HW coil
electrical electrical electrical electrical modulating
on/off modulating on/off valve
heaters heaters heaters heaters valve

Post hot gas

on/off
P
R
I Post hot gas
M modulating
A
1 stage
R
electrical
Y
heaters
H 2 stage
E electrical
A heaters
T Binary
I electrical
N heaters
G
Modulating
electrical
D
heaters
E
V HW coil
I on/off valve
C
E Hw coil
modulating
valve

means that the combination is possible.

means that the combination is not possible.

5.3.3 Other temperature functions

5.3.3.1 High/low return and supply temperature alarms and disabling dehumidification
This function allows the controller to detect the permanence of the return or supply air temperature (read by
the specific control probe), outside the set limits, triggering a non-serious alarm on the display. The restore
differential is set to 1°C. The high/low temperature status does not disable any output, has a delay time on
running and also at start-up.
The high/low return and supply temperature alarms can be enabled by a specific mask.
A value can be set in a specific mask to block dehumidification (if running) when the ambient temperature is
too low.

28
 Dehumidific. stop diff.

Restart offset

De-
humidific.

Set-point Ambient T
Low temp. alarm offset High temp. alarm offset

Figure 5-2

5.3.3.2 Supply temperature limit

The user can control air that is too cold from entering the ambient during cold air-conditioning by installing an
optional probe on the air supply and enabling the pCO board input for the probe's presence enabling the
supply temperature limit. This function is available only when the thermoregulation is set on the return air
temperature.
The parameters that determine the function of this feature are basically a set-point and an air supply
differential. The "limit" of the cooling devices within the differential increases proportionally until it reaches the
"total limit" at the differential extreme. The devices are controlled as follows:
• The modulating valves are closed progressively;
• the compressors are progressively switched off or slow down.

5.3.3.3 Proportional + Integral Control (P+I)

The software can manage "integral" control, in addition to that which is strictly proportional (proportional logic
intrinsically has an error). Integral control not only adjusts cabinet operation in proportion to the temperature
and humidity offset with respect to the setpoint but also for the entire time this difference persists.
The integral control parameter is "integral time", which indicates the necessary time before the proportional
action is doubled: e.g. if the integral time is set to 600 seconds, the set-point to 22°C, the differential to 2°C
and the air return to 23°C, the proportional control provides an output equivalent to 50% of the cooling
capacity and the integral control provides 50% after 600 seconds.

The main effects of enabling P+I control are:

• The average return air temperature will be closer to the set-point with respect to proportional control
alone (reduced error).
• The cooling devices can also run below the set-point, even when dehumidification is not required.
This is somehow inherent to integral control and cannot be avoided.

5.4 Humidity control

The humidity devices are controlled according to the humidity values read by the ambient humidity probe,
always on return air flow. The value read is compared with the desired value and the devices are activated
according to the difference.
The unit control continuously compare cooling and dehumidification requirement and consider the biggest one
in order to activate the suitable devices.
The proportional band identifies the actual adjustment range and separate humidification and
dehumidification values can be set.

29
There is also a dead zone (d.z.) before and after the set-point, typically of 0.2% if humidity control on relative
humidity is active or of 0.1 g/kg if humidity control on absolute humidity is active; in this zone, no adjustment
takes place (to prevent oscillations).

100% Modulating Modulating

humidifier cooling device

20%

C1 C2

On/Off humidifier C1
Humidification band d.z. d.z. Dehumidification band

Set-point humidity

Figure 5-3

5.4.1 Humidification
This function supplies water steam to the air to be treated so as to meet the set relative humidity set-point,
that can be expressed both in relative humidity (percentage) or in absolute humidity (grams of water per
kilogram of dry air).
Humidification is possible by means of an:
• Integrated immersed electrode humidifier with proportional control (0-100%) according to the
adjustment band;
• External humidifier, which can be either ON/OFF (controlled by digital output) or modulating
(controlled by analogue output).

5.4.2 Dehumidification
Dehumidification, i.e. cooling the air below dew point, reduces the relative humidity in the recirculation air.
This function can be controlled with the compressors (ED), which can also operate below the temperature
set-point up to the limit beyond which the function is suspended.
The cooled air can then be post-heated with the post-heating devices mentioned above.
Furthermore, in order to enhance the dehumidification process, the controller reduces the supply fan speed
when dehumidification is required.
The controller continuously compare the requirements of cooling and dehumidification and consider the
highest one to adopt the better strategy to satisfy the set points.
Dehumidification is possible by means of:
• Activation of the cooling devices (compressors or coil) to reach the dew point of the treated air. The
unit control continuously compare cooling and dehumidification requirement and consider the biggest
one in order to activate the suitable devices;
• Reducing the air flow: in case of dehumidification request, fan speed is reduced to a constant value
(settable) during the entire the dehumidification process, thus increasing the coil dehumidification: air
flow reduction causes a decrease of evaporation temperature and lower air speed permits a more
intimate contact between air and coil fins, increasing the latent heat exchange on the coil.

30
5.4.3 Other humidity functions
5.4.3.1 High/Low humidity alarm
This function allows the controller to detect the constancy of the ambient humidity (read by the control probe),
beyond the set limits and longer than the set value, thereby triggering a non-serious alarm on the display; this
alarm has a settable delay. The high/low humidity status does not deactivate the outputs.

Set-point
Low humid. alarm offset High humid. alarm offset

Ambient humid.
Figure 5-4

5.5 Compressors
5.5.1 Cooling capacity control with inverter driven compressors (BLDC) and ON/OFF
compressors
The presence of an inverter driven BLDC compressor allows an accurate cooling capacity control. In case of
plural compressors arrangement with one variable speed compressor and one or more (up to 3) ON/OFF
compressors, the software manages the compressors capacity control in this way: the compressors power
request (coming from cooling or dehumidification band) is equally divided by the number of compressors. The
first compressor that starts running is always the variable speed one (BLDC); once the BLDC compressor has
reached a speed threshold for ON/OFF compressor activation (called “Fixed ON” threshold, default 90 rps,
settable from Manufacturer menu), the first ON/OFF compressor starts and the variable speed compressor
adjusts its speed to meet the power requirement. Once the variable speed compressor has reached again the
“Fixed ON” threshold and the cooling or dehumidification demand is not satisfied yet, next ON/OFF
compressor starts and so on.
A symmetric (similar but reverse) process is performed when the compressors power request decreases: if
there are more compressors running, the BLDC compressor reduces its speed until it reaches a speed
threshold for ON/OFF deactivation (called “Fixed OFF”, default 30 rps, settable from Manufacturer menu),
then one ON/OFF compressor is switched OFF and the variable speed compressor adjusts its speed to meet
the power requirement; the BLDC compressor is the last one to switch OFF when thermoregulation request is
0.
“Fixed ON” and “Fixed OFF” thresholds can be set in Manufacturer menu.
The control logic of the variable capacity compressor provides also the following:
• adaptation of the cooling capacity to the actual thermal load; a precise adjustment is carried out,
which allows to minimize the fluctuations in temperature and humidity (when required) and the
number of compressor start-up and to optimize energy consumption;
• optimization of the compressor management maintaining the operating conditions within the
application limits provided by the manufacturer (envelope management);
• management of oil return cycles to avoid excessive oil migration in the refrigeration system with
separate sections (see further);
• management of operating cycles at maximum rotational speed to compensate for sudden thermal
load peaks.

In case of direct expansion Dual Cooling or Free Cooling units with inverter compressor, the air flow is kept
constant and equal to the nominal value, in this way the free cooling is fully exploited, limiting the intervention
of the compressors and thereby reducing the total electric power absorbed by the machine.

31
5.5.2 BLDC compressors starting and stopping
The BLDC compressor requires a specific starting and stopping procedure, recommended by the compressor
manufacturer, in order to ensure oil return to the compressor during the starting phase, which is the most
critical for compressor lubrication.
When temperature or humidity is over the dead zone (see above), the cooling capacity request or the
dehumidification request becomes greater than 0 and a capacity request is sent to the BLDC compressor,
which starts running following a predefined procedure: the compressor starts and the control set its speed to
a threshold, called starting speed (default 50.0 rps), for a starting time (fixed 3 minutes); after this time, the
compressor is free to accelerate or decelerate, following the power requirement coming from
thermoregulation.
Note that if the unit is turned OFF (by key, by digital input, by local network or by BMS) while the compressor
is doing the starting procedure, the compressor will actually turn OFF only when the starting procedure is
completed.

Figure 5-5

When compressor power requirement is 0, the BLDC compressor gradually reduces its speed (with the set
deceleration rate) to 0 and so it stops.
Only in case of serious alarm on the relative cooling circuit (HP alarm, LP alarm, BLDC compressor start
failure, etc.), the BLDC compressor will be stopped immediately after the alarm is triggered. In case of high
pressure switch intervention due to abnormal high pressure raising, power supply to Power+ inverter will be
directly cut off by HP switch.

5.5.3 BLDC compressors speed management

The software controls the following BLDC compressor speed parameters: minimum and maximum speed
limits, acceleration, deceleration, starting speed. All these parameters are configurable from Manufacturer
menu; default values are loaded for each compressor model or range when the inverter default installation is
done and it is recommended not to change these parameters without previous authorization of technical
department, because any change can cause serious damages to the BLDC compressor.

5.5.4 BLDC compressors envelope management

The software continuously controls that the BLDC compressor working point, defined by evaporating and
condensing temperatures (or pressures), remains inside the compressor envelope. The software implements
different strategies in order to keep the working point inside the envelope, to prevent it going out the envelope
limits and to bring it back inside the envelope when it is outside.
A generic BLDC compressor envelope is the following:

32
 Tc

Te

Figure 5-6

The envelope is divided into different zones:

Envelope zone Description

1 Normal working zone (inside envelope)
2 High compression ratio zone
3 High condensing temperature zone
4 High motor current zone
5 High evaporating temperature zone
6 Low compression ratio zone
7 Low differential pressure zone
8 Low condensing temperature zone
9 Low evaporating temperature zone
dashed line Custom maximum condensing temperature
dashed and dotted line Custom minimum evaporating temperature

Each compressor model or range has its specific envelope, defined by the compressor manufacturer, that can
have also some sub-zones where other parameters have to be controlled, for example discharge gas
temperature or compressor speed.
Real time information about the envelope zone can be found in the info masks.
The software tries to keep the BLDC compressor working point inside envelope limits by the following actions:
• Compressor speed variation (acceleration or deceleration), forcing the cooling power request coming
from unit thermoregulation;
• EEV opening variation, forcing the superheat set point.

If these actions are not enough to keep the compressor working point inside the envelope, an out of envelope
alarm (serious) is triggered and the BLDC compressor stops running.

33
5.5.4.1 Custom maximum condensing pressure (or temperature) limit
In order to prevent high condensing pressure alarm (see further), from Manufacturer menu it is possible to set
a threshold for maximum condensing pressure (or temperature) lower than the envelope limit, represented by
the horizontal red line on the envelope diagram. When condensing pressure is approaching this threshold, the
software will perform the actions described above in order to avoid high condensing pressure alarm.

5.5.4.2 Custom minimum evaporating pressure limit

In order to prevent low evaporating pressure alarm (see further), from Manufacturer menu it is possible to set
a threshold for minimum evaporating pressure higher than the envelope limit, represented by the vertical blue
line on the envelope diagram. When evaporating pressure is approaching this threshold, the software will
perform the actions described above in order to avoid low evaporating pressure alarm.

5.5.5 Oil return management for BLDC compressors

When there is at least one variable speed compressor (BLDC), the oil return management is always
activated. This function continuously checks the BLDC compressor speed: if it remains below a minimum
threshold for a certain time, the variable speed compressor is forced to a higher rotation speed for a definite
time, in order to increase the refrigerant speed inside cooling circuit pipes so that oil is forced to return to the
compressor. During the oil return cycle, the compressor power requirement coming from thermoregulation is
bypassed.
If the BLDC compressor is in tandem configuration with a ON/OFF compressor, in addition to the oil return
management described above, the software manages also an oil equalization solenoid valve, required to
balance the oil level inside the sump of both compressors. The solenoid valve operating logic is the following:
when only the BLDC compressor is running, the valve remains closed; when the ON/OFF compressor of the
tandem circuit starts running, the valve opens and remains open for a certain time (opening time at
compressor start-up), then closes and cyclically opens for a certain time (“Time ON”), to guarantee oil level
balancing on the two compressors sumps.
All parameters for oil return management and oil equalization solenoid valve are available in the Manufacturer
menu.
Note that oil return management functions and oil solenoid valve management are available only for cooling
circuits with BLDC compressor.

5.5.6 Operating times

The minimum compressor time intervals must be respected. Particularly, those pertaining to various start-up
and shutdown combinations.

Min. time between two start-ups

Min. ON time

Min. OFF time

Compressor t

Figure 5-7

5.5.6.1 Minimum start-up time (ON)

This sets the minimum time (in seconds) that each compressor must remain ON, regardless of shutdown
requests (provided these are not caused by alarms).

5.5.6.2 Minimum shutdown time (OFF)

This sets the minimum time (in seconds) that each compressor must remain OFF, regardless of start-up
requests.

34
5.5.6.3 Minimum interval between start-ups of different compressors
This sets the minimum time (in seconds) that must elapse between the start-up of one compressor and
another.

5.5.6.4 Minimum interval between start-ups of the same compressor

This sets the minimum time (in seconds) that must elapse between two consecutive start-ups of the same
compressor, regardless of the load requests. In simple terms, the number of start-ups within the time interval
is reduced by increasing the value.

5.5.7 Management of liquid line solenoid valve

In the direct expansion units the management of the liquid line solenoid valve (which is normally connected
to the digital output which activates the on/off compressor) is linked to the number of revolutions of the BLDC
compressor: when the compressor has a number of revolutions greater than 0, the valve is energized, when
the number of revolutions is equal to 0, the valve is de-energized.
This function is only active with units with at least one BLDC compressor.

5.5.8 Compressor alarms

5.5.8.1 High pressure
The high pressure alarm is managed by two different devices, always present for each unit configuration:
• high pressure transducer: once the threshold set in the relative "Manufacturer" mask is reached, the
compressor is immediately switched OFF without respecting the time intervals and the alarm can only
be reset (manually or automatically) when the pressure drops below the reset differential; in this case
the alarm shown on the controller will be “High condensing pressure”; one high pressure transducer
is installed for each cooling circuit both for single and for tandem compressors arrangement;
• high pressure switch: in case of sudden high pressure rise, so quick that the high pressure transducer
intervention is not fast enough, the high pressure switch intervention turns off all compressors running
by directly cutting power supply to the compressors and sends the “High pressure switch” alarm to
the unit control (digital input); this alarm must be manually reset, after manually rearming the high
pressure switch. For units with BLDC compressor and Power+ inverter, when the high pressure
switch alarm is triggered also the Power+ offline alarm is triggered, because inverter power supply is
directly cut-off by the pressure switch, so Power+ turns off and goes offline. One high pressure switch
is installed for each compressor.

5.5.8.2 Low pressure

The low pressure alarm switches the relevant compressor OFF. The alarm is delayed from compressor start-
up for a set time (to overcome any transient instances) and also on running for another set time. Reset can be
manually or automatic. Low pressure alarm is managed by two different devices, depending on the unit
configuration:
• Low pressure transducer: this device is present if the cooling circuit has a electronic expansion valve
(EEV) with EVD EVO driver; the compressor is immediately switched OFF without respecting the time
intervals and the alarm can only be reset when the pressure rises above the reset differential; in this
case the alarm shown on the controller will be “Low evaporating pressure”. This alarm parameters
are: a pressure threshold, a reset differential, a delay at compressor starting and a delay when
compressor is running; all these parameters can be set in Manufacturer menu. One low pressure
transducer is installed for each cooling circuit both for single and for tandem compressors
arrangement;
• Low pressure switch: this device is used if the cooling circuit has a thermostatic expansion valve
(mechanic); the compressor is immediately switched OFF by directly cutting power supply to the
compressors and the alarm can only be reset (manually or automatically) when the pressure rises
above the reset differential; in this case the alarm shown on the controller will be “Low evaporating
pressure switch”.

35
5.5.8.3 Prevention of high and low pressure alarms
The control implements different systems for the prevention of the alarms of high and low pressure,
depending on the configuration of the cooling circuits.
For refrigeration circuits with only one BLDC compressor, when the values of high or low pressure reach the
configurable threshold (see the description above), the BLDC compressor speed is reduced to drive away the
working point of the compressor from the indicated thresholds and therefore prevent the onset of alarms of
high or low pressure.
For refrigeration circuits with a BLDC compressor in tandem with an ON / OFF compressor, when the values
of high or low pressure reach the adjustable thresholds, the BLDC compressor speed is reduced as above
described; if this intervention is not sufficient, the ON / OFF compressor is turned off and will restart after a
fixed 15 minutes time, to allow high or low pressure return within allowable limits.
For refrigeration circuits with ON / OFF compressors only, when the values of high or low pressure reach the
threshold limit one compressor is switched off, to thereby prevent the occurrence of high or low pressure
alarms.

5.5.8.4 Compressor thermal protection

Each compressor has an internal thermal protection for electric motor overheating; when the contact opens, a
serious alarm is triggered and the compressor is immediately switched OFF. Alarm reset is automatic
controlled, meaning that the alarm will automatically reset for 3 times, then it will need manual reset.

5.5.8.5 Out of envelope alarm (only for BLDC compressors)

For BLDC compressors, the software continuously controls the compressor working point, defined by
evaporating temperature and condensing temperature, and performs different actions to keep the working
point inside compressor envelope limits (see paragraph about BLDC compressor envelope management). If
the compressor working point remains outside compressor envelope for a certain time, an out of envelope
alarm is triggered and the BLDC compressor is immediately stopped. Alarm reset is manual.

5.5.9 Power+ alarms

For units with BLDC compressor and Power+ inverter, all inverter alarms are transmitted to pCO control
board via serial connection. Different alarms can be triggered, for further information see the relative chapter.

5.6 Electronic expansion valve (EEV)

The expansion of sub-cooled liquid is performed by means of an electronic expansion valve (EEV), standard
supplied for units with inverter-driven compressors.
The electronic expansion valve is controlled by a dedicated driver called EVD EVO (refer to the relative
paragraph for hardware description); high and low pressure transducers, discharge and suction temperature
probes are directly connected to EVD EVO analogue input. All parameters are transmitted to the pCO
controller via serial communication.
The primary purpose of the electronic valve is ensure that the flow rate of refrigerant that flows through the
valve nozzle corresponds to the flow rate required by the compressor. In this way, the evaporation process
will take place along the entire surface of the evaporator and there will be no liquid at its outlet and
consequently at compressor suction. In fact, as liquid is not compressible, it may cause damage to the
compressor and even break it if its amount is considerable.
The controlled parameter is always suction superheating, which effectively detects the presence of liquid at
the end of the evaporator and so at compressor suction. The suction superheating temperature is calculated
as the difference between superheated gas temperature (measured by a temperature probe located at the
end of the evaporator) and the saturated evaporation temperature (calculated from the reading of suction
pressure by the corresponding probe).
Suction superheating is then controlled by mean of a PID algorithm with a specific set of values; the main
target of this algorithm is to keep suction superheating constant at the set point value, reacting to its
variations due to changes in cooling circuit operating conditions. Parameters of PID algorithm have been
experimentally determined to achieve this target, giving also a smooth superheating regulation in order to
prevent oscillations of controlled variable.
Suction superheating set point and limits for low suction superheating, MOP and LOP alarms can be set in
the Service menu, while PID parameters of superheating control algorithm are in the Manufacturer menu.
In units with inverter compressors, each refrigeration circuit - even those with ON / OFF compressors only - it
is equipped with an electronic expansion valve. In the relevant manufacturer mask the EVD EVO driver must
be enabled for each refrigeration circuit; the driver communicates with the pCO board through the Carel

36
RS485 serial protocol. The EVD EVO allows the use of Carel brand valves only (ie, E2V, E3V, etc.), because
the envelope control of inverter compressor can be run successfully only with mentioned expansion valves.

The basic principle of the control algorithm is based on the stability together with a fast achievement of the
desired suction superheat, when possible.

The algorithm calculates the suction superheat as the difference between the temperature of the refrigerant at
the evaporator outlet – as read by the temperature probe and the saturation temperature corresponding to the
pressure value read by the transducer (placed in the same position). The link between pressure and the
corresponding saturated temperature is stored in look-up tables.

The heart of the control is a PID algorithm, which set point is the desired superheat. The set point is typically
set to 5°C. The coefficients of the PID are set according to theoretical considerations and experimental tests.
However, below are listed the general guidelines for an initial set up of PID parameters:

Parameter Description Recommended set value

Proportional gain Determines the n° of steps the valve has to open 15
as a response to a 1°C increase of superheat, i.e.
the valve capacity.
Integral time This parameter determines the speed at which 90 seconds (finned coil
the valve increases or diminishes its opening, exchangers). Too low values may
necessary to correct superheat values which are cause persistent hunting.
different from set point. It depends on the
evaporator characteristics.
Derivative time Determines the speed at which the valve 1.5 seconds (slow systems). Too
increases or diminishes its opening as a high values may cause instability
response to the speed of superheat changing. (valve repeatedly opens and
closes).
Percent opening It is the initial valve opening at compressor % ratio between refrigerant circuit
startup. After that, the regulation will follow the nominal cooling capacity and
PID algorithm. maximum valve capacity at the
same conditions.

Control parameters are:

Parameter Description Recommended set value

Sh Setpoint Superheat setpoint. 5°C
LowSh Low Superheat threshold (liquid return danger). 1.5°C
Controller reacts by closing the valve the quickest
way when superheat falls below the threshold.
LowSh Ti Integral time to be used for protection against low 10 seconds
superheat.
LOP Low evaporating pressure (Low Operating -22°C
Pressure). If the threshold is overcome, driver
opens the valve to avoid low pressure alarms,
therefore overriding superheat control (as low
superheat does not occur in these conditions).
LOP Ti Integral time for protection against low 10 seconds
evaporating pressure.
LOP delay time Time delay for LOP alarm. Default setting is such 300 seconds
as to allow compressor envelope control before
an LOP alarm occurs.
MOP High operating pressure (Maximum Operating 22°C
Pressure). In case the threshold were overcome,
the valve is closed in order to avoid compressor
overload (it works in the same way as TEV MOP
control).
MOP Ti Integral time for MOP protection. 10 seconds
MOP alarm delay This parameter is set at a high value, so that the 300 seconds
envelope control strategies may reduce the

37
 operating pressure before a MOP alarm occurs.

In case the EVD EVO drivers are enabled to control electronic expansion valves, the value read by the
evaporating pressure transducer is used to manage the low pressure alarm instead of a low pressure switch.
It is in any case recommended not to alter default set values, if not assisted by the Manufacturer.

5.7 Condensation fans (for air condensed units)

Two condensation fan outputs can be piloted by enabling the corresponding condensation type on the
Manufacturer menu. The following configurations are possible:

• Separate analogue outputs: each output controls a fan unit with a 0-10V modulating signal based on
the condensing pressure detected of each circuit.
• A single analogue output for each condensation coil with a 0-10V modulating signal based on the
higher condensing pressure.

In any case, the outputs are only activated when the compressors are switched ON: in the case of two
separate outputs, each one is only linked to operation of the relative cooling circuits; in the case of one
shared output, activation of one of the two cooling circuits is sufficient.

max speed max

1 bar min
Modulating
speed
min
0%
condensation differential Condensation pressure

Condensation set-point

Figure 5-8
A minimum and maximum speed can be set for the analogue output, in terms of output tension; if the
minimum speed setting is other than zero, the controller will automatically switch off the 1 bar output (fixed
value) when this drops below the condensation set value.
A speedup time can be set for condensing fans, this way when compressors turn ON condensing fans are
forced for the speedup time at maximum speed (10V analogue output), then the analogue output is controlled
by the condensing pressure set point and differential. This function can be used for AC condensing fans,
where low control signal at start-up can cause problems to the electrical motors. If the speedup time is set to
0, the function is disabled.
Fan forcing (also called pre-ventilation) can be enabled in the Manufacturer menu, which allows the user to
switch the ventilation ON at maximum speed (with the compressors OFF) if the pressure rises excessively,
example due to solar radiation.
All parameters related to air condensation control are in Service menu, while the choice of condensation type
is in Manufacturer menu.

5.8 Condensation valve (for water condensed units)

38
A single analogue output configuration can be used in water condensing units to pilot a condensation control
(two or three way) valve, with a similar logic to the condensation fans. A pre-opening value, a pre-opening
delay and a compressor start-up delay can be set. Therefore, the water valve can open and start the
adjusting process upon compressor start-up, thereby avoiding high pressure transient instances due to
mechanical inertia of the valve (fig 5-10).

A minimum and maximum valve opening can be set for the analogue output, in terms of output tension.
All parameters related to air and water condensation control are in Service menu, while the choice of
condensation type is in Manufacturer menu.

max opening

min opening

condensation differential Condensation pressure

Condensation set-point

Figure 5-9

Compressor
start-up Compressor Compressor
request start-up stop
Valve opening

pre-
adjustment

Compressor
start-up delay

Figure 5-10

39
5.9 Heating devices
Heating devices are used to heat the air to be treated so as to meet the temperature set-point.
The heating function can be controlled by different devices:
• electrical heaters: 1 stage, 2 stages, binary mode, modulating;
• hot water coil with ON/OFF or modulating valve;
• hot gas post heating coil with ON/OFF or modulating control.
The devices can also be combined, thus having a primary and a secondary heating device. Not all
combinations can be done, due to the number of analogue and digital outputs available on the control board.
The activation of heating function and the choice of primary and secondary heating device can be done on
the Manufacturer menu.

5.9.1 Electrical heaters

The electric heaters can be controlled in different ways:
• ON/OFF steps, up to a maximum of three using two outputs (the third step is controlled with binary
logic). The heating band is divided by the no. of steps in equal parts;
• Modulating, with a 0-100% control.

5.9.2 Hot water coil valve

The hot water coil valve can be both 2-ways or 3-ways and the valve motor can be of two different types:
• ON/OFF type, controlled using the same digital outputs as of the electric heaters;
• 0-10V modulating, in this case the valve opening range increases linearly within the 0 to 100%
proportional band.

5.9.3 Hot gas post heating

The hot gas post heating coil can be controlled in two different ways:
• ON/OFF control, using the same digital outputs as of the electric heaters;
• 0-10V modulating, in this case the post heating valve opening range increases linearly within the 0 to
100% proportional band.
Hot gas post heating will be active only in dehumidification mode: when air temperature drops below the set
point but the humidity set point is not met, air can be heated by mean of the hot gas post heating coil.
In case of units with 2 cooling circuits, hot gas post heating is available only for the first cooling circuit.

5.9.4 Heating devices alarms

Two digital inputs are available for heating devices alarms. The opening of a digital input immediately
deactivates the relative heating device.

5.9.5 Excluding the heaters via a digital input

In order to meet a particular electrical consumption demand, the heating devices can be disabled from a
digital output (on Large control boards). This makes sense only with electrical heaters, because of their high
electrical consumption. The choice of excluding heating devices via digital input is in alternative with
excluding humidifier, because the digital input used is the same.

5.10 Humidifier
This function supplies water steam to the air to be treated so as to meet the set relative humidity set-point,
that can be expressed both in relative humidity (percentage) or in absolute humidity (grams of water per
kilogram of dry air).
Humidification can be obtained by means of an integrated immersed electrode humidifier, proportionally
controlled, or with modulating (0-10V) control in the case of an external humidifier.

5.10.1 Integrated humidifier control

The main control parameters are:
• Humidity set point
• Humidification proportional band
• Maximum production

40
 Max production
[kg/h]

20% nom.
production

Proportional band rh%

Figure 5-11
The software processes the actual target cylinder production in accordance with Nominal Production (cylinder
parameter, equal to its maximum production at full capacity), Maximum Production (parameter set by the
user, a percentage of maximum production) and the difference between the set-point and the actual value
(according to the diagram in Figure 5-11).
The humidifier has a minimum production of 20% of the Nominal Power (for technical purposes) and remains
constant at this value up to 20% of the proportional band, increasing as the difference between actual
humidity and the set value also increases up to the maximum production set at the proportional band limit.

The integrated algorithm is briefly described below.

V
In this type of humidifier, vapour is produced due to the water boiling in the cylinder. Applying
voltage to the internal electrodes, the current heats the water to boiling point by Joule effect.
I
The current passing through the electrodes of the boiler depends on the voltage applied to the
electrodes, the conductivity of the water inside the cylinder and its level.
The objective of the algorithm is to maintain the current that circulates through the electrodes at a
reference value for the quantity of vapour required by the humidity probes and the parameters set
by the user to be produced.
The water level decreases during evaporation and since the measured current is directly
proportional to the amount of water in the cylinder, very small amounts of water would have to be
continuously poured into the cylinder to keep the current value constant.

Another determining factor, besides the level of the water inside the cylinder, which effects the measured current is
conductivity of the water inside the cylinder. In fact, during the evaporation cycles, water conductivity will increase
due to an increase in the concentration of salts. Conductivity of the water inside the boiler is measured indirectly by
means of the time taken to complete an evaporation cycle. This time is then compared with a reference value
(typical for each cylinder), and if this is less, a specific amount of water is drained (drain by dilution) and then less
conductive water is filled from the main supply.
The humidifier also has a conductivity meter that can detect the conductivity of the mains supply that enters
during fill-up. In the case of high conductivity of the water flow, the control algorithm first signals a pre-alarm
(that does not interrupt operation) and then an alarm (that interrupts operation). This is essential to prevent
excessive water flow conductivity in the cylinder that could compromise the proper operation of the humidifier.
A fundamental element placed at the top of the boiler is the high level probe that detects any water or foam.
The high level electrodes can intervene for various reasons:
• total water fill-up in the boiler - with the machine inactive - due to a leaking fill-up solenoid valve;
• high water level during the initial cylinder fill-up process;
• high water level following cylinder exhaustion due to deposits on the plates;

41
 • formation of foam.
Should the high level probe intervene repeatedly, the algorithm evaluates the possibility of this being caused
by the formation of foam. If the high level probe interventions persist after washing the cylinder completely
(complete drain-complete fill-up-complete drain) the controller signals a foam alarm (that does not interrupt
operation).
The control of any overcurrent is an important aspect of humidifier operation. In fact, each time voltage is
applied to the boiler electrodes after a stopped period, brief but very intense current peaks may occur. If an
overcurrent occurs during the initial period, the algorithm responds immediately by disconnecting the voltage
from the electrodes and activating a drain cycle. If the overcurrent should persist, humidifier operation is
interrupted and a high current alarm is triggered.
The algorithm also monitors the methods with which the draining cycles are implemented, signalling a drain
alarm if necessary, if a significant current reduction is not detected as from when a drain cycle begins.
Vice versa, a no water alarm can be signalled if a significant current increase is not detected during the
humidifier water fill-up cycle.

A number of auxiliary functions can also be managed from the controller:

- drain due to set-point reduction. In the event of significant reductions in desired vapour production during
operation, activate a drain cycle instead of waiting for the water level to decrease (and therefore production)
by means of evaporation. The drain cycle is considered high if the current exceeds 33% of that associated
with the request. Active by default.
- drain due to prolonged inactivity (Days). If the humidifier remains ON but in a non-productive state for more
than the set time, the controller activates a complete drain cycle of the water in the cylinder. This function
prevents the electrodes from corrosion caused by highly saline water if the humidifier is not used for long
periods. Active by default.
- periodic drain (Hours). If the water supply contains impurities (such as humus) or is very aggressive, the
boiler must be periodically emptied by setting the desired time interval. Active by default.
- drain without power. If an automatic drain cycle is activated to remove salts, the electrodes are
disconnected, thereby stopping vapour production temporarily. This way, possible current dispersion to earth
is prevented if the drain pipes are conductive. Active by default.
- exhausted cylinder signal. The "almost exhausted cylinder" or "exhausted cylinder" signals can be enabled
and are managed from the controller autonomously according to the operating parameters recorded by the
cylinder itself, which indicate that the cylinder can no longer guarantee nominal production. The signals do not
deactivate the cylinder (no by default).
- shutdown delay (seconds). A cylinder shutdown delay can be enabled as from when the humidification
request ends (zero by default).
- forced conductivity (µS/cm). This is set to zero by default.
- drain percentage time. This and the following parameter can modify the duration of the drain cycle
(percentage) by dilution and its frequency. It is recommended not to modify the default values.
- evap. percentage time.
- high conductivity pre-alarm and alarm. Water supply conductivity alarm thresholds are present. Excessively
conductive water can damage the cylinder. The pre-alarm does not switch the cylinder OFF but the alarm
does.
- Operating hours alarm threshold. A maintenance time limit can be set as follows, if required: operating
hours are calculated by the actual cylinder production percentage (i.e. 1000 hours at 50% capacity are equal
to 500 hours at 100% capacity); when the pre-set threshold is reached, a pre-alarm is displayed (cylinder
maintenance warning); when 1.5 times the set threshold is reached, a maintenance alarm is displayed and
the cylinder is stopped. The humidifier operating hours must be reset before resetting both types of alarm.

5.10.2 External humidifier control

An ON/OFF type of external humidifier (controlled by a specific relay output) as well as a modulating control
type (controlled by a 0-10V analogue output) can be managed.

In the former case, the humidifier is activated when the set-point less the humidifier proportional band is
reached and then stops at the set-point. The external humidifier must have its own control logic and a
potential-free alarm contact connected to the relative input of the pCO* board to signal the fault. In this case
the digital output will be deactivated.

42
In the latter case, the 0-10V signal activation is proportional to the ambient humidity position within the
humidification proportional band; even in this case, the external humidifier must have its own adjustment logic
and a potential-free contact to signal the alarm status as explained above.

5.10.3 Excluding the humidifier via a digital input

A specific digital input can be activated to deactivate the humidifier via a potential-free contact. This can be
useful for example, for energy saving purposes or similar reasons (only on a LARGE board). The choice of
excluding humidifier via digital input is in alternative with excluding heating devices, because the digital input
used is the same.

5.11 Supply air fan

The supply fan can be controlled by two types of control:
• ON/OFF control managed via digital output;
• modulating control (0-10V signal) managed via analogue output.

In both cases, the fan is activated when the unit is set to ON and remains so until the unit is set to OFF (via a
keyboard, digital input, time bands, monitoring or serious alarm) or STAND-BY (by rotation with other units on
the network). Fan activation delay times can be set with regards to unit start-up (ON) and shutdown (OFF).

The fan is only switched OFF during operation if an alarm is triggered. This occurs due to a direct ventilation
alarm (motor thermal protection, no air flow) or a serious alarm related to the unit as a whole (fire/smoke
alarm, flood alarm, external alarm, condensate drain pump alarm). Chilled water units allow the user to define
whether the (chilled) water flow alarm must stop the fan or not.

If the fan is controlled by a digital (ON/OFF) type of signal, the output works as follows: digital output is
activated when the unit is set to ON and remains so until the unit is set to OFF (via a keyboard, digital input,
time bands or monitoring) or STAND-BY (by rotation with other units on the network). Digital output activation
delay times can be set with regards to unit start-up (ON) and shutdown (OFF).

If the fan is controlled by a modulating (0-10V) type of signal, for units with inverter compressors the following
operating logic can be applied:

• Manual or fixed speed

The fan control logic is enabled in manual mode from the relative mask in Manufacturer menu.
Manual control requires the fan speed to be set manually in the relative mask in the set-point menu. The set
values range between two limits (minimum and maximum).

• Automatic POC
The logic is enabled from the relative mask in Manufacturer menu.
The fan speed is automatically controlled by a feedback system for the air flow to be kept constant as the
external conditions vary (filter status, pressure drops in the air distribution system, etc.). The minimum,
maximum, differential and set-point pressure values are set for the dehumidification mode in the relative
mask.
Note that for units with 2 cooling circuits it is not possible to modulate significantly the air flow, because the
circuit with ON/OFF compressors only requires a constant air flow, in order to keep an evaporating
temperature close to the design one; so, for these units air flow modulation range will be very narrow.
The controller must calculate a pressure value upon unit start-up, which depends always on the air return
temperature reading, even when the thermoregulation is on air supply temperature. The controller compares
the read value with the return temperature set-point and differential just like during regular operation. An
actual pressure value must correspond with the read temperature value and where this is positioned with
respect to the set-point and differential (fig. 6-11).
Therefore, the actual pressure value varies linearly with respect to the return temperature and the relative
band.
The controller logic tends to "follow" and meet the actual pressure value (therefore considered a variable set-
point), comparing it with the value read by the transducer on the fan nozzle.
This system provides the precise air flow value according to the thermal load
A return temperature set-point offset is set up on CW units to reach the minimum speed at a temperature that
is slightly higher than the set-point. In certain applications, this allows the cold water valve to open before the
fan starts to work.

43
One of the installed fans must have an air flow measuring system for this mode to be used. This logic is
applied with "EC Radial" type fans.
The control system has a nozzle with one or more pressure inlets and an air differential pressure transducer.
The air flow of a single fan is linked to the pressure difference measured between the external and internal
parts of the nozzle. The controller adjusts this pressure difference and thereby controls the air flow.

Figure 5-12
The feedback control diagram is shown in Figure 5-12
10. The system enables an air differential pressure transducer on analogue input B3 by selecting the type (4-
20 mA, 0-10V, 0-5V) and the measurement range. The pressure value is read and compared with the desired
set-point value.
The PID regulator parameters (proportional band, integral time and differential time) can be set in the
Manufacturer menu. It is recommended to contact the Manufacturer's Technical Assistance department for
the above mentioned parameters to be modified.
The pressure value read by the transducer and its conversion into the air flow rate can be viewed in the I/O
menu.
When the differential pressure transducer is enabled, the no air flow alarm is controlled via software and not
via a digital input:

equivalent Reset
alarm status
differential

Alarm Air diff. pressure

threshold

Figure 5-13
The alarm threshold and reset differential (in Pa) can be set as controller parameters.

44
 Max pressure set-point

Min pressure set-point

Return T

Setp. Setp.+offset Setp+band

Figure 5-14

To obtain constant air flow operation with Auto-POC logic, simply set the maximum pressure value equivalent
to the minimum pressure value
The air flow remains fixed in dehumidification mode (single pressure set-point for dehumidification).

• Auto-PRC mode
The logic is enabled by the relevant mask in the Manufacturer Menu. The fan speed is controlled
automatically by a feedback system, to maintain constant the air pressure in the raised floor or in the cold
aisle containment, regardless of changing external conditions (pressure losses in the air distribution system,
fouling of the filters, etc.).
In the relevant mask of Setpoint Menu it is possible to set the desired pressure value. A differential pressure
transducer, installed on board of the unit, detects the pressure difference between the suction side of the unit
and the floor; the flexible hose connected to the "+" of the pressure transducer must be properly positioned in
the raised floor (positioning by the installer), at a distance from the discharge section of the unit such that the
pressure measurement is not influenced by the distribution air.
Instead, the hose connected to the "-" of the pressure transducer must be properly positioned in a plenum on
the intake of the unit, at a distance from the inlet section of the unit such that the pressure measurement is
not influenced by the distribution air.
The minimum speed of the fan is limited to a value such as to maintain a minimum air flow required to ensure
an evaporation temperature compatible with the correct operation of the cooling circuit.
The alarm air flow is controlled via digital input (air flow) and not through pressure transducer.
In this operating mode mode it is not possible to specify a pressure to be maintained during dehumidification.
Do not use this method of ventilation control when the unit is equipped with additional cooling devices (Dual
Cooling, Free Cooling water, Free Cooling air).

5.12 Free Cooling

This is an operating mode that allows the user to use a "free" cooling source (water or air), only available in
certain circumstances as an alternative to normal cooling (generally compressors).

5.12.1 Water free cooling (FcW)

Water condensing units can be set up with an additional water cooling coil, deriving for example from an
external dry cooler, normally used to cool condensation water. If the water temperature is sufficiently cold, it
can be used for cooling as an alternative or in addition to the compressors. Subsequently, the water exiting
the free cooling coil can be used for condensation.
The controller uses a temperature probe in the water and if its temperature is acceptable, a 0-10V modulating
valve is controlled through an analogue output.
The water deriving from the external source can be used by setting the parameters appropriately and
following either of the three possible methods below:
• According to the difference (offset) from the air entering the unit. By default this value is set to 2°C.
The free cooling valve is only activated if the water temperature is at least 2°C lower than that of the
air.
• According to the absolute water temperature. By default this value is set to 16°C. The free cooling
valve is only activated if the water temperature is less than 16°C. A minimum limit can also be set.

45
 • According to the external air temperature (if the relative probe is enabled). Free cooling is enabled if
the external air temperature is lower than that of the internal air (by a specific offset). In this way, an
external dry cooler can be used, thereby obtaining water at an intermediate temperature between the
external air and the ambient air.

Free cooling not Free cooling

active active
offset t air-t water

Free cooling Free cooling Free cooling

not active active not active

Min Max t water

Free cooling not Free cooling

active active
offset t air_in-tair_ext

Figure 5-15
There are two distinct methods of integrating the cooling devices: normal and "free".
The former method requires a free cooling valve to be used with the compressors (auxiliary compressor
operation). In this case, the cooling proportional band is divided in two parts: a return valve is used in the first
part and the compressor steps in the second. This means that free cooling is used alone as long as the load
demand is met, otherwise the compressors are activated also.
The diagram below illustrates the control logic: note how the operating bands of the chilled water valve and
the compressors overlap. Only the valve's maximum opening can be modified.

Set-point

Chilled water Comp. 1 Compressor 2

valve
Compressor 1

33% 40% 67% Ambient T

Cooling band

Figure 5-16

The latter method only requires the return valve, provided the water is sufficiently cold (alternating
compressor mode). The valve occupies the entire proportional band as in the case of the chilled water coil,
modulating according to the thermal load request.

In both cases, if the water temperature does not conform with that required for free cooling, the relative valve
is closed and the cooling is transferred entirely to the compressors that occupy the entire proportional band.

46
If dehumidification is required, compressor start-up can be delayed with respect to the valve's total opening.

5.12.2 Air free cooling (ED and CW)

If the external air temperature is less than that of the air return and is made available to be unit, the same
modulating analogue output used to control the free cooling valve can be used to control the mixing dampers.
The operating logic is very similar to that of water free cooling: if the external air temperature is less than the
return air temperature by a differential value (generally 2°C, adjustable), the analogue output is activated to
control the damper system that allows progressively increasing external air percentages to enter. The
adjustment logic is identical to that of water free cooling: use of the compressors (DE) or chilled water valve
(CW) can be set as auxiliary to the dampers (if the load is not met) or alternative (either of the two work). If
the air temperature is beyond the permitted limits, only the compressors (DE) or the cold water coil (CW)
work.

Set-point

External air Comp. 1 Compressor 2

damper
Compressor 1

33% 40% 67% Ambient T

Cooling band

Figure 5-17

5.13 Dual Cooling

The unit must be configured for the installation of an additional water coil.
Even though the dual cooling function is similar to the water free cooling function, the difference lies in the
units using two cooling systems, one main (chilled water) and one secondary (or backup) in direct expansion;
in this case, the direct expansion cooling circuit is air condensed.
As long as there is a chilled water flow (indicated by the flow switch), with a coil inlet water temperature
adequate for the set parameters, the unit uses the chilled water coil as the main cooling system. The chilled
water flow in the coil is adjusted by a valve (0-10V) controlled by analogue output AO6. The controller uses
the compressors if there is no water or the water temperature entering the coil is too high.
Compressor operation can be enabled as alternative or auxiliary to the chilled water coil. Refer to Figure 5-16.
If dehumidification is required, compressor start-up can be delayed with respect to the valve's total opening.

5.14 Limiting the supply temperature in free cooling and dual cooling mode
Both types of operation require a temperature probe on the air flow.
This prevents air that is too cold from entering the ambient during free cooling and ice formation on the direct
expansion coil when this works together with free cooling.
The parameters that determine the function of this feature are mainly a set-point and an air flow differential.
The "limit" of the cooling devices within the differential increases proportionally until it reaches the "total limit"
at the differential extreme. As for the limited devices, if the compressors are not enabled together with the
valves/dampers, this means:
• The valves are closed progressively;
• The single ON/OFF compressor is switched OFF when reaching the differential;

47
 • The single BLDC compressor power requirement is progressively reduced approaching the
differential;
• In the case of plural compressors arrangement, the differential is equally divided by the number of
compressors and one compressor is switched OFF when reaching a quote of the differential and so
on.

Supply min set-point

C2 C1
C1

V/D
Differential t

Figure 5-18
If free cooling or dual cooling is enabled together with the compressors, the latter are switched OFF
simultaneously when half the differential is reached, since the valve or dampers are closed progressively in
the other half.

Supply min set-point

V/D C1+C2

t
Differential

Figure 5-19
Note that the supply temperature limiting function can be enabled separately from free cooling or dual cooling
and in this case the adjustment described in the above figure applies.

5.15 Anti-Sticking function for Dual Cooling and Free Cooling units
In some occasions, it may happen that Dual Cooling or Free Cooling units work for long periods of time with
the external cooling source only (water, or air), so the refrigerant circuit is idle. In order to avoid prolonged idle
time, the controller implements a feature named “Anti-Sticking” which periodically starts up the refrigerant
circuit for a pre-defined time, therefore commuting the cooling mode of the unit; start-up delay and forced
working time are settable parameters of the controller.

48
5.16 Air supply damper control
A ON/OFF servo motor can be controlled by a digital output for a non-return air damper.
This is useful in installations where several units are in operation to prevent air recirculation when the unit is
OFF.
The time that must elapse from when the unit goes ON to when the fan starts is set in the relative mask,
thereby allowing the damper servo controller to open before the fan is activated.

5.17 Manual control of the devices

This refers to particular masks in the Maintenance section that allow the user to enable the individual outputs
(digital and analogue) manually and separately, to perform tests or maintenance.
The programme allows all the digital outputs (except those relative to the integrated humidifier) and all the
analogue outputs (at the desired value between 0 and 10 V) to be energised manually.
With regards to the integrated humidifier, a pre-wash cycle can be activated (simultaneous opening of the fill-
up and drain valves for 10 mins, therefore three complete fill-up/drain cycles) or a complete water drain cycle.

Manual activation of the individual outputs requires a number of precautions in order to prevent incorrect
operation of the devices:

• Always activate digital output no. 1 (fan) first, even when the output is not physically connected, to
prevent failure of the safety devices.
• Unless a simulated test is being run with no voltage to the loads, activate the compressors and/or the
heaters after having activated the ventilation.
• Deactivate digital output no. 1 last.

Manual control is only possible with the unit OFF. All activated outputs must be deactivated manually during
the manual procedure for the unit to be restarted in automatic mode (ON status).

5.18 Unit alarms

The terminal connected to the pCO* board can display several alarms, depending on unit configuration,
triggered by the opening of a digital input to which a safety device is connected, a set threshold being
exceeded or abnormal operating conditions.
When an alarm is triggered, the terminal connected to the pCO* board lights up the red LED below the
ALARM key and energises the warning digital output (NO7) or the alarm digital output (NO8). Press the
ALARM key to display the active alarm; to reset an active alarm, press for at least 3 seconds the ALARM key
and then press ENTER key when required; an alarm can be reset only if the conditions allow this.
Last 100 alarms triggered are stored into the data logger, accessible from the corresponding menu (see
relative chapter). For alarm code and description, see relative chapter.

5.18.1 Alarms that stop the unit

The following alarms are triggered when there are conditions that can cause serious damages to the unit, so
they stop immediately the whole unit:
• Smoke/fire alarm;
• Air flow alarm (from air flow switch or from air pressure transducer);
• pCO permanent memory fault alarm;
• pCO chip I/O fault alarm.

Moreover, it is possible to choose from User menu whether the following alarms have to stop the unit or not:
• Water leakage alarm;
• Condensate drain pump alarm.

49
5.18.2 Minor and serious alarms
Each alarm can be set as "minor" or "serious" from User menu; the distinction is effective in the following
cases:
• When a number of units are in Running/Stand-by mode on the Datalink local network and a "serious"
alarm is triggered, one of the units in stand-by is activated.
• Digital output 7 is activated if the alarm is marked as a "minor” alarm (warning or light) and such an
alarm is triggered;
• Digital output 8 is activated if the alarm is marked as a "serious” alarm and such an alarm is triggered.

NOTE: the characteristics of a particular alarm (see the table in the alarm chapter) determine whether the
entire unit has to be shut down or not. This does NOT depend on the minor/serious classification.

If the customer must manage an alarm deriving from an external controller, a digital input of the pCO* board
can be customised as follows: the external alarm can be assigned to the minor or serious alarm category from
the relative mask and the text description of the alarm that appears on the display can be set.

5.18.3 Low pressure alarm controlled automatic reset

Low pressure alarm from low pressure transducer or low pressure switch can be reset manually or
automatically, while high pressure alarm from high pressure switch or from high pressure transducer can be
reset only manually.
The control parameters for these alarms are available in the Manufacturer section.
For low pressure alarm, the controller allows a limited number of resets in a specific time interval. A
subsequent alarm within the same interval leads to the alarm appearing on the display and can only be reset
manually from the keyboard.
Example: A maximum number of three alarms in thirty minutes is set. When the first alarm is triggered, the
controller automatically resets the unit when the alarm conditions are resolved (e.g. a pressure switch is
closed). If other alarms occur, the controller keeps track of the time elapsed and once a fourth alarm is
triggered within thirty minutes, manual reset is required.

1sta 2nda 3rda 4thm 4tha

30 min t

Figure 5-20

Clearly, if the number of alarms and time intervals are set freely, the user must apply due caution and be
aware of the unit operating specifications in order to prevent the alarms from always being reset automatically
due to a low ratio (time)/(no. of alarms). It is recommended to set a minimum value that is greater than the
compressor anti-recirculation time.

5.18.4 Water flow switch control

The water flow switch is controlled differently and particularly, according to the function required.

Type of unit What is controlled What is shut down Type of reset

Water condensed Condensation water Compressors Automatic or manual
ED
Dual Cooling ED Chilled water Chilled water valve Automatic or manual

50
In the case of water condensed direct expansion units, the flow switch has the basic function of preventing
high pressure alarms due to no water.
In the case of chilled water units, the flow switch has the function of monitoring water presence for the water
coil.
In the case of DC units, the flow switch switches the cooling function to the backup system (compressors or
secondary water valve) if there is no primary chilled water.

In all instances, the alarm delay time can be set upon start-up as well as during operation. If automatic reset
is configured, the number of restarts is not limited.

5.18.5 Configurable alarm potential free contacts (Alarm Board)

Different signal/status functions can only be assigned to digital outputs 14 - 18 if the pCO* LARGE board is
present. The possible assignments are:

• Disabled
• Supply air fan alarm
• Condensation drain pump alarm
• Power+ alarm
• EVD EVO alarm
• Water leakage alarm
• Water flow alarm
• Fire/smoke alarm
• Dirty air filter alarm
• Air flow alarm
• External humidifier alarm
• CPY general alarm
• Thermal overload heaters alarm
• High/low return air humidity alarm
• High/low return air temperature alarm
• High/low supply air temperature alarm
• LP circuit 1 alarm
• LP circuit 2 alarm
• HP circuit 1 alarm
• HP circuit 2 alarm
• Unit in dehumidification mode
• Unit in humidification mode
• Unit in heating mode
• Unit in cooling mode
• Supply air fans ON
• Unit ON

Note that not all options will be always available, depending on unit configuration.
The same variable can be selected for several outputs.

For example:
OUT 14- (Disabled)
OUT 15- HP circuit 1 alarm
OUT 16- (Disabled)
OUT 17- Dirty air filter alarm
OUT 18- Unit in cooling mode

Other example:
OUT 14- Power+ alarm
OUT 15- HP circuit 1 alarm
OUT 16- HP circuit 2 alarm

51
OUT 17- Dirty filter alarm
OUT 18- Unit in cooling mode

52
5.18.6 Alarm log
The memory available on the pCO* board records alarm events. The log record can be accessed from the
Data logger menu and displays the following for each view:
• Progressive alarm number;
• Hour and date when the alarm was triggered;
• Alarm code;
• Alarm description;
• Additional parameters, such as return and supply air temperature, condensing and evaporating
pressure, EEV position, BLDC compressor envelope zone, etc., depending on unit configuration.
A maximum of 100 alarms can be recorded, after which they are overwritten starting from the older one.
The recorded alarms are scrolled through with the arrow keys.
The entire log can be deleted following a specific procedure in the Service menu.

5.18.7 Sending alarm messages via a GSM network

A telephone number (GSM) can be set if the pCO* board has an RS232 serial board and is connected to a
GSM modem with an activated SIM card, to which the pCO* can send alarm messages. The messages sent
are those recorded in the "base log". The function is enabled by selecting GSM communication protocol in the
relative Service mask, setting the GSM telephone number to which the messages are to be sent and the
GSM modem communication speed (normally 9600 bps).

Hereunder is a list of GSM modems:

TYPE MANUFACTURER COMPATIBILITY (*)

WIRELESS AIRLINK FXT CAREL (SIERRA) YES
POCKET GSM DIGICOM YES
GSM 2702-D MICROTEL YES
WMOD2B WAVECOM YES
FALCOM A2D FALCOM YES
FALCOM A3D FALCOM YES

(*) Theoretical compatibility according to Hayes command set

The modems have been tested with the hardware and function correctly. The compatible modems have been
verified according to Hayes command set, which coincides with the command set used by the pCO*.

Follow the instructions provided with the modem to connect the pCO* to the GSM modem. The RS232 serial
board of the pCO* requires a 9-pin female connector.

5.19 Advanced log

The pCO* board has a flash memory to store the main variables (temperature, humidity, etc.); these variables
are logged at a fixed time interval. It is also possible to log some other variables when a particular event
occurs (for example a compressor turns on, an alarm is triggered, etc.). The log progress of these variables
can be downloaded to a PC via the programming Smartkey or pCO Manager software for offline analysis.
For further details refer to the manual of Carel pCO Manager or contact our Service.
The recording log can be accessed from any mask by pressing the "alarm" and "enter" keys at the same time
for a few seconds, and the following mask will appear.

> SYSTEM INFORMATION

LOG DATA
OTHER INFORMATION
-

53
The “>” symbol is present on the right of the mask, which can be shifted with the arrow keys onto the access
lines to the successive menus.
By moving the “>” symbol along the “LOG DATA” line with the arrow keys, and confirming with the “enter”
key, you access the recording log.
If a file for recording the alarms and variables has not been entered into the control memory, the following
mask appears.

0
NO LOG DATA
PRESS
[MENU] OR [ESC]

If however, the log management files have been installed correctly, the following mask appears.

1 DISPLAY LOG DATA

Which memory?

INTERNAL MEMORY

This is the first level of the masks that appear in the log.
This requests to select in which memory the log is to be read, which can be in the internal memory or in an
expansion.
The log can be viewed in the memory where it was installed, which is normally the internal memory.
Where the memory to be read has been selected using the aroow keys, to enter the second level it is
necessary to confirm using the "enter" key.

2 DISPLAY LOG DATA

Which Log?

Xxxxxxxxxxx

At the second level it is requested at which log to access.

It is possible to select to analyse the log at events or that recorded cyclically, which means at a determined
frequency.
The name of the log is present in the last line, which can be accessed using the "enter" key.
With the "up" and "down" arrow keys it is possible to change log from events to cyclical and vice versa.

3 DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX
1 (0)

At the second level, by selecting the events log, access the third in which the mask above is an example.
The date and time at which the event took place appear in the first line.

54
A text that indicates the event are present in the second and third line. As the space for the description is
reduced and appears only in English, the text includes the number of the corresponding alarm mask.
In the fourth line it is possible to detect whether the recording concerns the activation of the alarm or its reset.
In the example in the figure, the state "1" coming from "(0)" concerns activation, if state "0" appeared coming
from "(1)" it is reset.
From this mask, use the up key to pass to the next event and use the down key to pass to the previous one.
The "enter" key is used to advance by one level and it is possible to see the values recorded at the time of the
event.

4 DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX
+000.0

In fourth level masks it is possible to see the recorded values, at the time when the event from the
corresponding mask of the previous level took place.
The first line of the mask states the same date and time as the previous mask, which refers to the time of
recording.
The second and third masks contain the description of the variable recorded with reference to the
corresponding mask.
The value recorded is given in the last line.
Using the up and down arrow keys, from this mask it is possible to scroll through all of values of the recording
that was made when the event it refers to occurred.
The fifth level is accessed by pressing the "enter" button.

5
Log status: ENABLED

UP or DOWN: change

At the fifth level, which among other things is common for both types of recording, it ispossible to use the
arrow keys to "ENABLE" or "DISABLE" the recordings.
The recordings must be disabled when the data recorded must not be lost, e.g. when the expansion memory
board is removed from the installation for successive analysis.

From the second level we have seen that, as well as the event log, it ispossible to access the frequency
cyclical one.
In this case, from the second level using the "enter" key access is given to the third level of which a mask
type is shown below.

3 DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
UP : next record
DOWN : perv. record
ENTER : view data

The first line shows the date and time of the recording. Use the up arrow to access the next recording and the
down arrow to access the previous recording and use the enter key to access the values recorded at the date
and time shown.

55
56
 4 DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX
+000.0

The masks in the fourth level allow to see the values recorded at the date and time, which is shown again in
the first line, selected in the mask at the previous level.
The second and third masks contain the description of the variable recorded with reference to the
corresponding mask.
The value recorded is given in the last line.
From this mask, using the up and down arrow keys, it is possible to scroll all values whose recording is
envisioned.
By pressing the "enter" key, access the fifth level that is the same for events recordings.

5.20 Datalink p-LAN local network

The system can be controlled more effectively due to the possibility of connecting a maximum of 16 units on
the p-LAN network. Different systems of unit management can be configured, as described in the following
paragraphs.
Note that Datalink network is not compatible with operation based on time scheduler.

5.20.1 Running/Stand-by
A rotation system can be configured, in which a certain number of units are active (running) and others are in
stand-by. The following can be set in particular (only on the unit with the pCO* board having a p-LAN=1
address):

• The units present on the network;

• The number of units normally in stand-by;
• Type of rotation (automatic, based on operating hours or daily hour);
• Duration of rotation (if in automatic or based on operating hours) or rotation time and interval (in
days).

All the rotation functions are only active if board no. 1 (master unit) is ON and physically connected to the p-
LAN. Otherwise, all the other units will run as stand-alone, independently from one another.

During normal operation, when the set rotation interval elapses (if in hours or at a fixed time every given
number of days), one of the active units switches OFF and one of the other units in stand-by switches ON. If
rotation is automatic or daily, the activated unit with the lowest address switches OFF and the unit in stand-by
with the highest address switches ON (FIFO logic). If rotation is based on the operating hours, the unit with
the highest number of operating hours switches OFF (from those activated) and that with the lowest number
of operating hours switches ON (from those in stand-by).

The units in stand-by can also be activated before normal rotation elapses, if the following events occur:
• A black-out occurs in one of the activated units or it is disconnected from the P-LAN, or it is set to
OFF via keyboard or digital input;
• One of the activated units signals a SERIOUS alarm (marked as serious alarm from User menu of the
single unit, refer to alarm management paragraph);
• One of the units is completely switched OFF due to an alarm that stops the unit (e.g. fire/smoke, air
flow, etc., refer to alarm management paragraph).

The logic will try to activate the same number of units in stand-by as those affected by the above conditions (if
available). When the problem is resolved, the previously activated unit/s will return to their stand-by mode.

57
A particular setting for automatic rotation is when rotation time is set to 0 minutes, for further explanation see
the paragraph about stand-by mode.

5.20.2 Forced by temperature

This function starts-up a unit in stand-by as support if one of the activated units has problems controlling the
thermal load. The force adjustment parameters, particularly those below, can only be set on the unit with
address 1:
• Force differential
• Force offset
• Force delay time

Different parameters and times can be set for heating and cooling.

Heating Cooling
force offset force offset
Temp. set-point

Heat band Cool band Ambient T

caldo
Heating force differential Cooling force differential

Figure 5-21
If an activated unit detects an increase in the return temperature, which exceeds the higher and lower
thresholds (force differential +/- set-point), a unit in stand-by is forced until the temperature returns within the
force limit -/+ the force offset.

5.20.3 Stand-by mode

Once the network is configured with "n" units and the rotation time (for automatic or working hours rotation) is
set to 0 on the unit with address 1, this function “freezes” the unit rotation and allows all the units on the
network to maintain their own "role" (rotation inhibition) in non-alarm conditions.
If we consider an example with a P-LAN network consisting of two units, one of which in running mode and
the other in stand-by, the unit that switches ON first is always in running mode, the second is always in stand-
by and the “role” of the machines is maintained constant. The unit in stand-by only enters operation mode due
to an alarm being triggered on a unit in running mode or the high temperature alarm threshold being
exceeded.

5.20.4 Distributed Control

This function replaces the Master/Slave configuration.
The type of settings for the P-LAN network is the same as that of the Running/Stand-by configuration: the
number of units on the network is set together with those in rotation and in stand-by. The new feature pertains
to the temperature that the units refer to: this must be the average of all the temperatures measured locally by
the units in running mode (that in stand-by must not be included). Therefore, all the activated units operate in
the same mode, i.e. all in cooling or post-heating mode, etc. A differential must be set between the return
temperature of the individual unit and the average value calculated, which when exceeded the unit operates
autonomously. There is one differential for cooling and one for heating.
This is suitable for well-balanced systems as well as unbalanced premises (hot spots).

58
There is another function which, once the high temperature alarm threshold value is exceeded, the unit/s in
stand-by are activated and operation complies with that described for the units in running mode (refer to the
measured average temperature).
The same type of operation is also set to control the humidity when required.
When the distributed control mode is activated in CW units together with the external chiller set-point
compensation, the average humidity and temperature is noted together with the operating mode of the unit
with address 1 (since all units on the network are the same from this aspect, the external chiller must be
piloted from one single unit).

5.21 Clock and operation based on time scheduler

An integrated clock allows the user to set the time and date, while the day of the week is automatically
calculated. It is also possible to enable and set:
• daylight saving time (DST) automatic transition;
• a scheduler based on four time bands;
• up to three holiday periods;
• up to six special days.

Note that it is not possible to configure and use scheduler in the following cases, because these options are
not compatible with unit scheduler:
• when Datalink p-LAN network is enabled;
• When variable set point from analogue input is enabled.

Note also that unit temperature set point for scheduler is unique, meaning that there aren’t two different set
points for return air temperature and for supply air temperature; the selection of thermoregulation type will
always be done from User menu, as described before.

5.21.1 Time bands scheduler

Four time bands are identified, if enabled. For each time band, it is possible to:
• set starting time of the time band;
• set if the unit has to be ON or OFF in the time band;
• set humidity set point for the time band (effective only if humidity control is enabled), in relative
humidity (rH%) or absolute humidity (g/kg) depending on the humidity control type set from User
menu;
• set temperature set point for the time band.

5.21.2 Holiday periods scheduler

From Clock menu, it is possible to enable and set up to three holiday periods; for each one, it is possible to:
• set starting day (from 00:00 hour) of the holiday period;
• set ending day (from 00:00 hour) of the holiday period;
• set if the unit has to be ON or OFF during the holiday period;
• set humidity set point for the holiday period (effective only if humidity control is enabled), in relative
humidity (rH%) or absolute humidity (g/kg) depending on the humidity control type set from User
menu;
• set temperature set point for the holiday period.

5.21.3 Special days scheduler

From Clock menu, it is possible to enable and set up to six special days; for each one, it is possible to:
• set special day date;
• set if the unit has to be ON or OFF during the special day;
• set humidity set point for the special day (effective only if humidity control is enabled), in relative
humidity (rH%) or absolute humidity (g/kg) depending on the humidity control type set from User
menu;

59
 • set temperature set point for the special day.

5.22 Default programming backup

The software allows to make a complete backup of factory programming and parameters and to retrieve it at
any time, thus restoring factory parameters configuration.

5.22.1 Saving a set of parameters

Only personnel assigned to perform tests and maintenance on the unit can create a copy of the current
parameter configuration from the Manufacturer menu.

5.22.2 Retrieving a set of parameters

The last saved configuration can be retrieved at any time from the User menu; this operation will overwrite
any parameter modified after factory testing.

5.23 Refrigerant table control

The only refrigerant allowed for Datatech units is R-410A; the proper refrigerant table for pressure-
temperature conversion is automatically selected.

5.24 Units of measurement

The only units of measurement that can be displayed are:
• °C for temperatures;
• %rH or g/kg for humidity;
• bar for refrigerant pressure;
• Pa (Pascal) for air pressure;
• m3/h for air flow.

5.25 Display languages

The interface masks can be displayed in the following languages (note that some languages may be partially
or completely not available):

• Italian
• English
• French
• German

Manufacturer Menu is available in Italian and English only.

The language can be selected in the Service menu; in the same menu, it is possible to select if the language
selection mask must be displayed each time the controller is switched ON following shutdown or a blackout.

60
6 BMS SUPERVISION
The unit controller manages different supervision protocols; it is necessary to have a different additional serial
card for each protocol, refer to the Hardware chapter.
Protocol type, speed and configuration parameters can be set from Service menu.
Refer to BMS variable table for variable addressing.
The different available protocols are:

• ModBus RS485;
• BACnet;
• LON (Carel protocol);
• Ethernet protocols: SNMP, http and BACnet™ over IP protocol.

Different serial cards must be used for each protocol, for further information refer to the hardware paragraph.

6.1 Modbus RS485 slave extended protocol

The Modbus protocol type used for supervision is Modbus RS485 slave extended. Different communication
speed can be set depending on customer’s needs, up to 38400 bps.
This protocol is able to manage up to:
• 2048 digital variables;
• 5000 analogue variables;
• 5000 integer variables.

Variable types and addresses are reported on the following table.

Modbus protocol address

Modbus protocol
Modbus protocol physical address (for
Variable type internal address
variable type external supervision, e.g.
(logical address)
for ModScan)
Digital Coil 1-2048 2-2049
Analogue Register 1-5000 2-5001
Integer Register 5002-10001 5003-10002

For variable description, refer to supervision variable table.

6.2 BACnet protocol

The BACnet protocol type used for supervision has similar characteristics to the Modbus RS485 slave
extended and is configured in the same way.
For variable description, refer to supervision variable table.

6.3 LON protocol

The LON protocol type used for supervision is Carel Slave LON, with a fixed baud rate of 4800 bps; the
number of transmitted variables is limited to 59, due to protocol intrinsic characteristics.
For variable description, refer to supervision variable table.

61
7 INPUT AND OUTPUT TABLE
The controller manages the unit via its inputs and outputs.
Various input and output configurations can be selected between Small (S), Medium (M) and Large (L)
boards, according to the type of complexity of the unit to be controlled.
Direct expansion (ED) as well as chilled water (CW) air-conditioning cabinets can be controlled. The
programme recognises the type and size of the board upon start-up and consequently prepares the inputs
and outputs. The multiple names (xxx / xxx / …) indicate the various purposes for which an input or output
can be used; the selection is made through the parameters in the Manufacturer mask section.

7.1 Direct expansion unit (ED) with BLDC compressors

The pCO control board can have the following I/O set, depending on board size (Small, Medium or Large):

Digital inputs
ID1 High pressure switch C1
ID2 Thermal protection BLDC comp. C1
ID3 Electrical heater 1 thermal protection
Small

ID4 Thermal protection ON/OFF comp. C1

ID5 Clogged filters
ID6 Electrical heater 2 thermal protection
ID7 Air flow - Fan thermal protection
ID8 ON/OFF
ID9 High pressure switch C2
ID10 Thermal protection ON/OFF comp.2 C2
Medium

ID11 Thermal protection ON/OFF comp.1 C2

ID12 DC flow switch
ID13 Fire/Smoke
ID14 Water leakage
ID15 Condensate pump (alarm)
Large

ID16 OFF heating devices / OFF humidifier

ID17 Configurable
ID18 External humidifier alarm

Analogue inputs
U1 Air pressure transducer
U2
Small

U3 Humidity probe
U4 Supply air temperature
U5 Return air temperature
Large Medium

U6
U7 Water inlet temperature
U8 Water outlet temperature
U9 Variable set point
U10 External air temperature

62
 Digital outputs
NO1 ON/OFF fan
NO2 Liquid solenoid valve C1
NO3 ON/OFF compr.C1
Small

NO4 Oil equalization valve C1

NO5 Heater 1 / Hot water valve
NO6 Heater 2 / Hot gas post heating valve
NO7 Light alarm
NO8/NC8 Serious alarm
NO9 Liquid solenoid valve C2
Medium

NO10 ON/OFF compr.2 C2

NO11 ON/OFF compr.1 C2 / Oil equalization valve C2
NO12 External humidifier / Drycooler pump
NO13 Air supply damper (anti-recirculation)
NO14 Programmable
NO15 Programmable
Large

NO16 Programmable
NO17 Programmable
NO18 Programmable

Analogue outputs
Y1 DC/FC valve / Hot water valve / Post heating coil valve
Medium
Small

Y2 Supply air fan

Y3 Condensing fan C1
Y4 Condensing fan C2 / Drycooler fan
Y5 External humidifier / Variable compressor (C1)
Lge

Y6 External FC air damper

EVD EVO driver, always present (one for each cooling circuit) for units with BLDC compressor, have the
following analogue inputs:

EVD EVO C1
Analogue inputs
S1 Low pressure transducer C1 (LP1)
S2 Suction temperature probe C1
S3 High pressure transducer C1 (HP1)
S4 BLDC compressor discharge temperature C1

EVD EVO C2
Analogue inputs
S1 Low pressure transducer C2 (LP2)
S2 Suction temperature probe C2
S3 High pressure transducer C2 (HP2)
S4 Compressor discharge temperature C2

63
8 SOFTWARE MENU, INTERFACE MASKS AND PARAMETERS

8.1 General
The interface masks allow the user to detect the unit operating status and set all main parameters. The
masks are sorted according to a menu and sub-menu system for logically similar functions and access levels
(with or without passwords) to facilitate navigation within the various pages available.
All the different masks (also referred to as pages) contain in the first row a title and an index in the top right
corner, which identifies the mask (e.g. for correct reference), see the following example:

mask title mask index

As described in the Hardware section, use the arrow keys to scroll the various masks within the same level.
Press ENTER key to go to a higher level, press ESC to go to a lower level.
The different software menu are:

In this chapter, the content description/meaning of each mask/group of masks is provided immediately below
each one; for better comprehension, menus are reported in reverse order (from Manufacturer to info),
because unit configuration starts from Manufacturer menu. Masks containing graphic elemets are displayed
as pictures, while masks with text only are displayed in text mode. Furthermore, the values entered in the
various fields are standard or default values (besides those with a multiple selection for different
configurations of the units).

8.1.1 Menu tree

The complete menu tree with main sub-menus is:

i. Info
A. Unit ON/OFF
B. Setpoint
C. Clock/Scheduler
D. Input/output
E. Data logger
F. User
a. Thermoregulation
b. Supply air fan
c. Alarm management
d. Datalink
e. Advanced settings
G. Service
a. Change language
b. Information
c. Summer/Winter
d. Working hours
e. BMS config.
f. Service settings
a. Reset working hour
b. Probe adjustment
c. Thermoregulation
d. Condensation
e. EVD EVO
f. Supply air fan
g. Heating

64
 h. Humidity control
i. Advanced
g. Manual management
H. Manufacturer
a. Unit config.
b. Cooling circuit
c. Supply air fan
d. Heating
e. Humidifier
f. I/O Config.
g. Initialization

Note: for setting proper parameters, always refer also to the following documents:
• Programming procedure;
• BOM (bill of materials);
• MAC (Sales Order Form);
• Datatech technical tables.

8.2 H. Manufacturer Menu

The Manufacturer menu can be accessed from the main menu and is password-protected. It is available in
Italian and English languages only.

WARNING!
It’s strictly forbidden to change any parameter of Manufacturer menu without a
written authorization of unit Manufacturer; improper alteration of parameters may
cause serious damages to the unit and to its components and immediately
invalidates unit warranty.

WARNING!
In order to modify the parameters of manufacturer Menu, it is necessary that the unit
is in OFF mode.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
|Costruttore | |Manufacturer password |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
|Inserire password | |Insert manufacturer |
|costruttore (PW2):0000| |password(PW2): 0000|
| | | |
|Password errata! | |Password wrong! |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
The default Manufacturer password is 0100.

The different Manufacturer sub-menus are accessed when this password is entered correctly.

a. Unit config.
b. Cooling circuit
c. Supply air fan
d. Heating
e. Humidifier
f. I/O Config.
g. Initialization

8.2.1 Ha. Unit config.

This menu loop allows to configure the unit and its accessories and to set and enable master communication
protocols.

65
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. unità Ha1| | Unit config. Ha1|
|Selez. funzionamento | |Working selection |
| | | |
|Tipo di unità | |Unit mode |
|DX: INVERTER COMPR. | |DX: Inverter compr. |
| | | |
|Circuito: 1| |Circuit: 1|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
th
This mask allows to choose the type of unit on the 5 row from the followings:
• DX: Inverter compr. units with at least one BLDC compressor
• DX: ON/OFF compr. units with only ON/OFF compressors
• CW chilled water units
• DW chilled water units with double water coil
th
In the 7 row it is possible to choose the number of cooling circuits (1 or 2).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. unità Ha2| | Unit config. Ha2|
|Dotazioni aggiuntive | |Additional optionals |
| | | |
|Deumidifica □ | |Dehumdifier □ |
|Fumo/Fuoco □ | |Smoke/Fire □ |
|Allagamento □ | |Water leakage □ |
|Serranda aria □ | |Supply air damper □ |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. unità Ha3| | Unit config. Ha3|
|Dotazioni aggiuntive | |Additional optionals |
| | | |
|Filtri aria sporchi □ | |Clogged air filter □ |
|Riscaldamento □ | |Heating □ |
|Umidificatore □ | |Humidifier □ |
|Pompa scarico cond. □ | |Condensing pump □ |
|Set point variabile □ | |Variable set point □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
These masks allow to choose main optional, thus enabling proper inputs and outputs on the pCO board.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. unità Ha4| | Unit config. Ha4|
|Dotazioni aggiuntive | |Additional optionals |
| | | |
|Dry cooler □ | |Dry cooler □ |
|Rete DATALINK □ | |DATALINK net □ |
|Grafici □ | |Graphs □ |
| | | |
|Tipo logo: DATATECH| |Logo type: DATATECH|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enable Datalink local network (p-LAN protocol) and to choose the logo displayed while
software is loading at pCO board start-up. Note that Datalink local network option is not compatible with unit
scheduler.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. unità Ha5| | Configuration Ha5|
|FieldBus1 | |FieldBus1 |
| | | |
|Typo di ModBus master | |Type of ModBus master |
|VERSIONE 3.0 (BIOS) | |VERSION 3.0 (BIOS) |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure Modbus Master 1.0 protocol on FieldBus1 port(for internal devices)..

66
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. unità Ha7| | Configuration Ha7|
|FieldBus1 | |FieldBus1 |
|ModBus master 3.0 | |Modbus Master 3.0 |
|Baudrate: 19200bps| |Baudrate: 19200bps|
|Stop bits: 2| |Stop bit: 2|
|Parità: NONE| |Parity mode: NONE|
|Abilita servizio □ | |Enable service: □ |
|Polling: 00000.00000s| |Polling: 0.00000s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure Modbus Master 3.0 protocol on FieldBus1 port; it is possible to choose baud
rate, stop bits and parity mode. Last row is the polling time and is reading only. Default parameters are as
reported on the mask.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. unità Ha8| | Configuration Ha8|
|FieldBus2 | |FieldBus2 |
| | | |
|Carel Master | |Carel Master |
|Baudrate: 19200bps| |Baudrate: 19200bps|
|O.R.T.: 15s| |O.R.T.: 15s|
|Retry n.: 01| |Retry n.: 01|
|Abilita servizio □ | |En. service □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure Carel Master protocol on FieldBus2 port; it is possible to choose baud rate,
O.R.T. (Offline Recall Time), number of retries before triggering offline alarm and to enable the protocol.
Default parameters are as reported on the mask.
Note: it is suggested to enable the Carel Master protocol after enabling the EVD EVO driver (if present) on
Cooling circuit menu (see next paragraph).

67
8.2.2 Hb. Cooling circuit
This menu loop allows to configure the unit cooling circuit; it is available only for ED units.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb1| | Cooling Circuit Hb1|
| | | |
| | | |
|Circuito 1 | |Circuit 1 |
|Compressore: BLDC+Fix| |Compressor: BLDC+Fix|
| | | |
|Power+ □ | |Power+ □ |
|EVD Evolution □ | |EVD Evolution □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb2| | Cooling Circuit Hb2|
| | | |
| | | |
|Circuito 2 | |Circuit 2 |
|Compressore: 2 On/Off| |Compressor: 2 On/Off|
| | | |
| | | |
|EVD Evolution □ | |EVD Evolution □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
These masks allow to configure compressor configuration and to enable inverter and EVD EVO driver for
electronic expansion valve on circuit 1 and 2.
Note: after enabling EVD EVO driver (if present), return to mask Ha8 and enable Carel Master protocol; after
this, default installation of EVD EVO will start, a message on the display will tell when the installation is over
and will ask to reboot the unit control by switching it OFF and then ON. After successfully doing this
procedure, it will be possible to continue with unit programming.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb3| | Cooling Circuit Hb3|
|Condensazione | |Condensing |
|Visual.mask info □| |Display inform.mask □|
|Condensazione acqua □| |Water condensing □|
|Tipo reg.valvola: P| |Valve regul.type: P|
|Set point: 24.0barg| |Set point: 24.0bar|
|Differenz.: 08.0barg| |Differential: 08.0bar|
|Tempo integrale: 10s| |Integral time: 10s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
th
This mask allows to visualize mask i4 for air condensation (2° row) and enable unit water condensing (4
row); if not enabled, it implies that the unit is air condensed (see next mask). As already stated, water
condensing valve control is unique even if there are 2 cooling circuits.
th th
Rows from 5 to 8 are displayed only if water condensing is enabled, only valve regulation type and integral
time can be modified because pressure set point and differential can be set from Service menu.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb4| | Cooling Circuit Hb4|
| | | |
| | | |
|Ventilatori cond. | |Condensation fans |
|Circuito frigorifero:1| |Cooling circuit: 1|
|Tipo condensazione: | |Condensation type: |
| SINGOLA| | SINGLE|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure air condensation fans.
The number of cooling circuits is a read-only parameter, because it is set on Ha1 mask.
Condensation type can be SINGLE (only choice available if there is only 1 circuit) or SEPARATED, meaning
that a different remote condensers is available for each cooling circuit.
In case of two refrigeration circuits, if separated condensation is enables each control signal for condensation
fans will be proportional to condensing pressure of the relevant circuit; if single condensation is enabled, fan
control signal will be proportional to the highest condensing pressure of the two refrigerant circuits.

68
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb5| | Cooling circuit Hb5|
|Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 |
| | | |
| Premere INVIO per | | Press ENTER to |
| configurare | | configure |
| Inverter Power+ | | Power+ Inverter |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enter the Power+ inverter configuration menu (see relative paragraph).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb6| | Cooling Circuit Hb6|
| | | |
| | | |
| Premere ENTER per | | Press ENTER to |
| configurare | | configure |
| | | |
| COMPRESSORE | | COMPRESSORS |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enter compressors configuration menu (see relevant paragraph).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb12| | Cooling circuit Hb12|
| | | |
| | | |
| Premere ENTER per | | Press ENTER to |
| configurare | | configure |
| | | |
| DRIVER EVD EVO | | EVD EVO DRIVER |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enter EVD EVO configuration menu (see relevant paragraph).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb17| | Cooling Circuit Hb17|
|Dotazione aggiuntiva | |Additional optional |
| | | |
|Unità di raffreddam. | |Additional cooling |
|aggiuntiva | |device |
|DUAL COOLING (DC) | |DUAL COOLING (DC) |
| | | |
|Tipo valvola: 3-VIE| |Valve type: 3-WAY |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure the additional cooling device, if present: Dual Cooling (DC), water Free Cooling
(FCw), air Free Cooling (FCa).

8.2.2.1 Power+ inverter configuration

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb5| | Cooling circuit Hb5|
|Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 |
| | | |
| Premere INVIO per | | Press ENTER to |
| configurare | | configure |
| Inverter Power+ | | Power+ Inverter |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enter the Power+ inverter configuration menu, which is made of 3 sub-menus:
a. Configuration
b. Regulation
c. Custom

a. Configuration

69
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Power+ Config P1a1| | Power+ Config P1a1|
|Power+ n 1 | |Power+ n 1 |
|Tipo motore: | |Motor Type: |
|SIAM ANB33F-400V | |SIAM ANB33F-400V |
|Scrivi defaults: □ | |Set defaults: □ |
|Numero poli: 6 | |Poles numbers: 6 |
|Tipo drive: PSD0*144**| |Type drive: PSD0*144**|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
th
This mask allows to choose the type of BLDC compressor (4 row) and to set default parameters for it, so
th
choose the proper compressor model (see BOM for each unit); by checking the box (5 row) and pressing
ENTER key, the following confirmation mask will be shown:

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Power+ Config. | | Power+ Config |
|Power+ n 1 | |Power+ n 1 |
| | | |
|Tipo power+: 400V 14A| |Power+ type: 400V 14A|
|Power+ sel.: 400V 14A| |Power+ set: 400V 14A|
| | | |
|Scrivi Defaults: No | |Write defaults: No |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
th th
Power+ type (4 row) is read via serial communication by the controller, while Power+ set (5 row) is the type
of drive automatically set after selecting the BLDC compressor model on the previous mask.
If the two rows does not show the same Power+ model, it would be impossible to enable “Write defaults”
command; the main cause of this can be:
• faulty serial communication between pCO control board and Power+ inverter;
• Modbus master 3.0 protocol not enabled;
• wrong Modbus master 3.0 protocol parameters.
th
If the two rows show the same Power+ model, choose Yes on the 7 row and wait until inverter default
parameters are installed: the message “ <Wait default install>” will appear on the last row and will remain
displayed until the installation is completed. Note that it is not necessary to reboot pCO board after Power+
default installation.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Power+ Config. P1a2| | Power+ Config P1a2|
|Power+ n 1 | |Power+ n 1 |
| | | |
| No | |Save to CUSTOM No |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Power+ Config. P1a3| | Power+ Config P1a3|
|Power+ n 1 | |Power+ n 1 |
| | | |
|Timeout com.seriale: | |Data comunic.timeout: |
|[029] 030s| |[029] 030s|
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Power+ Config. P1a4| | Power+ Config P1a4|
|Power+ n 1 | |Power+ n 1 |
| | | |
|U.M. velocita': Hz | |U.M. speed: Hz |
| | | |
|Sostituzione driver: | |Drive replacement: |
| DOWNLOAD PARAMETRI| | DOWNLOAD PARAMETERS|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
These masks are not used. Leave default parameters.

b. Regulation

70
Normally, all the masks of this loop are not displayed as it is not necessary to change the parameters in them.
In the exceptional case where it becomes necessary to take action on these parameters, the display of masks
of this loop can be enabled by the mask HB200.

c. Custom

Same as above “Regulation” paragraph applies.

8.2.2.2 Compressors configuration loop

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb6| | Cooling Circuit Hb6|
| | | |
| | | |
| Premere ENTER per | | Press ENTER to |
| configurare | | configure |
| | | |
| COMPRESSORE | | COMPRESSORS |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enter the Compressors configuration menu.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb61| | Compressor Hb61|
|Potenza compressore | |Compressor power |
| | | |
|Circuito 1 | |Circuit 1 |
|BLDC comp.: 27kW| |BLDC comp.: 27kW|
|Compr.ON/OFF: 17kW| |Compr.ON/OFF: 17kW|
| | | |
|Alr.BLDC stop fissi □| |BLDC alr.stop ON/OFF □|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb63| | Compressor Hb63|
|Potenza compressore | |Compressor power |
| | | |
|Circuito 2 | |Circuit 2 |
|Compr.ON/OFF 1: 17kW| |Compres.Fix 1: 17kW|
|Compr.ON/OFF 2: 17kW| |Compres.Fix 2: 17kW|
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
These masks allow to set compressors nominal cooling power for circuits 1 and 2. These parameters are not
used for splitting the cooling band to the compressors. Reference values can be found on Datatech+
technical table.
In Hb61 mask, for units with 2 compressors in tandem on the circuit 1, the 8th row allows to decide whether
alarms on inverter driven BLDC compressor should also stop the ON/OFF compressor of the same circuit.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb64| | Compressor Hb64|
|Tempistiche compres. | |Compressor timings |
| | | |
|Circuito 1&2 | |Circuit 1&2 |
|Min. ON: 180s| |Min. ON: 180s|
|Min. OFF: 180s| |Min. OFF: 180s|
|Min.diff. ON: 180s| |Min.diff. ON: 360s|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set timings for compressors of circuits 1 and 2; note that all compressors of both circuits
have the same timings.
It is recommended not to reduce these timings, because this can cause serious damages to compressors.

71
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb65| | Compressor Hb65|
|Soglie compres. BLDC | |BLDC compr.thresholds |
| | | |
|Circuito 1&2 | |Circuit 1&2 |
|Fisso ON: 090.0rps| |Fixed ON: 090.0rps|
|Fisso OFF: 030.0rps| |Fixed OFF: 030.0rps|
| | | |
|Rampa avvio BLDC: 180s| |BLDC startup ramp:180s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set speed thresholds of BLDC compressors that allow fixed compressors to turn ON and
OFF and set the duration of the start-up phase fixed speed compressor BLDC, essential to ensure proper
lubrication of the compressor.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb67| | Compressor Hb67|
|Ritorno olio | |Compressor Oil Mng |
|Abilita funz.: □ | |En.function: □ |
|Soglia min.rich.:35.0%| |Min.req.thrs.: 35.0%|
|Soglia veloc.: 35.0rps| |Speed thrs.: 35.0rps|
|Forza veloc.: 90.0rps| |Speed force: 90.0rps|
|Ritardo attiv.: 15min| |Act.delay: 15min|
|Tempo forzat.: 3min| |Force time: 3min|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for BLDC compressor oil return management.
Note that oil return cycle is active with the logic OR of the two thresholds (minimum power request and
minimum speed): the first reached condition starts the oil return cycle. Default parameters are as reported on
the mask. For units with BLDC compressor, oil return management function must be always enabled.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb69| | Compressor Hb69|
|Destabiliz.circuito | |Circuit destabil. |
| | | |
|Abilita funzione: □ | |En.function: □ |
|Compr.fermo per: 4h| |Comp.stopped for: 4h|
|Forza l'altro compres.| |Force other comp. |
|dopo: 15min| |after: 15min|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for circuit destabilization, meaning that a compressor which has been
OFF for a certain time is forced to run for some minutes, in order to promote oil return to the compressor
which was in OFF status. This function must be enabled for units with more compressors on the same cooling
circuit.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb70| | Compressor Hb70|
| | | |
|Limiti inviluppo | |Envelope limits |
|Scarico Pmax: 36.0barg| |Disch. Pmax: 36.0barg|
|Aspiraz.Pmin: 06.0barg| |Suction Pmin: 6.0barg|
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for BLDC compressor units, allows to set the thresholds for customized compressor
envelope limits for condensing and evaporating pressures, meaning that when these thresholds are reached
the software will change compressor speed and EEV opening in order to prevent stopping for high or low
pressure alarms; for further information refer to compressors envelope management chapter.

72
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb71| | Compressor Hb71|
| | | |
|Allarme trasdut. HP | |HP transducer alarm |
|Set point: 37.0barg| |Set point: 37.0barg|
|Diff.: 2.0barg| |Diff.: 2.0barg|
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask is always available for ED units and allows to set the threshold for high pressure alarm by
transducer and its differential for reset. Default parameters are as reported on the mask.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb73| | Compressor Hb73|
| | | |
|Allarme trasdut. LP | |LP transducer alarm |
|Set point: 4.5barg| |Set point: 4.5barg|
|Diff.: 0.5barg| |Diff.: 0.5barg|
|Ritardo in avvio: 15s| |Delay start up: 15s|
|Ritardo funzion.: 05s| |Delay running: 05s|
|Tentativi max.: 3| |attempt: 3|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with electronic expansion valve (EEV), allows to set parameters for low
pressure alarm by transducer and the number of attempts of the low pressure alarm by transducer before the
serious alarm is triggered. It is strongly recommended not to decrease the default value.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb74| | Compressor reg. Hb74|
|Controllo delta press.| |Start-up pressure |
|in avvio | |differential control |
| | | |
|Massimo valore ammesso| |Max pressure differ. |
|all'avvio: 9.0bar| |admitted: 9.0bar|
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the maximum pressure differential
between HP and LP for the compressor start-up; the BLDC compressor will not start until this pressure
differential is below the limit.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb75| | Compressor reg. Hb75|
|Controllo delta press.| |Start-up pressure |
|in avvio | |differential control |
| | | |
|Modo equalizzazione: | |Equalization mode: |
|PREAPERTURA EEV | |EEV PRE-OPENING |
|Tempo max.equal.: 020s| |Max.equaliz.time: 020s|
|Preapertura EEV: 33.0%| |EEV opening: 33.0%|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the parameters for differential
pressure control at compressor start-up.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb76| | Compressor reg. Hb76|
|Controllo avviamento | |Start-up failure |
|fallito | |control |
| | | |
|Minima variazione | |Pressure difference |
|delta press.: 0.2bar| |min.variation: 0.2bar|
| | | |
|Periodo verifica: 60s| |Control period: 60s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the parameters for compressor start-
up failure control, in terms of minimum pressure difference variation at BLDC compressor start-up and of
control period for this variation.

73
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb77| | Compressor reg. Hb77|
|Controllo avviamento | |Start-up failure |
|fallito | |control |
| | | |
|Rit.ripartenza: 30s| |Restart delay: 30s|
| | | |
|Max.num.tentativi: 5| |Max retry number: 5|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the parameters for compressor start-
up failure control, in terms of restart delay in case of BLDC compressor start-up failure and of number of
retries before triggering a serious compressor start failure alarm (manual reset).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb78| | Compressor reg. Hb78|
|Gestione velocità | |Speed management |
| | | |
|Velocità forzata in | |Start-up forced |
|fase di avvio:050.0rps| |speed: 050.0rps|
| | | |
|Veloc.massima:120.0rps| |Max speed: 120.0rps|
|Veloc.minima: 20.0rps| |Min speed: 20.0rps|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the parameters for compressor speed
management: start-up forced speed (kept constant for 3 minutes at compressor start-up), maximum and
minimum compressor speed. These parameters are automatically loaded after the inverter default procedure
is done (see above, mask P1b1); for reference values, see table reported below.

SIAM MITSUBISHI BLDC COMPRESSORS SPEED LIMITS

Model Start-up speed Min speed Max speed
rps rps rps
SNB130 50 15 130
TNB220 50 20 120
ANB33 50 20 120
ANB42 50 20 120
ANB52 50 20 120
ANB66 50 20 120

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb79| | Compressor reg. Hb79|
|Gestione Velocità | |Speed management |
| | | |
| rps/s| | rps/s|
|Rapp.accelerazione:1.6| |Deceleration rate: 1.6|
|Rapp.decelerazione:1.0| |Acceleration rate: 1.0|
|Rapp.spegnimento: 2.0| |Switch-off rate: 2.0|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the parameters for compressor speed
management: deceleration rate, acceleration rate, switch-off rate.
These parameters are automatically loaded after the inverter default procedure is done (see above, mask
P1b1).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb80| | Compressor reg. Hb80|
|Controllo inviluppo | |Envelope control |
| | | |
|Rapporto di riduzione | |Speed reduction |
|velocità: 0.8rps/s| |rate: 0.8rps/s|
| | | |
|Minima velocità | |Min speed |
|ammessa: 20.0rps| |admitted: 20.0rps|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+

74
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the parameters for compressor
envelope control: speed reduction rate and minimum speed admitted. These parameters are automatically
loaded after the inverter default procedure is done (see above, mask P1b1).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb81| | Compressor reg. Hb81|
|Controllo inviluppo | |Envelope control |
| | | |
|Ritardo allarme fuori | |Out of envelope |
|inviluppo: 180s| |alarm timeout: 180s|
| | | |
|Ritardo allarme basso | |Low pressure diff. |
|delta press.: 60s| |alarm timeout: 60s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the parameters for compressor
envelope control: out of envelope alarm timeout and low pressure differential alarm timeout.
These parameters are automatically loaded after the inverter default procedure is done (see above, mask
P1b1).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb82| | Compressor reg. Hb82|
|Gest.gas di scarico | |Discharge gas control |
|in zona 1a | |in zone 1a |
| | | |
|Temperatura di scarico| |High discharge temp. |
|Limite: 105.0°C| |Limit: 105.0°C|
|Allarme: 110.0°C| |Alarm: 110.0°C|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the parameters for compressor
envelope control: limit and alarm for high discharge gas temperature in envelope zone 1a.
These parameters are automatically loaded after the inverter default procedure is done (see above, mask
P1b1).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb83| | Compressor reg. Hb83|
|Gest.gas di scarico | |Discharge gas control |
| | | |
| | | |
|Temperatura di scarico| |High discharge temp. |
|Limite: 115.0°C| |Limit: 115.0°C|
|Allarme: 120.0°C| |Alarm: 120.0°C|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the parameters for compressor
envelope control: limit and alarm for high discharge gas temperature in envelope zone 1b.
These parameters are automatically loaded after the inverter default procedure is done (see above, mask
P1b1).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb84| | Compressor reg. Hb84|
|Controllo velocità | |Speed control due to |
|gest.gas di scarico | |discharge gas |
| | | |
|Differ.attiv.: 20.0°C| |Action distance:20.0°C|
|Pausa azione: 90s| |Action pause: 90s|
|Riduzione velocità | |Compressor speed |
|compressore: 3.0%| |reduction: 3.0%|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to set the parameters for compressor
envelope control: speed control for discharge gas temperature.
These parameters are automatically loaded after the inverter default procedure is done (see above, mask
P1b1).

75
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb85| | Compressor reg. Hb85|
|Regolazione EEV | |EEV Regulation |
| | | |
|Modalità: | |Mode: |
|SURR.DI ASPIRAZIONE | |SUCTION SUPERHEAT |
| | | |
|Coefficiente K sonda | |Discharge temp.probe |
|temp.scarico: 050.0s| |compensat.time: 050.0s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with EEV, allows to choose whether EEV regulation is on suction
superheat or on discharge superheat; for Datatech units, superheat regulation will be always on suction
superheat.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb86| | Compressor reg. Hb86|
|Regolazione EEV | |EEV Regulation |
| | | |
|Surriscald.di scarico | |Discharge superheat |
|Setpoint: 35.0°C| |Setpoint: 35.0°C|
|Offset: 2.0°C| |Offset: 2.0°C|
|Isteresi: 2.0°C| |Hysteresis: 2.0°C|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb87| | Compressor reg. Hb87|
|Regolazione EEV | |EEV Regulation |
| | | |
|Temperatura di scarico| |Discharge superheat |
|Setpoint: 105.0°C| |Setpoint: 105.0°C|
|Offset: 8.0°C| |Offset: 8.0°C|
|Isteresi: 5.0°C| |Hysteresis: 5.0°C|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
These masks, available only for units with EEV, allows to set parameters for superheat discharge control for
C1 and C2; they are not used, because the active regulation mode is on suction superheat.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb89| | Compressor reg. Hb89|
|Controllo inviluppo | |Envelope control |
| | | |
|Gestione basso rapp. | |Low ratio management |
|con chiusura EEV: □ | |by EEV closing: □ |
| | | |
|Con incr.velocità: □ | |By compr.speed up: □ |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for units with BLDC compressor, allows to enable the actions to be performed for
compressor envelope control, in particular for low ratio management. For Datatech+, both options must be
enabled.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb90| | Compressor Hb90|
|Separatore olio | |Solenoid valves C1 |
|Cir.1 valv.solenoide | |Oil equalization |
|Tempo totale: 05min| |Total time: 05min|
|Avvio compres.: 030s| |Start up comp.: 030s|
|Tempo apertura: 10s| |Time ON: 10s|
|Limiti tempo chiusura | |Closing time limits |
|Max.:01min Min.:10min| |Max.:01min Min.:10min|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only with BLDC compressors in tandem configuration, allows to set parameters for the
oil equalisation valve for compressors of circuit 1.

76
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb130| | Compressor Hb130|
|Prevenzione circuito 1| |Prevent circuit 1 |
|Tipo: CONTR.INVILUPPO| |Type: CHECK ENVELOPE|
|Ritardo azione: 40s| |Action delay: 40s|
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb131| | Compressor Hb130|
|Prevenzione circuito 1| |Prevent circuit 1 |
|Tipo: CONTROLLO SOGLIE| |Type: CHECK THRESHOLDS|
| | | |
|Alta pressione | |High pressure |
|Set:36.5bar Dif:2.0bar| |Set:36.5bar Dif:2.0bar|
|Bassa pressione | |Low pressure |
|Set: 5.5bar Dif:1.0bar| |Set: 5.5bar Dif:1.0bar|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set which type of high and low pressure alarm prevention to activate on circuit 1.
If “CHECK ENVELOPE” is selected, mask Hb130 is visualized like in the first example and high&low pressure
alarm prevention on circuit 1 is left to BLDC compressor envelope control module; it is possible to set a
control delay time, which operates when the high or low pressure thresholds are overcome (see also mask
Hb70). It is suggested to keep the settings in this mode.
If otherwise selected “CHECK THRESHOLDS”, mask Hb130 is visualized like in the second example and
high&low pressure alarm prevention on circuit 1 is accomplished by switching off the ON/OFF compressor of
circuit 1 (if present), when the thresholds are overcome; compressor will start up again when pressures have
recovered within the differential located below the high pressure threshold or above the low pressure
threshold.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb131| | Compressor Hb131|
|Prevenzione circuito 1| |Prevent circuit 1 |
| | | |
|Tempo esclusione comp.| |Exclusion time of the |
|fisso per alta T di | |fix compress.for high |
|scarico: 5m| |discharge temp.: 5m|
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set the time delay before restarting the ON/OFF compressor of circuit 1 (if present), in
case it had stopped for high pressure or high discharge temperature.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb132| | Compressor Hb132|
|Prevenzione circuito 2| |Prevent circuit 2 |
| | | |
| | | |
|Alta pressione | |High pressure |
|Set:36.5bar Dif:2.0bar| |Set:36.5bar Dif:2.0bar|
|Bassa pressione | |Low pressure |
|Set: 5.5bar Dif:1.0bar| |Set: 5.5bar Dif:1.0bar|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure the type of high&low pressure alarm prevention of circuit 2. Such prevention is
accomplished by switching off the ON/OFF compressor (or one of them in case they are in tandem
configuration) when the thresholds indicated in the mask are overcome; compressor will start up again when
pressures have recovered within the differential located below the high pressure threshold or above the low
pressure threshold.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Compressore Hb200| | Compressor Hb200|
| | | |
|Abilitaz. menu Power+ | |Enable Power+ menu |
| - Regolazione □ | | - Regulation □ |
| - Custom □ | | - Custom □ |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enable “Regulation” and “Custom” menus of Power+ inverter to be visualized on the
display.

77
8.2.2.3 EVD EVO configuration loop

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Circuito frigo Hb12| | EVDlConfig.cuit Hb12|
| | | |
| | | |
| Premere ENTER per | | Press ENTER to |
| configurare | | configure |
| | | |
| DRIVER EVD EVO | | EVD EVO DRIVER |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enter the EVD EVO configuration loop, which is made of 3 sub-menus:

a. Configuration
b. Regulation
c. Custom

a. Configuration

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va1| | EVD Config. Va1|
|EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 |
| | | |
|Valvola: | |Valve: |
|CAREL EXV | |CAREL EXV |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to choose the type of electronic expansion valve. Always choose CAREL EXV.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va2| | EVD Config. Va2|
|EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 |
|Regol.principale: | |Main regulation: |
|CONDIZIONATORE/CHILLER| |AC/CHILLER WITH BLDC |
|+ COMP.BLDC | |COMPRESSORS |
|Regol.ausiliaria: | |Auxiliary regulation: |
|----- | |----- |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to choose the type of main and auxiliary regulation for electronic expansion valve.
Leave default selections.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va3| | EVD Config. Va3|
|EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 |
|Sonda S1 Allarme: AB.| |Probe S1 Alarm: EN.|
|Tipo:RAZ. 0-5V | |Type:RAZ. 0-5V |
|Min: 00.0barg| |Min.: 00.0barg|
|Max: 20.7barg| |Max.: 20.7barg|
|Al.min: -1.0barg| |Alarm min.: -1.0barg|
|Al.max: 21.7barg| |Alarm max.: 21.7barg|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure parameters for S1 probe (low pressure transducer) connected to EVD EVO
driver n.1. Default parameters are as reported on the mask.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va4| | EVD Config. Va4|
|EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 |
| | | |
|Sonda S2 Allarme: AB.| |Probe S2 Alarm: EN.|
|Tipo:NTC CAREL | |Type:NTC CAREL |
| | | |
|Al.min: -50.0°C| |Alarm min.: -50.0°C|
|Al.max: 105.0°C| |Alarm max.: 105.0°C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure parameters for S2 probe (suction temperature probe) connected to EVD EVO
driver n.1. Default parameters are as reported on the mask.

78
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va5| | EVD Config. Va5|
|EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 |
|Sonda S3 Allarme: AB.| |Probe S3 Alarm: EN.|
|Tipo:RAZ. 0-5V | |Type:RAZ. 0-5V |
|Min: 00.0barg| |Min.: 00.0barg|
|Max: 45.0barg| |Max.: 45.0barg|
|Al.min: -1.0barg| |Alarm min.: -1.0barg|
|Al.max: 46.0barg| |Alarm max.: 46.0barg|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure parameters for S3 probe (high pressure transducer) connected to EVD EVO
driver n.1. Default parameters are as reported on the mask.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va6| | EVD Config. Va6|
|EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 |
| | | |
|Sonda S4 Allarme: AB.| |Probe S4 Alarm: EN.|
|Tipo:NTC CAREL | |Type:CAREL NTC-HT |
| | | |
|Al.min: 0.0°C| |Alarm min.: 0.0°C|
|Al.max: 150.0°C| |Alarm max.: 150.0°C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure parameters for S4 probe (discharge temperature probe) connected to EVD
EVO driver n.1. Default parameters are as reported on the mask.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va10| | EVD Config. Va10|
|EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 |
|Gest.al.sonde S1/S3: | |S1 probe al.manag.: |
|CHIUS.FORZATA VALVOLA | |VALVE FORCED CLOSED |
| | | |
|Gest.al.sonde S2/S4: | |S2 probe al.manag.: |
|CHIUS.FORZATA VALVOLA | |VALVE FORCED CLOSED |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure parameters for probe alarm management. Default parameters are as reported
on the mask.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va11| | EVD Config. Va11|
|EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 |
|Gestione all.sonda S3:| |S3 probe alarm manag.:|
|CHIUS.FORZATA VALVOLA | | VALVE FORCED CLOSED |
| | | |
|Gestione all.sonda S4:| |S4 probe alarm manag.:|
|CHIUS.FORZATA VALVOLA | | VALVE FORCED CLOSED |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure parameters for probe alarm management. Default parameters are as reported
on the mask.

Masks from Va13 to Va24 are displayed only if EVD EVO driver is present also on circuit 2 and are used to
configure driver parameters for the electronic expansion valve of cooling circuit 2.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va13| | EVD Config. Va13|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
| | | |
|Valvola: | |Valve: |
|CAREL EXV | |CAREL EXV |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to select the type of electronic expansion valve. Always choose CAREL EXV.

79
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va14| | EVD Config. Va14|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
|Regol.principale: | |Main regulation: |
|COND./CHILLER SCAMB. | |AC OR CHILLER WITH |
|A BATT.ALETTATA | |BATTERY COIL EVAPOR. |
|Regol.ausiliaria: | |Auxiliary regulation: |
|PROTEZIONE ALTA TEMP. | |HIGH CONDENSING TEMP. |
|DI COND. SU S3 | |PROTECTION ON S3 |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to select the type of main and auxiliary regulation for electronic expansion valve. Always
choose the settings as preset in mask Va14..

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va15| | EVD Config. Va15|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
|Sonda S1 Allarme: AB.| |Probe S1 Alarm: EN.|
|Tipo:RAZ. 0-5V | |Type:RAZ. 0-5V |
|Min: 00.0barg| |Min.: 00.0barg|
|Max: 20.7barg| |Max.: 20.7barg|
|Al.min: -1.0barg| |Alarm min.: -1.0barg|
|Al.max: 21.7barg| |Alarm max.: 21.7barg|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for S1 probe (low pressure transducer) connected to EVD EVO driver
n°2. Default parameters are those present in the mask.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va16| | EVD Config. Va16|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
| | | |
|Sonda S2 Allarme: AB.| |Probe S2 Alarm: EN.|
|Tipo:NTC CAREL | |Type:NTC CAREL |
| | | |
|Al.min: -50.0°C| |Alarm min.: -50.0°C|
|Al.max: 105.0°C| |Alarm max.: 105.0°C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for S2 probe (suction temperature) connected to EVD EVO driver n°2.
Default parameters are those present in the mask.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va17| | EVD Config. Va17|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
|Sonda S3 Allarme: AB.| |Probe S3 Alarm: EN.|
|Tipo:RAZ. 0-5V | |Type:RAZ. 0-5V |
|Min: 00.0barg| |Min.: 00.0barg|
|Max: 45.0barg| |Max.: 45.0barg|
|Al.min: -1.0barg| |Alarm min.: -1.0barg|
|Al.max: 46.0barg| |Alarm max.: 46.0barg|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for S3 probe (high pressure transducer) connected to EVD EVO driver
n°2. Default parameters are those present in the mask.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va18| | EVD Config. Va18|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
| | | |
|Sonda S4 Allarme: AB.| |Probe S4 Alarm: EN.|
|Tipo:NTC CAREL | |Type:CAREL NTC-HT |
| | | |
|Al.min: 0.0°C| |Alarm min.: 0.0°C|
|Al.max: 150.0°C| |Alarm max.: 150.0°C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for S4 probe (discharge temperature) connected to EVD EVO driver n°2.
Default parameters are those present in the mask.

80
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va22| | EVD Config. Va22|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
|Gestione all.sonda S1:| |S1 probe al.manag.: |
|CHIUS.FORZATA VALVOLA | |VALVE FORCED CLOSED |
| | | |
|Gestione all.sonda S2:| |S2 probe al.manag.: |
|CHIUS.FORZATA VALVOLA | |VALVE FORCED CLOSED |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va23| | EVD Config. Va23|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
|Gestione all.sonda S3:| |S3 probe alarm manag.:|
|CHIUS.FORZATA VALVOLA | | VALVE FORCED CLOSED |
| | | |
|Gestione all.sonda S4:| |S4 probe alarm manag.:|
|CHIUS.FORZATA VALVOLA | | VALVE FORCED CLOSED |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
These masks allows to set the parameters for probe alarm management. Default parameters are those
present in the masks.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config.EVD Va23| | EVD Config. Va23|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
|Gestione all.sonda S3:| |S3 probe alarm manag.:|
|CHIUS.FORZATA VALVOLA | | VALVE FORCED CLOSED |
| | | |
|Gestione all.sonda S4:| |S4 probe alarm manag.:|
|CHIUS.FORZATA VALVOLA | | VALVE FORCED CLOSED |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
Questa maschera consente di configurare i parametri per la gestione degli allarmi sonda. I parametri di
default sono riportati in maschera.

b. Regulation

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb1| | EVD Regulation Vb1|
|EVO n° 1 | |EVO n° 1 |
| | | |
|Apertura valvola | |Valve opening |
|in partenza: 100%| |at start-up: 100%|
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set valve opening at unit start-up, in order to prevent problems at compressors start-up
due to low suction pressure. A fixed value of 100% is given as standard parameter for BLDC compressor
units, because the correct value for valve opening at start-up is calculated by the software and sent to the
valve driver. For ON/OFF compressors, this value must be set to 50%.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb2| | EVD Regulation Vb2|
|EVO n° 1 | |EVO n° 1 |
|Valvola aperta | |Valve opened |
|in stand-by: NO| |in stand-by: NO|
|Ritardo avvio dopo | |Start-up delay after |
|sbrinamento: 10min| |defrost: 10min|
|Valvola: ritardo | |Valve preposit. |
|preposiz.: 00006sec| |delay: 00006sec|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for valve on circuit 1, such as opening of the valve during stand-by,
opening delay after defrost (not used in this application), and delay of pre-positioning.

81
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb3| | EVD Regulation Vb3|
|EVO n° 1 | |EVO n° 1 |
| | | |
|Parametri PID | |PID parameters |
| | | |
|Guadagno prop.: 15.0| |Prop.gain: 15.0|
|Tempo integrale: 90s| |Integral time: 90s|
|Tempo deriv.: 1.5s| |Derivat.time: 1.5s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set PID parameters for superheating control algorithm.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
6 row: 15.0.
th
7 row: 90 s.
th
8 row: 1.5 s.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb4| | EVD Regulation Vb4|
|EVO n° 1 | |EVO n° 1 |
| | | |
|Tempo integrale | |Integral time |
| | | |
|Protez.LowSH: 010.0s| |LowSH protect.: 010.0s|
|Protez.LOP: 010.0s| |LOP protection: 010.0s|
|Protez.MOP: 010.0s| |MOP protection: 010.0s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set integral times for protections of low superheating, LOP and MOP.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
6 row: 10.0 s.
th
7 row: 10.0 s.
th
8 row: 10.0 s.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb6| | EVD Regulation Vb6|
|EVO n° 1 | |EVO n° 1 |
| | | |
|Ritardo allarme | |Alarm delay |
| | | |
|LowSH: 00300s| |LowSH: 00300s|
|LOP: 00300s| |LOP: 00300s|
|MOP: 00300s| |MOP: 00300s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set delays for low superheating, LOP and MOP alarms.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
6 row: 300 s.
th
7 row: 300 s.
th
8 row: 300 s.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb7| | EVD Regulation Vb7|
|EVO n° 1 | |EVO n° 1 |
| | | |
|Allarme bassa temp.di | |Alarm low suction |
|aspirazione | |temperature |
| | | |
|Soglia: -050.0°C| |Threshold: -050.0°C|
|Ritardo: 120s| |Timeout: 120s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set delays for low suction temperature alarms; it is not used, because the alarm of low
suction pressure has narrower threshold so it will always be triggered before this alarm.

82
Masks from Vb8 to Vb14 are displayed only if EVD EVO driver is present also on circuit 2 and are used to
configure driver parameters for the electronic expansion valve of cooling circuit 2.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb8| | EVD Regulation Vb8|
|EVO n° 2 | |EVO n° 2 |
| | | |
|Apertura valvola | |Valve opening |
|in partenza: 100%| |at start-up: 100%|
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set the valve % opening at compressor start-up, in order to prevent problems due to low
operating pressure.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb9| | EVD Regulation Vb9|
|EVO n° 2 | |EVO n° 2 |
|Valvola aperta | |Valve opened |
|in stand-by: NO| |in stand-by: NO|
|Ritardo avvio dopo | |Start-up delay after |
|sbrinamento: 10min| |defrost: 10min|
|Valvola: ritardo | |Valve preposit. |
|preposiz.: 00006sec| |delay: 00006sec|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for valve on circuit 2, such as opening of the valve during stand-by,
opening delay after defrost (not used in this application), and delay of pre-positioning.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb10| | EVD Regulation Vb10|
|EVO n° 2 | |EVO n° 2 |
| | | |
|Parametri PID | |PID parameters |
| | | |
|Guadagno prop.: 15.0| |Prop.gain: 15.0|
|Tempo integrale: 90s| |Integral time: 90s|
|Tempo deriv.: 1.5s| |Derivat.time: 1.5s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set PID parameters for superheating control algorithm of circuit 2.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
6 row: 15.0.
th
7 row: 90 s.
th
8 row: 1.5 s.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb11| | EVD Regulation Vb11|
|EVO n° 2 | |EVO n° 2 |
| | | |
|Tempo integrale | |Integral time |
| | | |
|Protez.LowSH: 010.0s| |LowSH protect.: 010.0s|
|Protez.LOP: 010.0s| |LOP protection: 010.0s|
|Protez.MOP: 010.0s| |MOP protection: 010.0s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set integral times for protections of low superheating, LOP and MOP.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
6 row: 10.0 s.
th
7 row: 10.0 s.
th
8 row: 10.0 s.

83
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb12| | EVD Regulation Vb12|
|EVO n° 2 | |EVO n° 2 |
| | | |
|Alta temperatura cond.| |High cond.temperature |
| | | |
|Soglia: 80.0°C| |Threshold: 80.0°C|
|Tempo integr: 20.0s| |Integr.time: 20.0s|
|Rit.allarme: 600s| |Alarm timeout: 600s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This maskk allows to set time delays for low superheat, LOP and MOP alarms.
Default values as follows::
th
6 row: 300 s.
th
7 row: 300 s.
th
8 row: 300 s.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Regolaz.EVD Vb14| | EVD Regulation Vb14|
|EVO n° 2 | |EVO n° 2 |
| | | |
|Allarme bassa temp.di | |Alarm low suction |
|aspirazione | |temperature |
| | | |
|Soglia: -050.0°C| |Threshold: -050.0°C|
|Ritardo: 120s| |Timeout: 120s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to sety time delays for low suctione temperature alarm; this function is not actually used as
the low pressure alarm from trasducer will always cut-out earlier.

c. Custom

This menu is not used and is not accessible.

84
8.2.3 Hc. Supply air fan
This menu loop allows to configure the unit supply air fan.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ventil. mandata Hc1| | Supply air fan Hc1|
|Controllo ventilat. | |Fan control |
| | | |
|Tipo unità: ANALOG EC| |Device type: ANALOG EC|
|Ventilatori n°: 2| |Fans n°: 2|
|Costante boccaglio:350| |Nozzle const: 350|
|Regolaz.: POC| |Regulation: POC|
|Trasd.dif.pres.aria □ | |Dif.air pres.trans. □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure the supply air fan: type (AC ON/OFF, ANALOG EC, MODBUS EC), number of
fans, nozzle constant (for air flow calculation), type of regulation and to enable the differential air pressure
transducer.
th
4 row: type of fan selection: AC ON/OFF, ANALOG EC, MODBUS EC (not used).
th
5 row: number of fans.
th
6 row: nozzle constant: 138 for SXS units – 217 for XS units – 350 for S/M/L units.
th
7 row: fan regulation type.
th
8 row: enable the differential air pressure transducer, if present; for Datatech+ units it is always present.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ventil. mandata Hc2| | Supply air fan Hc2|
|Parametri elettrici | |Electrical parameters |
| | | |
|Limiti velocità vent. | |Fan speed limits |
|Min.:00.0V Max.:10.0V| |Min.:00.0V Max.:10.0V|
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set a minimum and a maximumfan speed, in terms of analogue output voltage range.
5° row: set minimum and maximum voltage values referring to Datatech technical data sheet. If POC
regulation is active (mask Hc1), set 0.0V as minimum and 10.0V as maximum. If PRC regulation is active
(mask Hc1), set minimum value according to indications of Datatech+ technical data sheet and maximum
value to 10.0V.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ventil. mandata Hc4| | Supply air fan Hc4|
|Regolaz. ventilatore | |Fan regulation |
| | | |
|Tipo regolazione: PI| |Regulation type: PI|
|Banda: 1200Pa| |Band: 1200Pa|
|Tempo integrale: 10s| |Integral time: 10s|
|Tempo derivativo: 10s| |Derivative time: 10s|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, available only for EC fans with POC or PRC regulation, allows to set parameters for this fan
regulation modes: type of regulation, proportional band, integral time and derivative time, the last two will be
shown or not depending on the enabled regulation mode.
Default parameters for POC regulation are as follow:
th
4 row: PI.
th
5 row: 1200 Pa for SXS and XS, 1700 Pa for S/M/L units.
th
6 row: 10 s.
th
7 row: 10 s (displayed only if PID regulation is enabled).

Default parameters for PRC regulation are as follow:

th
4 row: PI.
th
5 row: 200 Pa. Please not the proportional band value to be set is strongly influenced by the type of
installation and unit position; therefore it is suggested to set, as a first attempt, a proportional band value
which is 10 times the delivery air pressure set point (as set on mask B5) and to adjust the value so as to
avoid significant pressure swings.
th
6 row: 10 s.
th
7 row: 10 s (displayed only if PID regulation is enabled).

85
8.2.4 Hd. Heating
This menu loop allows to configure the unit heating devices. The loop masks are enabled only if heating is
enabled in the unit configuration (see mask Ha3).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Riscaldamento Hd1| | Heating Hd1|
| | | |
| | | |
|Tipo unità riscald. | |Heat device |
|1 STADIO RESIST.ELET. | |1 STAGE ELECTR.HEATER |
|Unità riscald.agg. | |Add.heat device |
|- | |- |
|OFF remoto: ASSENTE| |Remote OFF: NONE|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to choose primary and additional heating devices and to enable remote OFF by digital input
for heating device or humidifier.
th
5 row: selection of primary heating device.
th
7 row: selection of additional heating device; note that not all combinations of primary and additional heating
devices are possible, for further information refer to heating chapter.
th
8 row: choice between HEATERS or HUMIDIFIER remote OFF.

8.2.5 He. Humidifier

This menu loop allows to configure the unit humidifier. The loop masks are enabled only if humidifier is
enabled in the unit configuration (see mask Ha3).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Umidificatore He1| | Humidifier He1|
| | | |
|Tipo umidificatore: | |Humidifier type: |
|CPY HUMIDIFIER | |CPY HUMIDIFIER |
| | | |
|OFF remoto: ASSENTE| |Remote OFF: NONE|
| | | |
|Abilita CPY □ | |Enable CPY □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Umidificatore He1| | Humidifier He1|
| | | |
|Tipo umidificatore: | |Humidifier type: |
|UMIDIFICATORE ESTERNO | |EXTERNAL HUMIDIFIER |
|Ritardo allarme: 015s| |Delay alarm: 015s|
|OFF remoto: ASSENTE| |Remote OFF: NONE|
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to choose the type of humidifier: integrated controlled by CPY board or external controlled
by analogue output. Different mask rows are shown depending on the humidifier type chosen.
th
4 row: choice of humidifier type.
th
5 row: 15 s; this row is shown only for EXTERNAL HUMIDIFIER.
th
6 row: choice between HEATERS or HUMIDIFIER remote OFF.
th
8 row: this row is shown only for CPY HUMIDIFIER, in this case enable.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Umidificatore He2| | Humidifier He2|
|CPY | |CPY |
| | | |
|Abilita richiesta via | |Enable serial |
|seriale □ | |request □ |
| | | |
|(Per cambio model.CPY | |(To change CPY model |
|disab. rich.seriale) | |dis.serial request) |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for CPY HUMIDIFIER, allows to enable serial request for it.

86
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Umidificatore He3| | Configuration He3|
|CPY | |CPY |
|Nuovo modello: | |New model: |
|DISAB.RICHIESTA SER. | |DISABLE SERIAL REQUEST|
|PER CAMBIARE MODELLO | |BEFORE CHANGING MODEL |
| | | |
|Conferma cambio: □ | |Confirm change: □ |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for CPY HUMIDIFIER, allows to choose proper model of submersed electrode
humidifier.
th
4 row: choose proper humidifier model.
th
7 row: confirm change after selection, then enable serial request (see mask He2).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Umidificatore He4| | Configuration He4|
|CPY | |CPY |
| | | |
|Frequenza scarico | |Calibr. dilution drain|
|per diluizione: 100%| |frequency: 100%|
|Durata scarico | |Calibr. dilution drain|
|per diluizione: 100%| |duration: 100%|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for CPY HUMIDIFIER, allows to set parameters for humidifier cylinder: dilution drain
frequency and duration. For further information refer to CPY manual.

87
8.2.6 Hf. I/O Config.
This menu loop allows to configure the unit inputs and outputs.
ATTENTION!
Input&Output configuration is software defined, and should not be modified.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Configurazione Hf0| | Configuration Hf0|
|Abilita ingr.analog.: | | |
|U01: □ U02: □ | |U01: □ U02: □ |
|U03: □ U04: □ | |U03: □ U04: □ |
|U05: □ U06: □ | |U05: □ U06: □ |
|U07: □ U08: □ | |U07: □ U08: □ |
|U09: □ U10: □ | |U09: □ U10: □ |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enable the analogue inputs: all analogue inputs are enabled as default.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. I/O Hf1| | I/O Config Hf1|
|U01 tipo: AIN | |U01 type: AIN |
|Tipo sonda: 0/10V | |Probe type: 0/10V |
|U.M.: Generica | |U.M.: Generic I |
|Min: 0| |Min: 0|
|Max: 1000| |Max: 1000|
|Offset: 0| |Offset: 0|
|Valore: 0| |Value: 0|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
Masks from Hf1 to Hf11 allow to configure analogue inputs: all pCO board inputs from U1 to U10 are
configurable (analogue inputs, digital inputs, analogue outputs, digital ouputs), in this software they are all
used as analogue inputs AIN.
Default parameters are as follow:
nd
2 row: set AIN.
rd
3 row: choose proper probe type from: NTC (temperature), 0/1V, 0/5V, 0/10V, 4-20mA (refer to BOM and to
electrical diagram).
rd
4 row: choose the unit of measurement from temperature (°C), pressure (bar), generic I (integer), generic A
(analogue), depending on the input configuration (see I/O table).
th
5 row: set minimum value for analogue input, typically 0.
th
6 row: set maximum value for analogue input, typically full scale for the selected input type.
th
7 row: set 0.
th
8 row: shows the value read by the probe (read only).

Note: in case the set-point from analogue input U09 is enabled, minimum and maximum set-point limits can
be set on mask Hf10.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. I/O Hf12| | I/O Config Hf12|
|Logica ingr.digitali | |Digital Input Logic |
| | | |
|Di01:N.C. Di06:N.C.| |Di01:N.C. Di06:N.C.|
|Di02:N.C. Di07:N.C.| |Di02:N.C. Di07:N.C.|
|Di03:N.C. Di08:N.C.| |Di03:N.C. Di08:N.O.|
|Di04:N.C. Di09:N.C.| |Di04:N.C. Di09:N.C.|
|Di05:N.C. Di10:N.C.| |Di05:N.C. Di10:N.C.|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. I/O Hf13| | I/O Config Hf13|
|Logica ingr.digitali | |Digital Input Logic |
| | | |
|Di11:N.C. Di16:N.C.| |Di11:N.C. Di16:N.O.|
|Di12:N.C. Di17:N.C.| |Di12:N.C. Di17:N.C.|
|Di13:N.C. Di18:N.C.| |Di13:N.C. Di18:N.C.|
|Di14:N.C. | |Di14:N.C. |
|Di15:N.C. | |Di15:N.C. |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
Masks Hf11 and Hf12 allow to set the logic of digital inputs: configure as in the masks.

88
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. I/O Hf14| | I/O Config Hf14|
|Logica uscite digitali| |Digital Output Logic |
| | | |
|Do01:N.O. Do06:N.O.| |Do01:N.O. Do06:N.O.|
|Do02:N.O. Do07:N.O.| |Do02:N.O. Do07:N.O.|
|Do03:N.O. Do08:N.O.| |Do03:N.O. Do08:N.O.|
|Do04:N.O. Do09:N.O.| |Do04:N.O. Do09:N.O.|
|Do05:N.O. Do10:N.O.| |Do05:N.O. Do18:N.O.|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Config. I/O Hf15| | I/O Config Hf15|
|Logica uscite digitali| |Digital Output Logic |
| | | |
|Do11:N.O. Do16:N.O.| |Do11:N.O. Do16:N.O.|
|Do12:N.O. Do17:N.O.| |Do12:N.O. Do17:N.O.|
|Do13:N.O. Do18:N.O.| |Do13:N.O. Do18:N.O.|
|Do14:N.O. | |Do14:N.O. |
|Do15:N.O. | |Do15:N.O. |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
Masks Hf13 and Hf14 allow to set the logic of digital outputs: configure as in the masks.

8.2.7 Hg. Initialization

This menu loop contains all functions for unit initialization.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Inizializzazione Hg1| | Initialization Hg1|
| | | |
|INSTALLAZIONE DEFAULT | |DEFAULT INSTALLATION |
|Cancella impostazioni | |Erase user settings |
|utente ed installa i | |and install global |
|default globali: NO| |default value: NO|
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows install default settings, erasing all changes done; it is not recommended to use this function,
because all parameters and setup will be erased and restored to the default settings.

WARNING!
This operation will erase all parameters and settings and restore default parameters
and configuration, that are different from factory settings.
Another function is available to restore factory parameters and settings (see further).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Inizializzazione Hg2| | Initialization Hg2|
|Installazione default | |Default installation |
| | | |
|EVD EVO default | |EVD EVO default |
|Circuito 1: □ | |Circuit 1: □ |
|Circuito 2: □ | |Circuit 2: □ |
| | | |
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to force default settings installation for EVD EVO drivers of circuit 1 and 2, for example in
case of EVD EVO board replacement.
During the first setup, EVD EVO default installation will be done automatically when EVD EVO and Carel
Master protocol are enabled.

89
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Inizializzazione Hg3| | Initialization Hg3|
| | | |
| Modifica | | Change |
| password | | manufacturer |
| costruttore | | password |
| | | |
|Inserire nuova | |Insert new |
|password (PW2): 0000| |password (PW2): 0000|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set a new Manufacturer password.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Inizializzazione Hg4| | User default Hg4|
|Salva configuraz.: NO| |Save configuration: NO|
|Carica configuraz.: NO| |Load configuration: NO|
| | | |
|______________________| |______________________|
| | | |
|______________________| |______________________|
| | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to save and load the unit configuration, this means that all parameters are saved in the
controller permanent memory and can be loaded at any time; note that factory configuration loading can be
done also from User menu.
Configuration must be saved when programming is completely ended.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Inizializzazione Hg5| | Initialization Hg5|
| | | |
|Dati unità | |Unit data |
|Seriale: SB10000000| |Serial: SB10000000|
|Code operatore: 0000| |Operator code: 0000|
|Data: 27/05/2014| |Date: 27/05/2014|
| | | |
|Rich. PWD dopo: 600s| |Ask PWD after: 600s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set unit data such as serial number, code of the operator that has tested the unit in
factory after its manufacturing, date of unit testing, delay before asking again passwords for protected menu.
th
4 row: set serial number of the unit, as reported on production order.
th
5 row: set factory testing operator code.
th
6 row: set factory testing date.
th
8 row: set 600s.

90
8.3 G. Service Menu
The Service menu can be accessed from the main menu and is partially password-protected; from this menu,
main parameters regarding unit devices can be set.
The complete Service menu tree is the following:

G. Service
a. Change language
b. Information
this Service menu part can be
c. Graphs
accessed without password
d. Working hours
e. BMS config.
f. Service settings this Service menu part is
a. Reset working hour password-protected
b. Probe adjustment
c. Thermoregulation
d. Condensation
e. EVD EVO
f. Supply air fan
g. Heating
h. Humidity control
i. Advanced
g. Manual management

8.3.1 Ga. Change language

This menu loop contains all masks for changing software language.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Lingua Ga01| | Language Ga01| | Langue Ga01| | Sprache Ga01|
| | | | | | | |
|Lingua: IT| |Language: EN| |Langue: FR| |Sprache: DE|
| | | | | | | |
| ENTER per cambiare| | ENTER to change | |ENTER pour modifier | |ENTER zum Ändern |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to choose the software language from those available.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Lingua Ga02| | Language Ga02| | Langue Ga02| | Sprache Ga02|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Disabilita all'avvio | |Disable language mask | |Désact. masque langue | |Deakt. Maske Sprache |
|la selezione lingua □ | |at start-up: □ | |au démarrage □ | |bei Start □ |
| | | | | | | |
|Visualizza per: 060s| |Show mask time: 060s| | | | |
| | | | |Montrer pour 060s| |Zeigen fõr: 060s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to disable language selection mask appearing when software is loaded after turning on
power supply to the pCO board and to set its showing time.
th
5 row: check to disable mask showing.
th
7 row: 60 s.

8.3.2 Gb. Information

This menu loop contains all information about hardware and software version, bios, boot etc., about devices
connected in serial mode and about unit serial number, final test operator code and date.

91
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Informazioni Gb1| | Information Gb1| | Informations Gb1| | Information Gb1|
| | | | | | | |
|Codice: FLBB0mCRCP| |Code: FLBB0mCRCP| |Code: FLBB0mCRCP| |Code: FLBB0mCRCP|
|Versione: 1.8 | |Ver.: 1.8 | |Ver.: 1.8 | |Ver.: 1.8 |
|Data: 23/12/14| |Date: 23/12/14| |Date: 23/12/14| |Date: 23/12/14|
| | | | | | |
|Bios: 6.31 29/10/14| |Bios: 6.31 29/10/14| |Bios: 6.31 29/10/14| |Bios: 6.31 29/10/14|
|Boot: 5.02 30/09/13| |Boot: 5.02 30/09/13| |Boot: 5.02 30/09/13| |Boot: 5.02 30/09/13|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask contains the following read-only information:
th
4 row: software code.
th
5 row: software version and date.
th
7 row: pCO board bios version and date.
th
8 row: pCO board boot version and date.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Informazioni Gb2| | Information Gb2| | Informations Gb2| | Information Gb2|
|Tipo scheda: pCO5+| |Board type: pCO5+| |Type carte: pCO5+| |Board Typ: pCO5+|
|Taglia scheda: Large| |Board size: Large| |Taille carte: Large| |Board GröBe: Large|
|Memoria flash: 2048KB| |Total flash: 2048KB| |Mémoire flash: 2048KB| |Total flash: 2048KB|
|Memoria RAM: 2048KB| |RAM: 2048KB| |Mémoire RAM: 2048KB| |RAM: 2048KB|
|Tipo built-in: None| |Built-In type: None| |Types inclus: Nom | |Built-In Typ: kein|
|Ciclo macchina: | |Main cycle: | |Cycle machine: | |Hauptkreis: |
|00.0cicli/s 0000ms| |00.0cycle/s 0000ms| |00.0cycle/s 0000ms| |00.0Kreis/e 0000ms|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask contains the following read-only information about pCO board:
nd
2 row: pCO board version.
rd
3 row: pCO board size, typically this field is blank.
th
4 row: total flash memory.
th
5 row: total RAM memory.
th
6 row: type of built-in display.
th
8 row: software main cycle: number of cycles per second and cycle time.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Informazioni Gb3| | Information Gb3| | Informations Gb3| | Information Gb3|
|Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 |
| | | | | | | |
|Versione boot: 00000| |Boot release: 00000| |Version Boot: 00000| |Boot-Version 00000|
|Versione FW: 00000| |FW Release: 00000| |Version FW: 00000| |FW-Version: 00000|
|Checksum FW: 00000| |FW Chekcsum: 00000| |Checksum FW: 00000| |FW-Checksum: 00000|
|Versione MC: 00000| |MC release: 00000| |Version MC: 00000| |MC-Version: 00000|
|Hardware ID: 00000| |Hardware ID: 00000| |ID Hardware: 00000| |Hardware-ID: 00000|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask contains the following read-only information about Power+ inverter:
th
4 row: boot release
th
5 row: firmware release
th
6 row: firmware checksum
th
7 row: motor control release
th
8 row: hardware ID

92
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Informazioni Gb4| | Information Gb4| | Informations Gb4| | Information Gb4|
|EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 |
| | | | | | | |
|Versione firmw.: 5.1| |Firmware version: 5.1| |Version logiciel: 5.1| |Firmware vers.: 5.1|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Informazioni Gb6| | Information Gb6| | Informations Gb6| | Information Gb6|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
| | | | | | | |
|Versione firmw.: 5.1| |Firmware version: 5.1| |Version logiciel: 5.1| |Firmware vers.: 5.1|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
These mask contains the following read-only information about EVD EVO for circuit 1 and 2:
th
4 row: firmware version.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Informazioni Gb11| | Information Gb11| | Informations Gb11| | Information Gb11|
| | | | | | | |
|Dati unità | |Unit data | |Données unité | |Daten zur Einheit |
|Seriale: SB10000000| |Serial: SB10000000| |Série: SB10000000| |Seriennr.: SB10000000|
|Cod.operatore: 0000| |Operator code: 0000| |Code opérateur: 0000| |Bedienercode: 0000|
|Data: 01/01/2014| |Date: 01/01/2014| |Date: 01/01/2014| |Datum: 01/01/2014|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask contains the following read-only information about the unit: serial number, final test operator code
and date.

8.3.3 Gc. Charts

This branch contains all parameters necessary to configure temperature and humidity charts; relevant masks
are visible only if charts (graphs) have been enabled in Manufacturer Menu.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Grafici Gc1| | Graphs Gc1| | Graphiques Gc1| | Diagramme Gc1|
|Config. Grafico | |Graph setting | |Reglage graph | |Diagramm-Einstellung |
|Temp.mandata | |Supply temp. | |Temp.approv. | |Vorlauftemperatur |
|T.campione: 00:01:00| |Sample time: 00:01:00| |Tps Echant: 00:01:00| |Abtastzeit: 00:01:00|
|Resetta grafico: □ | |Reset graph: □ | |Init.graph: □ | |Reset Diagramm: □ |
|Autoscala: □ | |Autoscale: □ | |Ech.auto: □ | |Autoskalierung: □ |
|Limite basso: 0.0| |Low limit: 0.0| |Limite bas: 0.0| |Unt.Grenze: 0.0|
|Limite alto: 35.0| |Hogh limit: 35.0| |Limite hte: 35.0| |Ober.Grenze: 35.0|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure supply air temperature chart; it is possible to set the sampling time, reset the
chart, set the auto-scale function and eventually to set minimum and maximum values to be shown (vertical
axis).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Grafici Gc2| | Graphs Gc2| | Graphiques Gc2| | Diagramme Gc2|
|Config. Grafico | |Graph setting | |Reglage graph | |Diagramm-Einstellung |
|Temp.ritorno | |Return temp. | |Temp.retour | |Rücklauftemperatur |
|T.campione: 00:01:00| |Sample time: 00:01:00| |Tps Echant: 00:01:00| |Abtastzeit: 00:01:00|
|Resetta grafico: □ | |Reset graph: □ | |Init.graph: □ | |Reset Diagramm: □ |
|Autoscala: □ | |Autoscale: □ | |Ech.auto: □ | |Autoskalierung: □ |
|Limite basso: 10.0| |Low limit: 10.0| |Limite bas: 10.0| |Unt.Grenze: 10.0|
|Limite alto: 45.0| |Hogh limit: 45.0| |Limite hte: 45.0| |Ober.Grenze: 45.0|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure return air temperature chart; it is possible to set the sampling time, reset the
chart, set the auto-scale function and eventually to set minimum and maximum values to be shown (vertical
axis).

93
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Grafici Gc3| | Graphs Gc3| | Graphiques Gc3| | Diagramme Gc3|
|Config. Grafico | |Graph setting | |Reglage graph | |Diagramm-Einstellung |
|Umidità | |Humidity | |Umidité | |Luftfeuchtigkeit |
|T.campione: 00:01:00| |Sample time: 00:01:00| |Tps Echant: 00:01:00| |Abtastzeit: 00:01:00|
|Resetta grafico: □ | |Reset graph: □ | |Init.graph: □ | |Reset Diagramm: □ |
|Autoscala: □ | |Autoscale: □ | |Ech.auto: □ | |Autoskalierung: □ |
|Limite basso: 0.0| |Low limit: 0.0| |Limite bas: 0.0| |Unt.Grenze: 0.0|
|Limite alto: 100.0| |Hogh limit: 100.0| |Limite hte: 100.0| |Ober.Grenze: 100.0|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to configure return air humidity chart; it is possible to set the sampling time, reset the chart,
set the auto-scale function and eventually to set minimum and maximum values to be shown (vertical axis).

8.3.4 Gd. Working hours

This menu loop contains all information about unit and devices working hours.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Contaore Gd1| | Working hours Gd1| | Compteur horaire Gd1| | Stundenzähler Gd1|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Vent.unità: 000000h| |Unit/fans: 000000h| |Vent.unité: 000000h| |Belüft.Einht: 000000h|
|Riscald.: 000000h| |Heating: 000000h| |Réchauffer: 000000h| |Heizung: 000000h|
|Umidific.: 000000h| |Humidifier: 000000h| |Humidif.: 000000h| |Luftbefeuch.: 000000h|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask contains the following read-only information: unit/fans working hours, heating devices working
hours and humidifier working hours.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Contaore Gd2| | Working hours Gd2| | Compteur horaire Gd2| | Stundenzähler Gd2|
| | | | | | | |
|Circuito 1 | |Circuit 1 | |Circuit 1 | |Kreislauf 1 |
|Comp. BLDC: 000000h| |BLDC: 000000h| |Comp. BLDC: 000000h| |Komp. BLDC: 000000h|
|Comp. Fix: 000000h| |Comp.1: 000000h| |Comp. Fix.: 000000h| |Komp. Fix.: 000000h|
|Vent.cond.: 000000h| |Cond.fan: 000000h| |Vent.cond.: 000000h| |Verd.Lüfter: 000000h|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Contaore Gd3| | Working hours Gd3| | Compteur horaire Gd3| | Stundenzähler Gd3|
| | | | | | | |
|Circuito 2 | |Circuit 2 | |Circuit 2 | |Kreislauf 2 |
|Comp. Fix 1: 000000h| |Comp. Fix 1: 000000h| |Comp. Fix.1: 000000h| |Komp. Fix.1: 000000h|
|Comp. Fix 2: 000000h| |Comp. Fix 2: 000000h| |Comp. Fix.2: 000000h| |Komp. Fix.2: 000000h|
|Vent.cond.: 000000h| |Cond.fan: 000000h| |Vent.cond.: 000000h| |Verd.Lüfter: 000000h|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
These masks, displayed only for ED units, contains the following read-only information for circuit 1 and 2:
BLDC compressor working hours (if present), ON/OFF compressors working hours and condenser fans
working hours.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Contaore Gd4| | Working hours Gd4| | Compteur horaire Gd4| | Stundenzähler Gd4|
| | |CPY n°1 | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Ore funzionamento | |Cylinder life: | |Compteur horaire | |Stundenzähler |
|cilindro (dA): 000000h| | 000000h| |cylindre (dA): 000000h| |Zylinder (dA): 000000h|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only if integrated humidifier with CPY control board is present, contains the following
read-only information : humidifier cylinder working hours.

94
8.3.5 Ge. BMS config.
Starting from this loop, the Service menu is password-protected.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

|Menù service avanz. | |Service Set. Password | |Adv.service menu | |Adv.service menu |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Inserire password | |Insert service | |Insert service | |Password eingeben |
|service (PW1): 0000| |password (PW1): 0000| |password (PW1): 0000| |service (PW1): 0000|
| | | | | | | |
|Password errata! | |Password wrong! | |Mot de passe erroné! | |Password falsch! |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
Default Service password is 0200.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Configur. BMS Ge1| | Bms config. Ge1| | Configurat. BMS Ge1| | Konfig. BMS Ge1|
|BMS1 | |BMS1 | |BMS1 | |BMS1 |
| | | | | | | |
|Configurazione | |Configuration | |Configuration | |Konfiguration |
|Indirizzo: 001| |Address: 001| |Adresse: 001| |Adresse: 001|
|Protocollo: | |Protocol: | |Protocole: | |Protokoll: |
| MODBUS SLAVE Ext.| | MODBUS SLAVE Ext.| | MODBUS SLAVE Ext.| | MODBUS SLAVE Ext.|
|Baudrate: 38400bps| |Baudrate: 38400bps| |Baudrate: 38400bps| |Baudrate: 38400bps|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set the BMS communication parameters of the pCO controller
th
5 row: unit BMS address.
th
7 row: BMS protocol selection.
th
8 row: BMS protocol baud rate.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Configur. BMS Ge2| | Bms config. Ge2| | Configurat. BMS Ge2| | Konfig. BMS Ge2|
|BMS2 | |BMS2 | |BMS2 | |BMS2 |
| | | | | | | |
|Configurazione | |Configuration | |Configuration | |Konfiguration |
|Indirizzo: 002| |Address: 002| |Adresse: 002| |Adresse: 002|
|Protocollo: | |Protocol: | |Protocole: | |Protokoll: |
| » Rete disab. « | | » Net disabled «| | » Net désactivé «| | » Net deaktiv. «|
|Baudrate: 38400bps| |Baudrate: 38400bps| |Baudrate: 38400bps| |Baudrate: 38400bps|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for second BMS port of pCO controller. By default it is factory disabled.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Configur. BMS Ge3| | Bms config. Ge3| | Configurat. BMS Ge3| | Konfig. BMS Ge3|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Modem password: 1234 | |Modem password: 1234 | |Modem mot de passé1234| |Modem Password: 1234 |
|Num.da memorizz.: 1 | |Numbers to store: 1 | |Numeros pour ranger:1 | |Zählen zu speich.: 1 |
|Rubrica telef.: 1 | |Phone number index: 1 | |Repertoire tél: 1 | |Telefon-Index: 1 |
|Inserire numero: | |Insert the number: | |Insérez le nombre: | |Legen Nummer: |
| 3281234567 | | 3281234567 | | 3281234567 | | 3281234567 |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask is shown only if GSM protocol is selected on mask Ge1 and allows to set modem password and
mobile n° for SMS sending. It is advisable to send SMS messages to one mobile device only.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Configur. BMS Ge4| | Bms config. Ge4| | Configurat. BMS Ge4| | Konfig. BMS Ge4|
|Modem GSM | |Modem GSM | |Modem GSM | |Modem GSM |
| | | | | | | |
|Abilita invio SMS □ | |Enable send SMS □ | |Act.envoyer SMS □ | |Akt.SMS senden □ |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if GSM protocol is selected on Ge1 mask, allows to enable SMS alarm message
sending.

95
8.3.6 Gf. Service settings
This menu loop contains all Service parameters and is composed by different sub-menus.

8.3.6.1 Gfa. Reset working hours

This menu loop contains all masks to reset working hours counters and to set working hours thresholds for
each component. If a component reaches its working hours threshold, a light alarm is triggered.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Azzera contaore Gfa1| | Reset work.hour Gfa1| | Reset compt.hor. Gfa1| | Rücksetz. Stund. Gfa1|
| | | | | | | |
|Soglia *(1000h) | |Threshold *(1000h) | |Threshold *(1000h) | |Schwelle *(1000h) |
|Unità: 009h □ | |Unit: 009h □ | |Unit: 009h □ | |Unit: 009h □ |
|Riscald.: 009h □ | |Heating: 009h □ | |Chauffage: 009h □ | |Heizung: 009h □ |
|Umidificatore: 009h □ | |Humidifier: 009h □ | |Humidific.: 009h □ | |Luftbefeuch.: 009h □ |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Azzera contaore Gfa2| | Reset work.hour Gfa2| | Reset compt.hor. Gfa2| | Rücksetz. Stund. Gfa2|
| | | | | | | |
|Soglia *(1000h) | |Threshold *(1000h) | |Threshold *(1000h) | |Schwelle *(1000h) |
|Circuito 1 | |Circuit 1 | |Circuit 1 | |Circuit 1 |
|Comp. BLDC: 009h □ | |BLDC: 009h □ | |Comp. BLDC: 009h □ | |Comp. BLDC: 009h □ |
|Comp. Fix: 009h □ | |Fix.comp.: 009h □ | |Comp. Fix: 009h □ | |Komp. Fix: 009h □ |
|Ventil.cond.: 009h □ | |Cond.fan: 009h □ | |Cond.vent.: 009h □ | |Verflüssiglõft.:09h □ |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Azzera contaore Gfa4| | Reset work.hour Gfa4| | Reset compt.hor. Gfa4| | Rücksetz. Stund. Gfa4|
| | | | | | | |
|Soglia *(1000h) | |Threshold *(1000h) | |Seuil *(1000h) | |Schwelle *(1000h) |
|Circuito 2 | |Circuit 2 | |Circuit 2 | |Schaltung 2 |
|Comp. Fix 1: 009h □ | |BLDC: 009h □ | |Comp. Fix 1: 009h □ | |Komp. Fix 1: 009h □ |
|Comp. Fix 2: 009h □ | |Fix.comp.: 009h □ | |Comp. Fix 2: 009h □ | |Komp. Fix 2: 009h □ |
|Ventil.cond.: 009h □ | |Cond.fan: 009h □ | |Cond.vent.: 009h □ | |Kond.vent.: 009h □ |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Azzera contaore Gfa5| | Reset work.hour Gfa5| | Reset compt.hor. Gfa5| | Rücksetz. Stund. Gfa5|
| | |CPY n° 1 | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Reset contaore | |Reset cylinder life | |Réinitialiser vie | |Rücksetzen |
|cilindro (dA): □ | |(dA): □ | |cylindre (dA): □ | |Zylinderleben.(dA): □ |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
From each row it is possible to set working hours threshold for each component (number set x 1000 h) and to
reset working hours by checking the box.

8.3.6.2 Gfb. Probe adjustment

This menu loop contains all masks for probes reading adjustments; for example, if the air return temperature
probe read value is different from the temperature value read by a precision thermometer, it is possible to
adjust the probe reading from this menu.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Taratura sonde Gfb1| | Probe adjust. Gfb1| | Etalon.sondes Gfb1| | Fühler einst. Gfb1|
| | | | | | | |
|U01: | |U01: | |U01: | |U01: |
|Offset: 0| |Offset: 0| |Offset: 0| |Offset: 0|
|Conteg.tot.: 999| |Value: 999| |Val.: 999| |Füh.: 999|
|U02: | |U02: | |U02: | |U02: |
|Offset: 0.0bar| |Offset: 0.0bar| |Offset: 0.0bar| |Offset: 0.0bar|
|Conteg.tot.: 10.0bar| |Value: 10.0bar| |Val.: 10.0bar| |Füh.: 10.0bar|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
All masks are similar, so only the first one is reported; in the offset row it is possible to set the offset value for
each probe, while from the value row it is possible to see the current probe reading added with the offset.

96
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Taratura sonde Gfb10| | Probe adjust. Gfb10| | Etalon.sondes Gfb10| | Fühler einst. Gfb10|
| | | | | | | |
|Allarme sonde guaste | |Faulty probes alarm | |Alarme sondes defect. | |Defekte Sonden Alarm |
|Ritardo allarme dopo | |Delay alarm after | |Retard alarme après | |Verzögerungsal.nach |
|avvio ventilatore di | |start up supply air | |démarrage du ventil. | |dem Start des |
|mandata: 5s| |fan: 5s| |d’alimentation: 5s| |Teillüfter: 5s|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set a general delay for faulty probes alarm, starting from supply air fan start-up.
th
5 row: 5 s.

8.3.6.3 Gfc. Thermoregulation

This menu loop contains some masks for thermoregulation settings, while some other masks are in User
menu.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc1| | Thermoreg. Gfc1| | Thermorégulat. Gfc1| | Temperaturreg. Gfc1|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Impostaz.regolazione | |Regulation settings | |Configurations réglage| |Einstellwerte Regel. |
|Tipo sonda: RITORNO| |Probe type: RETURN| |Type de sonde: RETOUR | |Fühlertyp: ZURÜCK |
|Tipo contr.: P| |Control mode: P| |Mode de contrôle: P| |Steuerweise: P|
| | | | | | | |
|Ritardo avvio: 030s| |Start delay: 030s| |Retard démarr.: 030s| |Startverzögerung: 030s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to choose thermoregulation control mode and to set thermoregulation start delay from unit
ON.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: displays the probe used for thermoregulation (read only, the probe is selected from the User menu).
th
6 row: P.
th
8 row: 30 s.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc2| | Thermoreg. Gfc2| | Thermorégulat. Gfc2| | Temperaturreg. Gfc2|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Regolazione in ritorno| |Return regulation | |Réglage retour | |Rücklaufreg. |
|Set point: 24.0C| |Setpoint: 24.0C| |Point de cons.: 24.0C| |Sollwert: 24.0C|
|Banda: 02.0C| |Band: 02.0C| |Bande: 02.0C| |Band: 02.0C|
|Zona neutra: 0.2C| |DeadBand: 0.2C| |Zone neutre: 0.2C| |Neutr. Bereich: 0.2C|
|Tempo integrale: 030s| |Integral time: 030s| |Temp intégrale: 030s| |Integral Zeit: 030s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to choose integral time for return regulation and shows other parameters for return
regulation.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: displays the return regulation setpoint (read only, the parameter is set in the Setpoint menu).
th
6 row: displays the return regulation band (read only, the parameter is set in the User menu).
th
7 row: displays the return regulation band (read only, the parameter is set in the User menu).
th
8 row: this row is displayed only if P+I control mode is set (mask Gfc1), default 30 s.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc3| | Thermoreg. Gfc3| | Thermorégulat. Gfc3| | Temperaturreg. Gfc3|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Regolazione in mandata| |Supply regulation | |Réglage refoulement | |Reg.Vorlaufdruck |
|Set point: 18.0C| |Setpoint: 18.0C| |Point de cons.: 18.0C| |Sollwert: 18.0C|
|Banda: 05.0C| |Band: 05.0C| |Bande: 05.0C| |Band: 05.0C|
|Zona neutra: 0.5C| |DeadBand: 0.5C| |Zone neutre: 0.2C| |Neutr. Bereich: 0.2C|
|Tempo integrale: 030s| |Integral time: 030s| |Temp intégrale: 030s| |Integral Zeit: 030s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to choose integral time for supply regulation and shows other parameters for supply
regulation.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: displays the supply regulation setpoint (read only, the parameter is set in the Setpoint menu).
th
6 row: displays the supply regulation band (read only, the parameter is set in the User menu).
th
7 row: displays the supply regulation deadband (read only, the parameter is set in the User menu).
th
8 row: this row is displayed only if P+I control mode is set (mask Gfc1), default 30 s.

97
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Termoreg. Gfc4| | Thermoreg. Gfc4| | Thermorégulat. Gfc4| | Temperaturreg. Gfc4|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Modalità operativa: | |Operating mode: | |Mode de fonction.: | |Betriebsart: |
|DISPOSIT.IN SEQUENZA | |DEVICES SEQUENCE | |DISP.SEQUENCE | |GERÄTE SEQUENZ |
|1° BATT. & 2° COMPR. | |1° COIL & 2° COMPR. | |1° BATT. & 2° COMPR. | |1° BATT. & 2° KOMPR. |
| | | | | | | |
|Rit. ON 2°disp.: 120s| |Delay ON 2°device:120s| |Retard ON 2°disp.:120s| |Verz.ON 2°Gerät: 120s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if an additional cooling device has been enabled, allows to choose its operating mode:
• For Dual Cooling (DC), it is possible to select one of the following modes:
o Cascade devices with priority to DC cooling coil: in this case, first half of the cooling band is
covered by water cooling coil of DC, while second half is covered by the compressors. DC
cooling valve will therefore start to open first;
o Cascade devices with priority of compressors; in this case first half of the cooling band is
covered by the compressors, while second half is covered by water cooling coil of DC.
Compressors will therefore start earlier;
o Alternate devices with priority of DC cooling coil: in this case the whole cooling band is
covered by DC cooling coil and compressors are allowed to start only as backup, in case an
alarm is generated by the DC cooling circuit;
o Alternate devices with priority of compressors: in this case the whole cooling band is
covered by the compressors and DC cooling coil is allowed to start only as backup, in case
an alarm is generated by the refrigerant circuit;
• For water Free Cooling (FCw), priority is fixed and assigned to Free Cooling; in this case first half of
cooling band shall be covered by FCw, second half of the band shall be covered by compressors, so
FCw water valve opens first;
• For air Free Cooling (FCa), priority is fixed and assigned to Free Cooling; in this case first half of
cooling band shall be covered by FCa, second half of the band shall be covered by compressors, so
FCa air damper opens first.

In the last row of the mask it is possible to set the time delay for the start-up of the second cooling device.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc5| | Thermoreg. Gfc5| | Thermorégulat. Gfc5| | Temperaturreg. Gfc5|
| | | | | | | |
|Free cooling | |Free cooling | |Free cooling | |Free cooling |
|Offset misurato: 00.0C| |Measured ofs.: 00.0C| |Décalage mesuré: 00.0C| |Gemess.Offset: 00.0C|
|Offset abilitaz.:02.0C| |En. offset: 02.0C| |Act.offset: 02.0C| |Akt.Offset: 02.0C|
|Diff.reset al.: 01.0C| |Al.reset diff.: 01.0C| |Diff.reset al.: 01.0C| |Al.Reset Diff.: 01.0C|
|Free dehumidification | |Free dehumidification | |Free dehumidification | |Free dehumidification |
|Offset abil.: 1.0C| |En. offset: 1.0C| |Perm.offset: 1.0C| |Erm.offset: 1.0C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if Dual Cooling or water Free Cooling are enabled as additional cooling step, allows to
set the following parameters:
th
4 row: measured offset between return air temperature and inlet water (read only);
th
5 row: offset between return air temperature and inlet water which enables the water Free Cooling or Dual
Cooling;
th
6 row: High and low inlet water temperature alarm reset differential;
th
8 row: offset between return air wet bulb temperature and inlet water temperature which enables Free
Dehumidification (water Free Cooling only).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc6| | Thermoreg. Gfc6| | Thermorégulat. Gfc6| | Temperaturreg. Gfc6|
|Free cool.air (FCa) | |Free cool.air (FCa) | |Free cool.air (FCa) | |Free cool.air (FCa) |
| | | | | | | |
|Allarme bassa temper. | |Low external air | |Bas air extérieur | |Niedrige Aussenluft |
|aria esterna | |temperature alarm | |température alarme | |Temperaturalarm |
|Set point: 3.0C| |Set point: 3.0C| |Point de cons.: 3.0C| |Sollwert: 3.0C|
|Ritardo: 5s| |Delay: 5s| |Retard: 5s| |Verzögerung: 5s|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

98
Questa maschera, visualizzata solo se è abilitato il Free Cooling aria, permette di impostare la soglia e il
ritardo per l’allarme di bassa temperatura aria esterna che disabilita il Free Cooling aria.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc7| | Thermoreg. Gfc7| | Thermorégulat. Gfc7| | Temperaturreg. Gfc7|
|Free cool.air (FCa) | |Free cool.air (FCa) | |Free cool.air (FCa) | |Free cool.air (FCa) |
| | | | | | | |
|Allarme alta temper. | |High external air | |Haute air extérieur | |Hohe Aussenluft |
|aria esterna | |temperature alarm | |alarme de temp. | |Temperaturalarm |
|Ritardo: 5s| |Delay: 5s| |Retard: 5s| |Verzögerung: 5s|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if air Free Cooling is enabled, allows to set the the time delay for the high external air
temperature alarm, which disables the air Free Cooling.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc8| | Thermoreg. Gfc8| | Thermorégulat. Gfc8| | Temperaturreg. Gfc8|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Tipo contr.flusso acq.| |Additional cool.device| |Disp.refr.supplément. | |Zusätz.Kühleinricht. |
|unità freddo addiz.: | |water flow check type:| |type contrôle flux: | |Wasserdurchflussp.Typ:|
|NESSUNO | |NONE | |AUCUN | |NONE |
|Ritardo avvio: 30s| |Delay on: 30s| |Retard on: 30s| |Verzöger. ON: 30s|
|Ritardo spegnim.: 005s| |Delay off: 005s| |Retard off: 005s| |Verzöger. Off: 005s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if the water Free Cooling is enabled or if a water condensed Dual Cooling unit is set-
up, allows to set a flow switch alarm delay at unit startup or during operation.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc9| | Thermoreg. Gfc9| | Thermorégulat. Gfc9| | Temperaturreg. Gfc9|
|Allarme flusso acqua | |Additional cool.device| |Disp.refroid.supplém. | |Zusätzlic.Kühlenricht.|
|unità freddo addiz. | |water flow alarm | |Alarme debit d'eau | |Flussalarm |
|Rit.allarme avvio: 30s| |Alarm delay: 30s| |Retard al.démar.: 30s| |Alarmverzög.: 30s|
|Reset manuale dopo | |Manual reset after | |Réinit.manuelle aprés | |Manuel.Rückstell.nach |
|N.massimo tentativi: 3| |Max.retry number: 3| |Max.réessayer nom.: 3| |Max.Wiederholungsn.: 3|
|Periodo controllo: 60m| |Check period: 60m| |Vérif.période: 60m| |Prüfen Zeitraum: 60m|
|Diff.acqua: 0.2C| |Water diff.: 0.2C| |Diff.eau: 0.2C| |Wasserdiff.: 0.2C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if water Free Cooling or water-condensed Dual Cooling and the “virtual flow switch”
have been enabled, allows to set the water flow alarm delay at unit startup, the n° of automatic reset attempts
and relevant time, after which the alarm becomes manual reset, the differential between inlet water
temperature and outlet water temperature below which the water flow alarm is activated.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc10| | Thermoreg. Gfc10| | Thermorégulat. Gfc10| | Temperaturreg. Gfc10|
|Allarme flusso acqua | |Additional cool.device| |Disp.refroid.supplém. | |Zusätzlic.Kühlenricht.|
|unità freddo addiz. | |water flow alarm | |Alarme debit d'eau | |Flussalarm |
|Rit.allarme avvio: 30s| |Start up al.delay: 30s| |Démar.retard d'al.:30s| |Starten Al.Verzög.:30s|
|Rit.allarme funz.: 05s| |Running al.delay: 05s| |Courir ret. d'al.: 05s| |Laufen Al.Verzög.: 05s|
|Reset manuale dopo | |Manual reset after | |Réinit.manuelle aprés | |Manuel.Rückstell.nach |
|N.massimo tentativi: 3| |Max.retry number: 3| |Max.réessayer nom.: 3| |Max.Wiederholungsn.: 3|
|Periodo controllo: 60m| |Check period: 60m| |Vérif.période: 60m| |Prüfen Zeitraum: 60m|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if water Free Cooling or water-condensed Dual Cooling and a flow switch have been
enabled, allows to set other parameters for water flow alarm, such as the water flow alarm delay from unit
startup and during operation, the n° of automatic reset attempts and control period after which the alarm
becomes manual reset.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc11| | Thermoreg. Gfc11| | Thermorégulat. Gfc11| | Temperaturreg. Gfc11|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Allarme bassa temper. | |Low coil water inlet | |Bas eau entrée temp. | |Niedr.Batt.Wassereinl.|
|acqua ingr.batteria | |temperature alarm | |alarme de temp. | |Temperaturalarm |
|Set point: 03.0C| |Set point: 03.0C| |Point de cons.: 03.0C| |Sollwert: 03.0C|
|Ritardo: 005s| |Delay: 005s| |Retard: 005s| |Verzögerung: 005s|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if the water Free Cooling has been enabled, allows to set a threshold and a time delay
for the low inlet water temperature alarm; such alarm disables water Free Cooling, so as to avoid too low
water temperture resulting in coil freezing or excess dehumidification.

99
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Termoreg. Gfc12| | Thermoreg. Gfc12| | Thermorégulat. Gfc12| | Temperaturreg. Gfc12|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Allarme alta temper. | |High coil water inlet | |Haute eau batterie | |Hohe Batteriewasserz. |
|acqua ingr.batteria | |temperature alarm | |alarme de temp. | |Temperaturalarm |
|Ritardo: 005s| |Delay: 005s| |Retard: 005s| |Verzögerung: 005s|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if the water Free Cooling is enables, allows to set a time delay for the high inlet water
temperature alarm, which disables Free Cooling.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Gfc13| | Thermoreg. Gfc13| | Thermorégulat. Gfc13| | Temperaturreg. Gfc13|
|Free cool.air (FCa) | |Free cool.air (FCa) | |Free cool.air (FCa) | |Free cool.air (FCa) |
|Forza circuito frigo | |Force cooling circ. | |Forcé circuit refr. | |Erzwungene Kühlkreisl.|
|dopo stop □ | |after stop □ | |après l’arrêt □ | |nach Stopp □ |
|Tempo di stop: 168h| |Stop time: 168h| |Temps d’arrêt: 168h| |Stoppzeit: 168h|
|Tempo forzatura: 15min| |Forcing time: 15min| |Temps de forÇage:15min| |Erzwingen zeit: 15min|
| | | | | | | |
|Countdown: 168h| |Countdown: 168h| |Countdown: 168h| |Countdown: 168h|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Termoreg. Gfc13| | Thermoreg. Gfc13| | Thermorégulat. Gfc13| | Temperaturreg. Gfc13|
|Free cool.water (FCw) | |Free cool.water (FCw) | |Free cool.water (FCw) | |Free cool.water (FCw) |
|Forza circuito frigo | |Force cooling circ. | |Forcé circuit refr. | |Erzwungene Kühlkreisl.|
|dopo stop □ | |after stop □ | |après l’arrêt □ | |nach Stopp □ |
|Tempo di stop: 168h| |Stop time: 168h| |Temps d’arrêt: 168h| |Stoppzeit: 168h|
|Tempo forzatura: 15min| |Forcing time: 15min| |Temps de forÇage:15min| |Erzwingen zeit: 15min|
| | | | | | | |
|Countdown: 168h| |Countdown: 168h| |Countdown: 168h| |Countdown: 168h|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown as in the first example if the air Free Cooling is enabled or as in the second example if the
water Free Cooling is enabled, allows to set the “anti-sticking” function for the refrigeration circuit, which
forces the compressors to operate for a preset time (“Forcing time”) after a specific standby time has elapsed
(“Stop time”), with the aim of checking the correct operation of the refrigeration circuit and to avoid too long
standstill periods.

8.3.6.4 Gfd. Condensation

This menu loop contains some masks for condensation management, depending on the type of condensation
enabled from Manufacturer menu.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Condensazione Gfd1| | Condensation Gfd1| | Condensation Gfd1| | Verflüssigung Gfd1|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Ventilatori cond. | |Condensation fans | |Ventilateurs cond. | |Gebläse Verflüss. |
|Velocità max: 10.0V| |Max.speed: 10.0V| |Vitesse max.: 10.0V| |max. Geschw.: 10.0V|
|Velocità min: 02.0V| |Min.speed: 02.0V| |Vitesse min.: 02.0V| |min. Geschw.: 02.0V|
| | | | | | | |
|Tempo speedup: 02s| |Speedup time: 02s| |Temps accélération:02s| |Speedup-Zeit: 02s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if air condensation is enabled, allows to set parameters for condensation fans control.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: 10.0V.
th
6 row: 2.0V.
th
8 row: 5 s.

100
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Condensazione Gfd2| | Configuration Gfd2| | Condensation Gfd2| | Verflüssigung Gfd2|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Ventilatori cond. | |Condensation fans | |Ventilateurs cond. | |Gebläse Verflüss. |
|Set point: 24.0barg | |Setpoint: 24.0barg| |Setpoint: 24.0barg| |Sollwert: 24.0barg|
|Diff.: 08.0barg | |Diff.: 08.0barg| |Diff.: 08.0barg| |Diff.: 08.0barg|
|Diff.cut off: 0.5barg| |Diff.cut off 0.5barg| |Diff.cut off 0.5barg| |Diff.cut off: 0.5barg|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if air condensation is enabled, allows to set parameters for condensation fans control.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: 24.0 barg.
th
6 row: 8.0 barg.
th
8 row: 0.5 barg.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Condensazione Gfd3| | Configuration Gfd3| | Condensation Gfd3| | Verflüssigung Gfd3|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Ventilatori cond. | |Condensation fans | |Ventilateurs cond. | |Gebläse Verflüss. |
|Abil.funz.forzatura □ | |En.force function □ | |Act.fonct.forçage □ | |Akt.Zwangsschaltung □ |
|Set point: 32.0barg| |Setpoint 32.0barg| |Setpoint 32.0barg| |Sollwert: 32.0barg|
|Diff.: 2.0barg| |Different. 2.0barg| |Different. 2.0barg| |Diff.: 2.0barg|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if air condensation is enabled, allows to enable and to configure condensation fans
forcing function; this is used when it is possible to have abnormal rise of condensing pressure with
compressors OFF; for example due to solar radiation. If condensing pressure rises above the setpoint,
condensing fans are forced at maximum speed until the pressure goes below the setpoint minus the
differential.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: enable.
th
6 row: 32.0 barg.
th
8 row: 2.0 barg.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Condensazione Gfd4| | Condensation Gfd4| | Condensation Gfd4| | Verflüssigung Gfd4|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Condensazione acqua | |Water condensing | |Condensat. à eau | |Wasserverflüssigung |
|Set point: 24.0bar| |Set point: 24.0bar| |Point de cons.:24.0bar| |Sollwert: 24.0bar|
|Differenz.: 08.0bar| |Differential: 08.0bar| |Différentiel: 08.0bar| |Differential: 08.0bar|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if water condensation is enabled, allows to configure condensation control valve
parameters.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: 24.0 barg.
th
6 row: 8.0 barg.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Condensazione Gfd5| | Condensation Gfd5| | Condensation Gfd5| | Verflüssigung Gfd5|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Limiti valvola cond. | |Cond.valve limits | |Limites vanne condens.| |Grenzw. Ventil Verfl. |
|Min.:03.0V Max.:10.0V| |Min.:03.0V Max.:10.0V| |Min.:03.0V Max.:10.0V| |Min.:03.0V Max.:10.0V|
|Pre-Apert.: 50.0%| |Pre-Open: 50.0%| |Pré-ouverture: 50.0%| |Voröffnung: 50.0%|
|Rit. Pre-Apert.: 5s| |Delay Pre-Open: 5s| |Ret.pré-ouverture: 5s| |Verz. Voröffnung: 5s|
|Rit. avvio compr.: 15s| |Delay On compr.: 15s| |Ret.démarr.compr.: 15s| |Verz. Start Verd.: 15s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if water condensation is enabled, allows to configure condensation control valve
parameters.
Default parameters are as follow:

101
 th
5 row: 3.0V for minimum and 10.0V for maximum.
th
6 row: 50.0%.
th
7 row: 5s.
h
8 row: 15s.

8.3.6.5 Gfe. EVD EVO

This menu loop contains the masks for EVD EVO management.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| EVD EVO Gfe1| | EVD EVO Gfe1| | EVD EVO Gfe1| | EVD EVO Gfe1|
|EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 | |EVO n°1 |
| | | | | | | |
|Set point SH: 5.0K | |Setpoint SH: 5.0K | |Surchauffe: 5.0K | |Überhitzung: 5.0K |
|Soglia LowSH: 1.5K | |LowSH thresh.: 1.5K | |Seuil LowSH: 1.5K | |NiedrÜberhit.: 5.0K |
|Soglia LOP: -22.0°C| |LOP thresh.: -22.0°C| |Seuil LOP: -22.0°C| |LOP schwelle: -22.0°C|
|Soglia MOP: 22.0°C| |MOP thresh.: 22.0°C| |Seuil MOP: 22.0°C| |MOP schwelle: 22.0°C|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| EVD EVO Gfe2| | EVD EVO Gfe2| | EVD EVO Gfe2| | EVD EVO Gfe2|
|EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 | |EVO n°2 |
| | | | | | | |
|Set point SH: 5.0K | |Setpoint SH: 5.0K | |Surchauffe: 5.0K | |Überhitzung: 5.0K |
|Soglia LowSH: 1.5K | |LowSH thresh.: 1.5K | |Seuil LowSH: 1.5K | |NiedrÜberhit.: 1.5K |
|Soglia LOP: -22.0°C| |LOP thresh.: -22.0°C| |Seuil LOP: -22.0°C| |LOP schwelle: -22.0°C|
|Soglia MOP: 22.0°C| |MOP thresh.: 22.0°C| |Seuil MOP: 22.0°C| |MOP schwelle: 22.0°C|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
These masks, shown only if air EVD EVO is enabled, allow to set parameters for EVD EVO of circuit 1 and 2.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: 5.0K.
th
5 row: 1.5K.
th
6 row: -22.0°C.
th
7 row: 22.0°C.

8.3.6.6 Gff. Supply air fan

This menu loop contains the masks for supply air fan management. Different masks will be displayed,
depending on the ventilation control type enabled.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Supply air fan Gff1| | Supply air fan Gff1| | Vent.de refoul. Gff1| | Vorlaufgebläse Gff1|
| | | | | | | |
|Delay fan | |Delay fan | |Retard fan | |Verzögerung Fan |
|Start up: 030s| |Start up: 030s| |Démarrage: 030s| |Start-up: 030s|
|Switch off: 090s| |Switch off: 090s| |Eteindre: 090s| |Ausschalt.: 090s|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set delay times for supply air fan at unit start up and switch OFF.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: 30s.
th
5 row: 90s.

102
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ventil.mandata Gff2| | Supply air fan Gff2| | Vent.de refoul. Gff2| | Vorlaufgebläse Gff2|
|Logica PRC | |PRC logic | |Logique PRC | |PRC Logik |
| | | | | | | |
|Pressione ventilatore | |Fan pressure | |Pression ventilateur | |Gebläsedruck |
|Limiti del set point | |Set point limit | |Limites point de cons.| |Sollwertgrenzen |
|Min.: 0Pa| |Min.: 0Pa| |Min.: 0Pa| |Min.: 0Pa|
|Max.: 50Pa| |Max.: 50Pa| |Max.: 50Pa| |Max.: 50Pa|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only if PRC fan regulation is enabled, allows to set minimum and maximum set point
limits for air flow, expressed in air pressure (Pa).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ventil.mandata Gff4| | Supply air fan Gff4| | Vent.de refoul. Gff4| | Vorlaufgebläse Gff4|
|Logica Auto-POC | |Auto-POC logic | |Auto-POC logique | |Auto-POC Logik |
| | | | | | | |
|Pressione ventilatore | |Fan pressure | |Pression ventilateur | |Gebläsedruck |
|Limiti del set point | |Set point limit | |Limites point de cons.| |Sollwertgrenzen |
|Min.: 0130Pa| |Min.: 0130Pa| |Min.: 0130Pa| |Min.: 0130Pa|
|Max.: 0460Pa| |Max.: 0460Pa| |Max.: 0460Pa| |Max.: 0460Pa|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only if POC fan regulation is enabled, allows to set parameters for minimum and
maximum air flow set point limits, expressed as air pressure (Pa). Refer to Datatech technical data sheet for
minimum and maximum values of each unit.
In order to get a constant air flow, set the same value for minimum and maximum.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ventil.mandata Gff5| | Supply air fan Gff5| | Vent.de refoul. Gff5| | Vorlaufgebláse Gff5|
|Logica Auto-POC | |Auto-POC | |Auto-POC logique | |Auto-POC Logik |
| | | | | | | |
|Controllo T. ritorno | |Return temp.control | |Contrôle T. retour | |Return temp.control |
|Set point: 24.0C| |Set point: 24.0C| |Point de cons.: 24.0C| |Sollwert: 24.0C|
|Diff.raffreddam.:02.0C| |Cool differ.: 02.0C| |Diff.refroid.: 02.0C| |Diff. Kühlung: 02.0C|
|Diff.riscaldam.: 02.0C| |Heat differ.: 02.0C| |Diff.chauffage: 02.0C| |Diff. Erhitzung: 02.0C|
|Zone neutra: 00.0C| |Neutral zone: 00.0C| |Zone neutre: 00.0C| |Neutr. Bereich: 00.0C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only if POC fan regulation is enabled, allows to set parameters for fan speed control,
with reference to return air temperature.
th
5 row: Set point (read-only value, can be modified on Set Point Menu).
th
6 row: 2.0°C
th
7 row: 2.0°C
th
8 row: 0.0°C

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ventil.mandata Gff6| | Supply air fan Gff6| | Vent.de refoul. Gff6| | Vorlaufgebläse Gff6|
|Logica Auto-POC | |Auto-POC logic | |Auto-POC logique | |Auto-POC Logik |
| | | | | | | |
|Set point di pressione| |Dehum.pressure | |Point de cons.pression| |Sollwert Druck |
|in deumidifica: 130Pa| |set point: 130Pa| |en déshumidif.: 130Pa| |in Entfeuchtung: 130Pa|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if POC fan regulation mode is enabled, allows to set fan speed control parameters
when dehumidification is active. Refer to Datatech technical data sheet for set point value during
dehumidification, for each unit.

103
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ventil.mandata Gff8| | Supply air fan Gff8| | Vent.de refoul. Gff8| | Vorlaufgebläse Gff8|
|Allarme flusso aria | |Air flow alarm | |Alarme flux air | |Alarm Luftdurchsatz |
| | | | | | | |
|Ritado allarme | |Delay alarm | |Retard alarme | |Verzöger. Alarm |
|Avvio: 60s| |Start up: 60s| |Start up: 60s| |Starten: 60s|
|Funzionamento: 5s| |Running: 5s| |Fonctionnement: 5s| |Betrieb: 5s|
|Set point: 50Pa| |Set: 50Pa| |Point de cons.: 50Pa| |Sollwert: 50Pa|
|Diff.: 5Pa| |Diff.: 5Pa| |Diff.: 5Pa| |Diff.: 5Pa|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if POC or PRC fan regulation mode is active, allows to set parameters for air flow
alarm (as picked up by differential pressure transducer), alarm delay at fan startup or during operation, alarm
threshold and reset differential.

8.3.6.7 Gfg. Heating

This menu loop contains the masks for humidity management.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Riscaldamento Gfg2| | Heating Gfg2| | Chauffage Gfg2| | Erhitzung Gfg2|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Set point: 24.0C| |Setpoint 24.0C| |Point de cons.: 24.0C| |Sollwert: 24.0C|
|Zona neutra: 0.2C| |Neutral zone 0.5C| |Zone neutre: 0.2C| |Neutrale Zone: 0.2C|
|Diff.: 02.0C| |Diff. 02.0C| |Diff.: 02.0C| |Diff.: 02.0C|
|Tipo regolaz.: P| |Regulation P| |Type de régul.: P| |Verordnung Typ: P|
|Tempo integrale: 060s| |Integral time: 060s| |Temps intégral: 060s| |Integralzeit: 060s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for heating devices control.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: set point (read-only).
th
5 row: neutral zone (read-only).
th
6 row: differential (read-only).
th
7 row: regulation mode, choose P.
th
8 row: integral time (displayed only if P+I regulation is enabled), default 60 s.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Riscaldamento Gfg3| | Heating Gfg3| | Chauffage Gfg3| | Erhitzung Gfg3|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Valvola modulante | |Post hot gas coil | |Vanne modulante | |Heissgasbatterie |
|batteria Post Hot Gas | |modulating valve | |Batterie de gaz chaude| |Modulationsventil |
|Max.: 10.0V| |Start: 0.0V| |Max.: 10.0V| |Max.: 10.0V|
|Min.: 00.0V| |End: 10.0V| |Min.: 00.0V| |Min.: 00.0V|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set the modulation range for modulating valve of hot gas post heating coil and is
displayed only if this heating device is selected from Manufacturer menu.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
6 row: 0.0%.
th
7 row: 100.0%.

104
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Riscaldamento Gfg4| | Heating Gfg4| | Heating Gfg4| | Erhitzung Gfg4|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Valvola modulante | |Hot water coil | |Hot water coil | |Hot water coil |
|batteria acqua calda | |modulating valve | |modulating valve | |modulating valve |
|Max.: 10.0V| |Max.: 10.0V| |Max.: 10.0V| |Max.: 10.0V|
|Min.: 00.0V| |Min.: 00.0V| |Min.: 00.0V| |Min.: 00.0V|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set the modulation range for modulating valve controlling hot water post heating coil and
is displayed only if this heating device is selected from Manufacturer menu.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
6 row: 0.0V.
th
7 row: 10.0V.

8.3.6.8 Gfh. Humidity control

This menu loop contains the masks for humidity management.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Contr. umidità Gfh1| | Humidity cont. Gfh1| | Contrôle humid. Gfh1| | Feuchtigkeitsst. Gfh1|
|Unit control | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Limitazione deumidif. | |Dehum.limitation | |Limite déshumidif. | |Grenzwert Entfeuchtung|
|Set point temp.ritorno| |Return temp.set point | |Point de c.T.retour | |Sollwert Rücklauftemp.|
|Min.: 10.0C| |Min.: 10.0C| |Min.: 10.0C| |Min.: 10.0C|
|Max.: 30.0C| |Max.: 30.0C| |Max.: 30.0C| |Max.: 30.0C|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set limits for dehumidification limitation set point, in terms of minimum and maximum
return air temperature.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
6 row: 16.0°C.
th
7 row: 30.0°C.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Contr. umidità Gfh2| | Humidity cont. Gfh2| | Contrôle humid. Gfh2| | Feuchtigkeitsst. Gfh2|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Steuerung der Einheit |
| | | | | | | |
|Limitazione deumidif. | |Dehum.limitation | |Limite déshumidif. | |Grenzwert Entfeuchtung|
|Set temp.ritorno:18.0C| |Return temp.set: 18.0C| |Return temp.set: 18.0C| |Wert Rücklauft.: 18.0C|
|Diff.: 06.0C| |Diff.: 06.0C| |Diff.: 06.0C| |Diff.: 06.0C|
|Tipo controllo: P| |Control type: P| |Type de contrôle: P| |Steuerungstyp: P|
|Tempo integrale: 010s| |Integral time: 010s| |Temp intégrale: 010s| |Integral Zeit: 010s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set parameters for dehumidification limitation, in terms of minimum and maximum return
air temperature.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: 18.0°C.
th
6 row: 6.0°C.
th
6 row: P.
th
7 row: 10 s (only if P+I is enabled).

105
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Contr. umidità Gfh5| | Humidity cont. Gfh5| | Contrôle humid. Gfh5| | Feuchtigkeitsst. Gfh5|
|Umidificatore CPY | |CPY humidifier | |Humidificateur CPY | |Luftbefeuchter CPY |
| | | | | | | |
|Parametri avanzati | |Advanced param. | |Paramètres avancés | |Fortgeschr. Parameter |
|b1: 000| |b1: 000| |b1: 000| |b1: 000|
|b2: 000s| |b2: 000s| |b2: 000s| |b2: 000s|
|b4: 0000µS/cm| |b4: 0000µS/cm| |b4: 0000µS/cm| |b4: 0000µS/cm|
|b5: 0000µS/cm| |b5: 0000µS/cm| |b5: 0000µS/cm| |b5: 0000µS/cm|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Contr. umidità Gfh6| | Humidity cont. Gfh6| | Contrôle humid. Gfh6| | Feuchtigkeitsst. Gfh6|
|Umidificatore CPY | |CPY humidifier | |Humidificateur CPY | |Luftbefeuchter CPY |
| | | | | | | |
|Parametri avanzati | |Advanced param. | |Paramètres avancés | |Fortgeschr. Parameter |
|b6: 0000µS/cm| |b6: 0000µS/cm| |b6: 0000µS/cm| |b6: 0000µS/cm|
|b7: 000%| |b7: 000%| |b7: 000%| |b7: 000%|
|b8: 050%| |b8: 050%| |b8: 050%| |b8: 050%|
|b9: 050%| |b9: 050%| |b9: 050%| |b9: 050%|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Contr. umidità Gfh7| | Humidity cont. Gfh7| | Contrôle humid. Gfh7| | Feuchtigkeitsst. Gfh7|
|Umidificatore CPY | |CPY humidifier | |Humidificateur CPY | |Luftbefeuchter CPY |
| | | | | | | |
|Parametri avanzati | |Advanced param. | |Paramètres avancés | |Fortgeschr. Parameter |
|bb: 0000h| |bb: 0000h| |bb: 0000h| |bb: 0000h|
|bE: 000h| |bE: 000h| |bE: 000h| |bE: 000h|
|bF: 000gg| |bF: 000gg| |bF: 000gg| |bF: 000gg|
|C8 Rit.Al.Ser.: 000.0s| |C8 Ser.Al.Delay:000.0s| |C8 Ser.Al.Delay:000.0s| |C8 Ser.Al.Delay:000.0s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
The above series of masks, displayed only if CPY humidifier control board is enabled, allows to set
parameters for humidifier control (for further information refer to CPY manual); default parameters are
automatically loaded once the CPY board is configured and the humidifier model is set:
b1: optional function (0 = no optional function enabled)
b2: off delay time
b4: override conductivity of the water (0= automatic measurement; >0 = conductivity forced by b4 parameter)
inactivity has been disabled, 8 set for b1)
b5: conductivity pre-alarm threshold
b6: conductivity alarm threshold
b7: foam control threshold (0= no foam detection; 1= max. foam detection sensitivity; 100= min. foam
detection sensitivity)
b8: conductivity control inside the cylinder in steady operation compared to rated value (less than 100%: the
conductivity increases)
b9: adjust duration of the drain to dilute cycle
bb: cylinder maintenance limit time (in hours), reported also in the hour counter threshold menu
bE: time limit between two periodical drain cycles (available only if the periodical drain is enabled, 64 set for
b1)
bF: days delay for drain due to inactivity (not available if the drain due to
inactivity has been disabled)
C8: maximum lack-of-data time on RS485 communication line (stops steam production and triggers an
alarm).

106
8.3.6.9 Gfi. Advanced
This menu loop contains the masks for advanced settings parameters, such as data logger erasing and
Service password change.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Avanzato Gfi1| | Advanced Gfi1| | Avancés Gfi1| | Fortgeschritten Gfi1|
| | | | | | | |
| Pulisci lo | | Clear data | | Effacer historique| | Alarmhistorie |
| storico dati: NO| | logger: NO| | alarmes: NO| | löschen: N|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to clear alarm data logger.

WARNING!
This operation will erase all alarms stored in the data logger and it will not be
possible to restore them anymore.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Avanzato Gfi2| | Advanced Gfi2| | Avancés Gfi2| | Fortgeschritten Gfi2|
| | | | | | | |
| Modifica | | Change | | Changer | | Wechseln |
| password | | service | | service | | Service |
| service | | password | | mot de passe | | Passwort |
| | | | | | | |
|Inserire nuova | |Insert new | |Saisir nouveau mot | |Neues Password |
|password (PW1): 0000| |password (PW1): 0000| |de passe (PW1): 0004| |Eing. (PW1): 0004|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to change Service password.

8.3.7 Gg. Manual management

This menu loop contains all masks for unit devices manual management, that can be used both on factory
testing and when servicing the unit.

WARNING!
Manual management of unit devices may cause serious damages to unit
components and to people, if improperly used. Be very careful to adopt all safety
measures in order to avoid any danger.

WARNING!
Manual management of unit devices can be done when unit is in OFF status.
Always be sure to deactivate any manual management before turning ON the unit.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione manuale Gg1| | Manual mng. Gg1| | Gestion man. Gg1| | Manuelle Verw. Gg1|
| | | | | | | |
|Ventilatore mandata | |Supply fans | |Ventilat. de refoul. | |Vorlaufgebláse |
|Vel.: AUTO Manuale □ | |Speed:AUTO Manual □ | |Vites.:AUTO Manuel □ | |Gesch.:AUTO Manuell □ |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only if ANALOG EC fans are enabled, allows to manually force the speed of unit supply air
fans; first set the desired fan speed percentage, then enable manual running by checking the box.

107
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg3| | Manual mng. Gg3| | Gestion man. Gg3| | Manuelle Verw. Gg3|
| | | | | | | |
|Circuito 1 | |Circuit 1 | |Circuit 1 | |Kreislauf 1 |
|BLDC: AUTO Manuale □ | |BLDC: AUTO Manual □ | |BLDC: AUTO Manuel □ | |BLDC: AUTO Manuell □ |
|Fix.: AUTO | |Fix.: AUTO | |Fix.: AUTO | |Fix.: AUTO |
|Circuito 2 | |Circuit 2 | |Circuit 2 | |Kreislauf 2 |
|Fix.1: AUTO | |Fix.1: AUTO | |Fix.1: AUTO | |Fix.1: AUTO |
|Fix.2: AUTO | |Fix.2: AUTO | |Fix.2: AUTO | |Fix.2: AUTO |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for ED units, allows to manually force the unit compressors for circuits 1 and 2:
• For BLDC compressors, first set the desired fan speed percentage, then enable manual running by
checking the box;
• For Fixed compressors, choose MAN.ON to enable manual running and MAN.OFF to manual turn it
off.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione manuale Gg4| | Manual mng. Gg4| | Gestion man. Gg4| | Manuelle Verw. Gg4|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Ventilatori cond. | |Condensation fans | |Ventilateurs cond. | |Gebláse Verflõss. |
|Ven.1:AUTO Manuale □ | |Fan1: AUTO Manual □ | |Ven.1:AUTO Manuel □ | |Ver.1:AUTO Manuell □|
|Ven.2:AUTO Manuale □ | |Fan2: AUTO Manual □ | |Ven.2:AUTO Manuel □ | |Ver.2:AUTO Manuell □|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for ED units with air condensing, allows to manually force the condensation fans of
circuits 1 and 2; first set the desired fan speed percentage, then enable manual running by checking the box.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione manuale Gg5| | Manual mng. Gg5| | Gestion man. Gg5| | Manuelle Verw. Gg5|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Valvola condens.acqua | |Water cond.valve | |Vanne condens. eau | |Ventil Wasserverfl. |
|Aper.:AUTO Manuale □ | |Open: AUTO Manual □ | |Over.:AUTO Manuel □ | |Öffn.:AUTO Manuell □ |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for ED units with water condensing, allows to manually force the water condensing
valve; first set the desired opening percentage, then enable manual running by checking the box.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione manuale Gg6| | Manual mng. Gg6| | Gestion man. Gg6| | Manuelle Verw. Gg6|
| | | | | | | |
|Valvola EVD circ.1 | |Valve EVD circ.1 | |Vanne EVD circ.1 | |Ventil EVD Kreislauf 1|
|Pos.:000Steps Man. □| |Pos.:000Steps Manual □| |Pos.:000Pas Manual □| |Pos.:000Schr. Man. □|
| 000.0% 000Steps| | 000.0% 000Steps| | 000.0% 000Pas | | 000.0% 000Schr.|
|Valvola EVD circ.2 | |Valve EVD circ.2 | |Vanne EVD circ.2 | |Ventil EVD Kreislauf 2|
|Pos.:000Steps Man. | |Pos.:000Steps Manual □| |Pos.:000Pas Manual | |Pos.:000Schr. Man. |
| 000.0% 000Steps| | 000.0% 000Steps| | 000.0% 000Pas | | 000.0% 000Schr.|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for ED units with EEV, allows to manually force the EEV opening for circuits 1 and 2;
first set the desired valve opening (in steps), then enable manual running by checking the box. Valve opening
in percentage is a read only parameter.

108
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg7| | Manual mng. Gg7| | Gestion man. Gg7| | Manuelle Verw. Gg7|
| | | | | | | |
|Valvola modulante | |Post hot gas coil | |Batt.de gaz chaud | |Heissgasschrauben |
|batteria Post Hot Gas | |modulating valve | |vanne modulante | |Modulationsventil |
|Aper.:AUTO Manuale | |Open: AUTO Manual | |Open: AUTO Manual | |Öffn.:AUTO Manuell |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for units with hot gas heating coil and modulating valve, allows to manually manage
the opening of the valve.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione manuale Gg8| | Manual mng. Gg8| | Gestion man. Gg8| | Manuelle Verw. Gg8|
| | | | | | | |
|Valvola modulante | |Hot water coil | |Batt.eau chaude | |Warmwasserbatterie |
|batteria acqua calda | |modulating valve | |vanne modulante | |Modulationsventil |
|Aper.:AUTO Manuale | |Open: AUTO Manual | |Over.:AUTO Manuel | |Öffn.:AUTO Manuell |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for units with hot water heating coil and modulating valve, allows to manually mamage
the opening of the valve.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione manuale Gg9| | Manual mng. Gg9| | Gestion man. Gg9| | Manuelle Verw. Gg9|
| | | | | | | |
|Resistenza modulante | |Modulating heater | |Résistance modulée | |Modulierende Heizung |
|Aper.:AUTO Manuale | |Open: AUTO Manual | |Over.:AUTO Manuel | |Öffn.:AUTO Manuell |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for units with modulating electrical heaters, allows to manually manage the heating
power.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione manuale Gg10| | Manual mng. Gg10| | Gestion man. Gg10| | Manuelle Verw. Gg10|
| | | | | | | |
|Resistenze digitali | |Digital heaters | |Résistances numérique | |Digital-Heizung |
|Restenza 1: AUTO| |Heater 1: AUTO| |Résistance 1: AUTO| |Heizung 1: AUTO|
|Resistenza 2: AUTO| |Heater 2: AUTO| |Résistance 2: AUTO| |Heizung 2: AUTO|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for units with step controlled electrical heaters, allows to manually activate the
heaters.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione manuale Gg11| | Manual mng. Gg11| | Gestion man. Gg11| | Manuelle Verw. Gg11|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Avvia prelavaggio: □ | |Start pre-cleaning: □ | |Lancer pré-nettoyage:□| |Starten Vorreinigung:□|
| | | | | | | |
|Scarico manuale: | |Manual Drain: | |Purge manuelle: | |Manuelles Ablass: |
| DISABILITATO| | DO NOT DRAIN| | DO NOT DRAIN| | DO NOT DRAIN|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for units with integrated humidifier and CPY control card, allows to manually manage
the humidifier connected to CPY card. It is possible to launch a pre-wash cycle and manually flush the
cylinder.

109
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Manual mng. Gg12| | Manual mng. Gg12| | Gestion man. Gg12| | Manuelle Verw. Gg12|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Dry cooler | |Dry cooler | |Dry cooler | |Dry cooler |
| AUTO | | AUTO | | AUTO | | AUTO |
|Pompa:AUTO Manuale | |Pump: AUTO Manual | |Pompe:AUTO Manuel | |Pumpe:AUTO Manuell |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for units in which the drycooler control is enabled, allows to force manually the fans
and the drycooler pump.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione manuale Gg13| | Manual mng. Gg13| | Gestion man. Gg13| | Manuelle Verw. Gg13|
| | | | | | | |
|Valvola digitale Post | |Post Hot Gas digital | |Vanne numeriqué de | |Beitrag Heissgasdigit.|
|Hot Gas: AUTO| |valve: AUTO| |Post gaz chaud: AUTO| |Ventil: AUTO|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only for units with hot water heating coil and on/off valve, allows to manually open the
valve.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione manuale Gg20| | Manual mng. Gg20| | Gestion man. Gg20| | Manuelle Verw. Gg20|
|Test I/O | |I/O Test | |Test E/S | |Test I/O |
| | | | | | | |
|Ab. test I/O: □ | |En. I/O Test: □ | |Activ. test E/S: □ | |Akt. Test I/O □ |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enable I/O testing procedure, by ticking the box.

110
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg21| | Manual mng. Gg21| | Gestion man. Gg21| | Manuelle Verw. Gg21|
|Test I/O | |I/O Test | |Test E/S | |Test I/O |
|Test ingres.digitali | |Digital inputs test | |Test entrées numér. | |Test Digitaleingánge |
|ID1:OPEN ID6:OPEN | |ID1:OPEN ID6:OPEN | |ID1:OPEN ID6:OPEN | |ID1:OPEN ID6:OPEN |
|ID2:OPEN ID7:OPEN | |ID2:OPEN ID7:OPEN | |ID2:OPEN ID7:OPEN | |ID2:OPEN ID7:OPEN |
|ID3:OPEN ID8:OPEN | |ID3:OPEN ID8:OPEN | |ID3:OPEN ID8:OPEN | |ID3:OPEN ID8:OPEN |
|ID4:OPEN | |ID4:OPEN | |ID4:OPEN | |ID4:OPEN |
|ID5:OPEN | |ID5:OPEN | |ID5:OPEN | |ID5:OPEN |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg22| | Manual mng. Gg22| | Gestion man. Gg22| | Manuelle Verw. Gg22|
|Test I/O | |I/O Test | |Test E/S | |Test I/O |
|Test ingres.digitali | |Digital inputs test | |Test entrées numér. | |Test Digitaleingánge |
|ID9: OPEN ID14:OPEN | |ID9: OPEN ID14:OPEN | |ID9: OPEN ID14:OPEN | |ID9: OPEN ID14:OPEN |
|ID10:OPEN | |ID10:OPEN | |ID10:OPEN | |ID10:OPEN |
|ID11:OPEN | |ID11:OPEN | |ID11:OPEN | |ID11:OPEN |
|ID12:OPEN | |ID12:OPEN | |ID12:OPEN | |ID12:OPEN |
|ID13:OPEN | |ID13:OPEN | |ID13:OPEN | |ID13:OPEN |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg23| | Manual mng. Gg23| | Gestion man. Gg23| | Manuelle Verw. Gg23|
|Test I/O | |I/O Test | |Test E/S | |Test I/O |
|Test ingres.digitali | |Digital inputs test | |Test entrées numér. | |Test Digitaleingánge |
|ID15:OPEN | |ID15:OPEN | |ID15:OPEN | |ID15:OPEN |
|ID16:OPEN | |ID16:OPEN | |ID16:OPEN | |ID16:OPEN |
|ID17:OPEN | |ID17:OPEN | |ID17:OPEN | |ID17:OPEN |
|ID18:OPEN | |ID18:OPEN | |ID18:OPEN | |ID18:OPEN |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg24| | Manual mng. Gg24| | Gestion man. Gg24| | Manuelle Verw. Gg24|
|Test I/O | |I/O Test | |Test E/S | |Test I/O |
|Test ingres.analogici | |Analog inputs test | |Test entrées analog. | |Test Analogeingánge |
|U1:0000 U6:0000 | |U1:0000 U6:0000 | |U1:0000 U6:0000 | |U1:0000 U6:0000 |
|U2:0000 U7:0000 | |U2:0000 U7:0000 | |U2:0000 U7:0000 | |U2:0000 U7:0000 |
|U3:0000 U8:0000 | |U3:0000 U8:0000 | |U3:0000 U8:0000 | |U3:0000 U8:0000 |
|U4:0000 U9:0000 | |U4:0000 U9:0000 | |U4:0000 U9:0000 | |U4:0000 U9:0000 |
|U5:0000 U10:0000 | |U5:0000 U10:0000 | |U5:0000 U10:0000 | |U5:0000 U10:0000 |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg25| | Manual mng. Gg25| | Gestion man. Gg25| | Manuelle Verw. Gg25|
|Test I/O | |I/O Test | |Test E/S | |Test I/O |
|Test uscite digitali | |Digital outputs test | |Test sorties numér. | |Test Digitalausgánge |
|NO1:OPEN NO6:OPEN | |NO1:OPEN NO6:OPEN | |NO1:OPEN NO6:OPEN | |NO1:OPEN NO6:OPEN |
|NO2:OPEN NO7:OPEN | |NO2:OPEN NO7:OPEN | |NO2:OPEN NO7:OPEN | |NO2:OPEN NO7:OPEN |
|NO3:OPEN NO8:OPEN | |NO3:OPEN NO8:OPEN | |NO3:OPEN NO8:OPEN | |NO3:OPEN NO8:OPEN |
|NO4:OPEN | |NO4:OPEN | |NO4:OPEN | |NO4:OPEN |
|NO5:OPEN | |NO5:OPEN | |NO5:OPEN | |NO5:OPEN |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg26| | Manual mng. Gg26| | Gestion man. Gg26| | Manuelle Verw. Gg26|
|Test I/O | |I/O Test | |Test E/S | |Test I/O |
|Test uscite digitali | |Digital outputs test | |Test sorties numér. | |Test Digitalausgánge |
|NO9:OPEN | |NO9:OPEN | |NO9:OPEN | |NO9:OPEN |
|NO10:OPEN | |NO10:OPEN | |NO10:OPEN | |NO10:OPEN |
|NO11:OPEN | |NO11:OPEN | |NO11:OPEN | |NO11:OPEN |
|NO12:OPEN | |NO12:OPEN | |NO12:OPEN | |NO12:OPEN |
|NO13:OPEN | |NO13:OPEN | |NO13:OPEN | |NO13:OPEN |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

111
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg27| | Manual mng. Gg27| | Gestion man. Gg27| | Manuelle Verw. Gg27|
|Test I/O | |I/O Test | |Test E/S | |Test I/O |
|Test uscite digitali | |Digital outputs test | |Test sorties numér. | |Test Digitalausgánge |
|NO14:OPEN | |NO14:OPEN | |NO14:OPEN | |NO14:OPEN |
|NO15:OPEN | |NO15:OPEN | |NO15:OPEN | |NO15:OPEN |
|NO16:OPEN | |NO16:OPEN | |NO16:OPEN | |NO16:OPEN |
|NO17:OPEN | |NO17:OPEN | |NO17:OPEN | |NO17:OPEN |
|NO18:OPEN | |NO18:OPEN | |NO18:OPEN | |NO18:OPEN |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg28| | Manual mng. Gg28| | Gestion man. Gg28| | Manuelle Verw. Gg28|
|Test I/O | |I/O Test | |Test E/S | |Test I/O |
|Test uscite analogiche| |Analog outputs test | |Test sorties analog. | |Test Analogausgánge |
|AO1:000.0% | |AO1:000.0% | |AO1:000.0% | |AO1:000.0% |
|AO2:000.0% | |AO2:000.0% | |AO2:000.0% | |AO2:000.0% |
|AO3:000.0% | |AO3:000.0% | |AO3:000.0% | |AO3:000.0% |
|AO4:000.0% | |AO4:000.0% | |AO4:000.0% | |AO4:000.0% |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione manuale Gg29| | Manual mng. Gg29| | Gestion man. Gg29| | Manuelle Verw. Gg29|
|I/O Test | |I/O Test | |Test E/S | |Test I/O |
|Test uscite analogiche| |Analog outputs test | |Test sorties analog. | |Test Analogausgánge |
|AO5:000.0% | |AO5:000.0% | |AO5:000.0% | |AO5:000.0% |
|AO6:000.0% | |AO6:000.0% | |AO6:000.0% | |AO6:000.0% |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
The above masks allow to test the digital inputs, analogue inputs, digital outputs, analogue outputs.

112
8.4 F. User Menu
The User menu can be accessed from the main menu and is password-protected; from this menu, all
parameters regarding unit working, Datalink p-LAN local network and alarm management can be set.
The complete User menu tree is the following:

F. User
a. Thermoregulation
b. Supply air fan
c. Alarm management
d. Datalink
e. Advanced settings

A password is required to enter User menu:

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
|Menù utente | |User password | |Menu utilisateur | |Menü Anwender |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Inserire password | |Insert user | |Saisir mot de passe | |Password eingeben |
|utente (PW3): 0000| |password(PW3): 0000| |utilisat. (PW3): 0000| |Anwender (PW3): 0000|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
The default User password is 0300.

8.4.1 Fa. Thermoregulation

This menu loop contains all masks for setting thermoregulation parameters.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Fa1| | Thermoreg. Fa1| | Thermorégulat. Fa1| | Temperaturreg. Fa1|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle de l'unité | |Gerätesteuerung |
| | | | | | | |
|Termoreg.su: | |Thermoregulation on: | |Thermorégulation sur: | |Thermoregulierung auf:|
|TEMP.ARIA RITORNO | |AIR RETURN TEMP. | |TEMP.AIR RETOUR | |RÜCKLAUFTEMP. |
| | | | | | | |
|Reg.ventilatori su: | |Fans regulation on: | |Fans régulation sur: | |Lõfter Verord.õber: |
|TEMP.ARIA RITORNO | |AIR RETURN TEMP. | |TEMP.AIR RETOUR | |RÜCKLAUFTEMP. |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to choose the probe for unit thermoregulation: air return temperature or air supply
temperature. Depending on this choice, different set points, differentials, dead zones and limits will be
considered and different masks will be displayed.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: AIR RETURN TEMP.

Note that:
• Only thermoregulation can be set on air return temperature or on air supply temperature, while fans
regulation will always refer to air return temperature; for example, this means that when
thermoregulation on air supply temperature is active, compressors will be controlled with reference
to air supply temperature set point, while fans will be controlled with reference to air return
temperature set point and 2 different set points will be displayed in the Setpoint menu;
• Thermoregulation on air supply temperature makes sense only with modulating cooling and heating
devices, such as variable speed compressors, hot water coil with modulating valve, etc., because a
precise control of air supply temperature can be achieved only with modulating devices.

113
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Termoreg. Fa2| | Thermoreg. Fa2| | Thermorégulat. Fa2| | Temperaturreg. Fa2|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle de l'unité | |Ger¼testeuerung |
| | | | | | | |
|Return reg. | |Return reg. | |Retour reg. | |Rückgabelregelung |
|Limiti temperatura per| |Temperature limits for| |Limites de temp.pour | |Temperaturgrenzen fõr |
|set point reg.unità | |unit reg. set point | |reg. Point de consigne| |Werkregelung Sollwert |
|Min.: 14.0C| |Min.: 14.0C| |Min.: 14.0C| |Min.: 14.0C|
|Max.: 30.0C| |Max.: 30.0C| |Max.: 30.0C| |Max.: 30.0C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only when thermoregulation on air return temperature is active, allows to set minimum
and maximum limits for return temperature set point.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
7 row: 14.0°C.
th
8 row: 30.0°C.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Fa3| | Thermoreg. Fa3| | Thermorégulat. Fa3| | Temperaturreg. Fa3|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle de l'unité | |Gerätesteuerung |
| | | | | | | |
|Regol.ritorno | |Return regulation | |Régulation de retour | |Rückgaberegelung |
|Set point: 24.0C| |Setpoint: 24.0C| |Point de cons.: 24.0C| |Sollwert: 24.0C|
|Diff.: 02.0C| |Band: 02.0C| |Bande: 02.0C| |Band: 02.0C|
|Zona neutra: 0.2C| |Neutral zone: 0.2C| |Zone neutre: 0.2C| |Neutr. Bereich: 0.2C|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only when thermoregulation on return air temperature is active, allows to set band and
dead band for return air temperature thermoregulation.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: return air temperature set point (read only, the set point can be modified from Setpoint menu).
th
6 row: 2.0°C.
th
7 row: 0.5°C.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Fa4| | Thermoreg. Fa4| | Thermorégulat. Fa4| | Temperaturreg. Fa4|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle de l'unité | |Gerätesteuerung |
| | | | | | | |
|Regol.mandata | |Supply regulation | |Régulation dé approv. | |Versorgungsreg. |
|Set point: 18.0C| |Set point: 18.0C| |Point de cons.: 18.0C| |Sollwert: 18.0C|
|Diff.: 05.0C| |Band: 05.0C| |Bande: 05.0C| |Band: 05.0C|
|Zona neutra: 0.2C| |Neutral zone: 0.2C| |Zone neutre: 0.2C| |Neutr. Bereich: 0.2C|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only when thermoregulation on air supply air temperature is active, allows to set band
and dead band for supply air temperature thermoregulation.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: supply air temperature set point (read only, the set point can be modified from Setpoint menu).
th
6 row: 5.0°C.
th
7 row: 0.5°C.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Fa5| | Thermoreg. Fa5| | Thermorégulat. Fa5| | Temperaturreg. Fa5|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle de l'unité | |Gerätesteuerung |
| | | | | | | |
|Abil.funz.limitaz. | |Enable func.to limit | |Activ.fonction lim. | |Enable-Funkt.um die |
|temp.aria mandata | |supply air temp. | |temp.air alimentation | |Zulufttemp.zu begr. |
|Control mode: P| |Control mode: P| |Control mode: P| |Control mode: P|
|Limits for set point | |Limits for set point | |Limits for set point | |Limits for set point |
|Min.:10.0 Max.:30.0 | |Min.:10.0 Max.:30.0 | |Min.:10.0 Max.:30.0 | |Min.:10.0 Max.:30.0 |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only when thermoregulation on air return air temperature is active, allows to enable the
function to limit supply air temperature while thermoregulation on return air temperature is active and to set
control mode and limits for the set point of this function. Default parameters are as follow:
th
6 row: function control mode, set P.
th
8 row: min 10.0°C and max 30.0°C.

114
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Termoreg. Fa6| | Thermoreg. Fa6| | Thermoreg. Fa6| | Temperaturreg. Fa6|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Unit control | |Gerätesteuerung |
| | | | | | | |
|Limite temp.aria mand.| |Supply air temp.limit | |Supply air temp.limit | |Zuluft-Temperaturgr. |
|Set point: 14.0 | |Set point: 14.0 | |Set point: 14.0 | |Sollwert: 14.0 |
|Diff.: 02.0 | |Diff.: 02.0 | |Diff.: 02.0 | |Diff.: 02.0 |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only when thermoregulation on air return air temperature is active, allows to configure
set point and differential for the function to limit supply air temperature while thermoregulation on return air
temperature is active.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: 14.0°C.
th
6 row: 2.0°C.
th
8 row: shown only when P+I control mode is set on mask Fa5, 60 s.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Fa7| | Thermoreg. Fa7| | Thermorégulat. Fa7| | Temperaturreg. Fa7|
| | | | | | | |
|Al.temp.mandata aria | |Supply temp.alarms | |Alarmes temp.air | |Zuluft-Temperatural. |
|Bassa temp.: 15.0C| |Low temp.: 15.0C| |Basse temp.: 15.0C| |Niedr.Temp.: 15.0C|
|Alta temp.: 35.0C| |High temp.: 35.0C| |Elévée temp.: 35.0C| |Hochtemp.: 35.0C|
|Rit.all.: 015s| |Alarm delay: 015s| |Retard alarme: 015s| |Alarmverzög.: 015s|
| | | | | | | |
|Abilita allarme □ | |Enable alarm □ | |Activier alarme □ | |Alarm aktiv. □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enable low and high supply air temperature alarm, to set thresholds and delay for it.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: 12.0°C.
th
5 row: 24.0°C.
th
6 row: 15 s.
th
8 row: enable.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Fa8| | Thermoreg. Fa8| | Thermorégulat. Fa8| | Temperaturreg. Fa8|
| | | | | | | |
|Al.temp.ritorno aria | |Return temp.alarms | |Alarmes temp.retour | |Rücklauftemperatural. |
|Bassa temp.: 15.0C| |Low temp.: 15.0C| |Basse temp.: 15.0C| |Niedr.Temp.: 15.0C|
|Alta temp.: 30.0C| |High temp.: 30.0C| |Elévée temp.: 30.0C| |Hochtemp.: 30.0C|
|Rit.all.: 015s| |Alarm delay: 015s| |Retard alarme: 015s| |Alarmverzög.: 015s|
| | | | | | | |
|Abilita allarme □ | |Enable alarm □ | |Activier alarme □ | |Alarm aktiv. □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enable low and high return air temperature alarm, to set thresholds and delay for it.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: 15.0°C.
th
5 row: 30.0°C.
th
6 row: 15 s.
th
8 row: enable.

115
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Termoreg. Fa9| | Humidity cont. Fa9| | Thermorégulat. Fa9| | Temperaturreg. Fa9|
|Controllo unità | |Unit control | |Contrôle unité | |Gerätesteuerung |
| | | | | | | |
|Controllo umidità | |Humidity control | |Contrôle umidité | |Feuchteregelung |
|UMID.RELATIVA (%rH) | |RELATIVE HUMID. (%rH) | |HUMID.RELATIVE (%rH) | |RELATIV FEUCHT. (%rH)|
|Limiti set point | |Set point limits | |Point de consigne lim.| |Sollwert limits |
|Min.: 40.0%rH| |Min.: 40.0%rH| |Min.: 40.0%rH| |Min.: 40.0%rH|
|Max.: 60.0%rH| |Max.: 60.0%rH| |Max.: 60.0%rH| |Max.: 60.0%rH|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when humidity control is active, allows to choose whether humidity control has to be
referred to relative humidity (%rH) or to absolute humidity (g/kg) and to set limits for humidity set point.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: RELATIVE HUMIDITY (%rH).
th
7 row: 40.0%.
th
8 row: 60.0%.
If humidity control on absolute humidity is required, unless different information written on MAC set
parameters as follow:
th
5 row: ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY (g/kg).
th
7 row: 5.0 g/kg.
th
8 row: 30.0 g/kg.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Fa10| | Humidity cont. Fa10| | Thermorégulat. Fa10| | Temperaturreg. Fa10|
|Deumidifica | |Dehumidification | |Déshumidification | |Entfeuchtung |
| | | | | | | |
|Set point: 50.0%rH| |Setpoint: 50.0%rH| |Point de c.: 50.0%rH| |Sollwert: 50.0%rH|
|Zona neutra: 0.5%rH| |Neutral zone: 0.5%rH| |Neutral zone: 0.5%rH| |Neutral zone: 0.5%rH|
|Diff.: 5.0%rH| |Diff.: 5.0%rH| |Diff.: 5.0%rH| |Diff.: 5.0%rH|
|Regolazione: P| |Regulation: P| |Réglement P| |Verordnung: P|
|Tempo integrale: 060s| |Integral time: 060s| |Integral time: 060s| |Integral time: 060s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Termoreg. Fa10| | Humidity cont. Fa10| | Thermorégulat. Fa10| | Temperaturreg. Fa10|
|Deumidifica | |Dehumidification | |Déshumidification | |Entfeuchtung |
| | | | | | | |
|Set point: 9.3g/Kg| |Setpoint: 9.3g/Kg| |Point de c.: 9.3g/Kg| |Sollwert: 9.3g/Kg|
|Zona neutra: 0.1g/Kg| |Neutral zone: 0.1g/Kg| |Neutral zone: 0.1g/Kg| |Neutral zone: 0.1g/Kg|
|Diff.: 1.0g/Kg| |Diff.: 1.0g/Kg| |Diff.: 1.0g/Kg| |Diff.: 1.0g/Kg|
|Regolazione: P| |Regulation: P| |Réglement P| |Verordnung: P|
|Tempo integrale: 060s| |Integral time: 060s| |Integral time: 060s| |Integral time: 060s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when humidity control is active, allows to set parameters for humidity control;
parameters are different depending on humidity control mode selected from User menu.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: set point is read only (it can be set from Setpoint menu).
th
5 row: 0.5% if humidity control on relative humidity is active, 0.1 g/kg if humidity control on absolute humidity
is active.
th
6 row: 5.0% if humidity control on relative humidity is active, 1.0 g/kg if humidity control on absolute humidity
is active.
th
7 row: P.
th
8 row: 60 s.

116
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Termoreg. Fa11| | Termoreg. Fa11| | Thermorégulat. Fa11| | Temperaturreg. Fa11|
|Umidificazione | |Humidification | |Humidification | |Befeuchtung |
| | | | | | | |
|Setpoint: 50.0%rH| |Setpoint: 50.0%rH| |Point de c.: 50.0%rH| |Sollwert: 50.0%rH|
|Banda: 5.0%rH| |Band: 5.0%rH| |Bande: 5.0%rH| |Diff.: 5.0%rH|
| | | | | | | |
|Produzione vapore | |Steam production | |Product.de vapeur | |Dampfproduktion |
|limite 100.0%| |limit 100.0%| |limite 100.0%| |Grenze 100.0%|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Termoreg. Fa11| | Termoreg. Fa11| | Thermorégulat. Fa11| | Temperaturreg. Fa11|
|Umidificazione | |Humidification | |Humidification | |Befeuchtung |
| | | | | | | |
|Setpoint: 9.3g/Kg| |Setpoint: 9.3g/Kg| |Setpoint: 15.0g/Kg| |Sollwert: 15.0g/Kg|
|Banda: 1.0g/Kg | |Band: 1.0g/Kg| |Band: 10.0g/Kg| |Diff.: 10.0g/Kg|
| | | | | | | |
|Produzione vapore | |Steam production | |Product.de vapeur | |Dampfproduktion |
|limite 100.0%| |limit 100.0%| |limite 100.0%| |Grenze 100.0%|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when humidifier is enabled, allows to set maximum steam production limit of
humidifier, both for embedded humidifier (controlled by CPY board) and for external humidifier (controlled by
analogue input).
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: (read only) set point - can be set on Setpoint Menu
th
5 row: 5.0% if the relative humidity control is active; 1.0g/kg if the absolute humidity control is active
th
8 row: 100.0%.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Termoreg. Fa12| | Termoreg. Fa12| | Thermorégulat. Fa12| | Temperaturreg. Fa12|
| | | | | | | |
|Allarmi umidità | |Humidity alarms | |Alarmes humidité | |Luftfeuchtig.Alarme |
|Bassa umidità: 30.0%rH| |Low hum.: 30.0%rH| |Low hum.: 30.0%rH| |Niedr.Luftf.: 30.0%rH|
|Alta umidità: 60.0%rH| |High hum.: 60.0%rH| |High hum.: 60.0%rH| |Hohr Luftf.: 60.0%rH|
|Rit.allarme: 15s| |Alarm delay: 15s| |Retard alarme: 15s| |Alarmverzög.: 15s|
| | | | | | | |
|Abilita allarme □ | |Enable alarm □ | |Activer alarme □ | |Alarm aktivieren □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Termoreg. Fa12| | Termoreg. Fa12| | Thermorégulat. Fa12| | Temperaturreg. Fa12|
| | | | | | | |
|Allarmi umidità | |Humidity alarms | |Alarmes humidité | |Luftfeuchtig.Alarme |
|Bassa umidità: 5.0g/kg| |Low hum.: 5.0g/kg| |Low hum.: 5.0g/kg| |Niedr.Luftf.: 5.0g/kg|
|Alta umidità: 15.0g/kg| |High hum.: 15.0g/kg| |High hum.: 15.0g/kg| |Hohr Luftf.: 15.0g/kg|
|Rit.allarme: 15s| |Alarm delay: 15s| |Retard alarme: 15s| |Alarmverzög.: 15s|
| | | | | | | |
|Abilita allarme □ | |Enable alarm □ | |Activer alarme □ | |Alarm aktivieren □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when humidity control is active, allows to enable low and high humidity alarms and to
set their parameters.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: 30.0% if humidity control on relative humidity is active, 5.0 g/kg if humidity control on absolute
humidity is active.
th
5 row: 60.0% if humidity control on relative humidity is active, 15.0 g/kg if humidity control on absolute
humidity is active.
th
6 row: 15 s.
th
8 row: enable.

117
8.4.2 Fb. Supply air fan
This menu loop is currently empty.

8.4.3 Fc. Alarm management

This menu loop contains all masks for unit alarm management and allows to configure each alarm as non-
serious or serious and to configure programmable alarms (only for Large control boards).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione allarmi Fc1| | Alarm management Fc1| |Gestion alarmes Fc1| |Alarmverwaltung Fc1|
|Config.relè allarmi | |Config.alarm relay | |Config.relais d’alarme| |Konfig.Alarmrelais |
| | | | | | | |
|Selez.allarmi GRAVI | |Select SERIOUS alarms | |Sélect alarmes GRAVES | |Wählen SCHWEREN Alarme|
|1 5 6 10| |1 5 6 10| |1 5 6 10| |1 5 6 10|
| □ □ □ | | □ □ □ | | □ □ □ | | □ □ □ |
|11 15 16 20| |11 15 16 20| |11 15 16 20| |11 15 16 20|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione allarmi Fc2| | Alarm management Fc2| |Gestion alarmes Fc2| |Alarmverwaltung Fc2|
|Config.relè allarmi | |Config.alarm relay | |Config.relais d’alarme| |Konfig.Alarmrelais |
| | | | | | | |
|Selez.allarmi GRAVI | |Select SERIOUS alarms | |Sélect alarmes GRAVES | |Wählen SCHWEREN Alarme|
|21 25 26 30| |21 25 26 30| |21 25 26 30| |21 25 26 30|
| □ □ | | □ □ | | □ □ | | □ □ |
|31 35 36 40| |31 35 36 40| |31 35 36 40| |31 35 36 40|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione allarmi Fc3| | Alarm management Fc3| |Gestion alarmes Fc3| |Alarmverwaltung Fc3|
|Config.relè allarmi | |Config.alarm relay | |Config.relais d’alarme| |Konfig.Alarmrelais |
| | | | | | | |
|Selez.allarmi GRAVI | |Select SERIOUS alarms | |Sélect alarmes GRAVES | |Wählen SCHWEREN Alarme|
|41 45 46 50| |41 45 46 50| |41 45 46 50| |41 45 46 50|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ |
|51 55 56 60| |51 55 56 60| |51 55 56 60| |51 55 56 60|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione allarmi Fc4| | Alarm management Fc4| |Gestion alarmes Fc4| |Alarmverwaltung Fc4|
|Config.relè allarmi | |Config.alarm relay | |Config.relais d’alarme| |Konfig.Alarmrelais |
| | | | | | | |
|Selez.allarmi GRAVI | |Select SERIOUS alarms | |Sélect alarmes GRAVES | |Wählen SCHWEREN Alarme|
|61 65 66 70| |61 65 66 70| |61 65 66 70| |61 65 66 70|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ |
|71 75 76 80| |71 75 76 80| |71 75 76 80| |71 75 76 80|
|□ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione allarmi Fc5| | Alarm management Fc5| |Gestion alarmes Fc5| |Alarmverwaltung Fc5|
|Config.relè allarmi | |Config.alarm relay | |Config.relais d’alarme| |Konfig.Alarmrelais |
| | | | | | | |
|Selez.allarmi GRAVI | |Select SERIOUS alarms | |Sélect alarmes GRAVES | |Wählen SCHWEREN Alarme|
|81 85 86 90| |81 85 86 90| |81 85 86 90| |81 85 86 90|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ |
|91 95 96 100| |91 95 96 100| |91 95 96 100| |91 95 96 100|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

118
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione allarmi Fc6| | Alarm management Fc6| |Gestion alarmes Fc6| |Alarmverwaltung Fc6|
|Config.relè allarmi | |Config.alarm relay | |Config.relais d’alarme| |Konfig.Alarmrelais |
| | | | | | | |
|Selez.allarmi GRAVI | |Select SERIOUS alarms | |Sélect alarmes GRAVES | |Wählen SCHWEREN Alarme|
|101 105 106 110| |101 105 106 110| |101 105 106 110| |101 105 106 110|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ |
|111 115 116 120| |111 115 116 120| |111 115 116 120| |111 115 116 120|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione allarmi Fc7| | Alarm management Fc7| |Gestion alarmes Fc7| |Alarmverwaltung Fc7|
|Config.relè allarmi | |Config.alarm relay | |Config.relais d’alarme| |Konfig.Alarmrelais |
| | | | | | | |
|Selez.allarmi GRAVI | |Select SERIOUS alarms | |Sélect alarmes GRAVES | |Wählen SCHWEREN Alarme|
|121 125 126 130| |121 125 126 130| |121 125 126 130| |121 125 126 130|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ |
|131 135 136 140| |131 135 136 140| |131 135 136 140| |131 135 136 140|
|□ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Gestione allarmi Fc8| | Alarm management Fc8| |Gestion alarmes Fc8| |Alarmverwaltung Fc8|
|Config.relè allarmi | |Config.alarm relay | |Config.relais d’alarme| |Konfig.Alarmrelais |
| | | | | | | |
|Selez.allarmi GRAVI | |Select SERIOUS alarms | |Sélect alarmes GRAVES | |Wählen SCHWEREN Alarme|
|141 145 146 150| |141 145 146 150| |141 145 146 150| |141 145 146 150|
|□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ |
|151 155 156 160| |151 155 156 160| |151 155 156 160| |151 155 156 160|
|□ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ | |□ □ □ □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
Masks from Fc1 to Fc8 allow to configure each unit alarm as:

• non-serious (box unchecked): when a non-serious alarm is triggered, NO7 digital output will open;
• serious (box checked): when a serious alarm is triggered, NO8 digital output will open and, in case
the unit is running and is connected in Datalink (p-LAN) network with other units, this will force units
rotation (for further information see Datalink chapter).

Refer to the Alarms chapter for the description of each alarm. A factory presetting is provided, however User
might choose a different combination according to own’s needs.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione allarmi Fc9| | Alarm management Fc9| | Gestion d'alarme Fc9| | Alarmverwaltung Fc9|
| | | | | | | |
|Configurazione Dout | |Dout configuration | |Dout configuration | |Dout Konfiguration |
|14:Disabled | |14:Disabled | |14:Désactivé | |14:Behindert |
|15:Disabled | |15:Disabled | |15:Désactivé | |15:Behindert |
|16:Disabled | |16:Disabled | |16:Désactivé | |16:Behindert |
|17:Disabled | |17:Disabled | |17:Désactivé | |17:Behindert |
|18:Disabled | |18:Disabled | |18:Désactivé | |18:Behindert |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allow to configure programmable voltage-free digital outputs (only for pCO Large control boards);
each digital output can be related to one of the following events or alarms (not all are always available,
depending on unit configuration):

• Disabled
• Supply air fan alarm
• Condensation drain pump alarm
• Power+ alarm
• EVD EVO alarm
• Water leakage alarm
• Water flow alarm
• Fire/smoke alarm

119
 • Dirty air filter alarm
• Air flow alarm
• External humidifier alarm
• CPY general alarm
• Thermal overload heaters alarm
• High/low return air humidity alarm
• High/low return air temperature alarm
• High/low supply air temperature alarm
• LP circuit 1 alarm
• LP circuit 2 alarm
• HP circuit 1 alarm
• HP circuit 2 alarm
• Unit in dehumidification mode
• Unit in humidification mode
• Unit in heating mode
• Unit in cooling mode
• Supply air fans ON
• Unit ON

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione allarmi Fc10| | Alarm management Fc10| | Gestion d'alarme Fc10| | Alarmwerwaltung Fc10|
|Allarme config. (ID17)| |Custom alarm (DI17) | |Alarme person.(DI17) | |Kunden Alarm (DI17) |
| | | | | | | |
|Testo visualizzato: | |Text displayed: | |Texte affiché: | |Text angezeigt: |
| CUSTOM | | CUSTOM | | CUSTOM | | CUSTOM |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set a customized alarm text from digital input ID17 (only available with pCO “Large”
board); when digital input is open the alarm is activated and the text is shown in the alarm screen and
recorded in the alarm log.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Gestione allarmi Fc11| | Alarm management Fc11| | Gestion d'alarme Fc11| | Alarmverwaltung Fc11|
| | | | | | | |
|Selziona allarmi che | |Select alarms that | |Liste des alarmes qui | |Alarm-Liste Das muss |
|fermano l'unità | |must stop unit | |doit arrêter la mach. | |Stopp-Einheit |
|Allarme conf.(ID17) □ | |Custom al.(DI17) □ | |Al. personal.(DI17) □ | |Custom al.(DI17) □|
|Al.allagamento □ | |Water leakage alarm □ | |Alarme fuire d'eau □ | |Wasser-Leckage-Alarm □|
|Al.pompa scar.cond. □ | |Cond.pump alarm □ | |Al.pompe condensat □ | |Kondensatpumpe Alarm □|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to choose which of the described alarms must switch off completely the unit; please note
that other, non-configurable alarms will also switch off the unit:
• Air flow alarm (from pressure switch or pressure transducer)
• I/O chip configuration error.

All other alarms do not switch off the unit (i.e. the air supply fans remain active), but only the devices currently
under alarm condition. For more information please look up the alarm table.

120
8.4.4 Fd. Datalink
This menu loop contains all masks for Datalink p-LAN network configuration and management.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| DATALINK Fd1| | DATALINK Fd1| | DATALINK Fd1| | DATALINK Fd1|
|Indirizzo unità: 1| |Unit address: 00| |Addr.unité: 1| |Geräteadresse 1|
|Passa all'unità: 1| |Switch to unit: 00| |Passer à l’unité: 1| |Wechs.sie Einheit: 1|
| | | | | | | |
| 1 16 | | 1 16 | | 1 16 | | 1 16 |
| | | | | | | |
| 1732 | | 1732 | | 1732 | | 1732 |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask graphically displays addresses of units connected with Datalink p-LAN network (from 1 to 16) and
addresses of units displays (from 17 to 32, considering that 32 is the shared terminal address).
From this mask, it is also possible to switch to other connected units display, if display is properly configured;
refer to Datalink chapter for display configuration.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| DATALINK Fd2| | DATALINK Fd2| | DATALINK Fd2| | DATALINK Fd2|
| | | | | | | |
|Configurazione unità: | |Units configuration | |Config.des unites | |Einheit Konfig. |
|U1: PRESENTE/ROTAZ.| |U1: PRESENT/ROTATION| |U1: PRESENT/ROTATION| |U1: VORHANDEN/ROTATION|
|U2: PRESENTE/ROTAZ.| |U2: PRESENT/ROTATION| |U2: PRESENT/ROTATION| |U2: VORHANDEN/ROTATION|
|U3: PRESENTE/ROTAZ.| |U3: PRESENT/ROTATION| |U3: PRESENT/ROTATION| |U3: VORHANDEN/ROTATION|
|U4: PRESENTE/ROTAZ.| |U4: PRESENT/ROTATION| |U4: PRESENT/ROTATION| |U4: VORHANDEN/ROTATION|
|U5: PRESENTE/ROTAZ.| |U5: PRESENT/ROTATION| |U5: PRESENT/ROTATION| |U5: VORHANDEN/ROTATION|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
The masks for network configuration (from Fd2 to Fd12) are shown only on the “master” unit (the one wih
network address = “1”).
Masks from Fd2 to Fd4, displayed only when Datalink network is enabled, allow to configure Datalink
network. For each unit, it is possible to choose its network status:
• PRESENT/ROTATION: it means that the unit is part of local network and take part to units rotation;
• PRESENT/NO ROTAT.: it means that the unit is part of local network but doesn’t take part to units
rotation;
• NOT PRESENT: it means that unit is not part of local network.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| DATALINK Fd5| | DATALINK Fd5| | DATALINK Fd5| | DATALINK Fd5|
| | | | | | | |
|Controllo distribuito | |Distributed control | |Contrôle distribuyes | |Distribuited Steuer |
| □ | | □ | | □ | | □ |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Usa unità impostate: | |Uses units set as | |Util.unités déf.comme | |Verw.Einheit.eingest. |
| Pres./No rotazione □ | | Pres./No rotation □ | | Prés./Pas rotation □ | | Vorh./Keine Rotat. □ |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only when Datalink is enabled, allow to enable distributed control and to decide if a unit
configured with “PRESENT/NO ROTATION” network status (see above) has to be called anyway when
distributed control is active.
Default parameters are as follow:
rd
3 row: don’t enable.
th
8 row: don’t enable.

121
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| DATALINK Fd6| | DATALINK Fd6| | DATALINK Fd6| | DATALINK Fd6|
| | | | | | | |
|Unità stand-alone | |Stand-alone unit | |Unité autonome | |Standalone Gerät |
|Impostaz.temperatura | |Temperature settings | |Réglages temp. | |Temperatureinstellung.|
|Diff.raffredd.: 005.0C| |Diff.cooling: 005.0C| |Diff.refroid.: 005.0C| |Diff.Kõhlung: 005.0C|
|Diff.riscald.: 005.0C| |Diff.heating: 005.0C| |Diff.chauff.: 005.0C| |Diff.Heizung: 005.0C|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when Datalink and distributed control are enabled, allows to set parameters for stand-
alone working of units connected in Datalink network: when the difference between air temperature read by
the probe of the single unit and the set point exceed the differential (both in cooling and in heating), the unit
will switch to stand-alone mode and will return to work with distributed control only when the differential is
below the limit.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: 5.0°C.
th
6 row: 5.0°C.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| DATALINK Fd7| | DATALINK Fd7| | DATALINK Fd7| | DATALINK Fd7|
| | | | | | | |
|Unità stand-alone | |Stand-alone unit | |Unité autonome | |Standalone Gerät |
|Impostazione umidità | |Humidity settings | |Param.humidité | |Feuchtigkeitswerte |
|Diff.umidif.: 05.0g/Kg| |Diff.humid.: 05.0g/Kg| |Diff.humid.: 05.0g/Kg| |Dif.Befeucht.:05.0g/Kg|
|Diff.deumid.: 05.0g/Kg| |Diff.dehum.: 05.0g/Kg| |Diff.déshum.: 05.0g/Kg| |Dif.Entfeuch.:05.0g/Kg|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when Datalink and distributed control are enabled, allows to set parameters for stand-
alone working of units connected in Datalink network: when the difference between air humidity read by the
probe of the single unit and the set point exceed the differential (both in humidification and in
dehumidification), the unit will switch to stand-alone mode and will return to work with distributed control only
when the differential is below the limit.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
5 row: 2.0 g/kg or 10.0%, depending on the type of humidity control enabled.
th
5 row: 2.0 g/kg or 10.0%, depending on the type of humidity control enabled.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| DATALINK Fd8| | DATALINK Fd8| | DATALINK Fd8| | DATALINK Fd8|
| | | | | | | |
|Tipo rotazione | |Rotation type | |Type de rotation | |Rotationstyp |
|AUTOMATICA | |AUTOMATIC | |AUTOMATIQUE | |AUTOMATISCH |
|Unità in stand-by | |Stand-by units | |Stand-by unités | |Stand-by Ger¼te |
| 1| | 1| | 1| | 1|
|Tempo rotazione: 480m| |Rotation time 480m| |Temps de rotat. 480m| |Drehzeit 480m|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when Datalink is enabled, allows to set parameters for units rotation.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: AUTOMATIC.
th
6 row: 1.
th
7 row: 480 minutes.

122
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| DATALINK Fd9| | DATALINK Fd9| | DATALINK Fd9| | DATALINK Fd9|
| | | | | | | |
|Pianificazione della | |Units rotation | |Rotation unités | |Einheiten Rotation |
|rotazione unità | |scheduler | |planificateur | |Scheduler |
|Tempo rotazione: | |Rotation time: | |Temps de rotation: | |Rotation zeit: |
| 20:00| | 20:00| | 20:00| | 20:00|
|Ogni: 1g | |Every: 1days| |Chaque: 1jours| |Jedes: 1Tage|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when Datalink is enabled and DAILY rotation is enabled on mask Fd8, allows to set
parameters for units daily rotation in terms of daily hour and days interval of rotation.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
6 row: 20:00.
th
7 row: 1 day.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| DATALINK Fd10| | DATALINK Fd10| | DATALINK Fd10| | DATALINK Fd10|
| | | | | | | |
|Funz.forzatura unità | |Unit forcing function | |Fonct.forÇage unité | |Einheit Störfunktion |
|Abilita funz. □ | |Enable func. □ | |Activer fonct. □ | |Aktivieren Funk. □ |
| | | | | | | |
|Ritardo forzatura per | |Delay force unit by | |Retard unité forç.pour| |Verzög.zwing.Einheit |
|Bassa temp. 180s| |Low temp.: 180s| |Basse temp. 180s| |Niedr.Temp. 180s|
|Alta temp. 180s| |High temp.: 180s| |Haute temp. 180s| |Hohe Temp. 180s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when Datalink is enabled, allows to enable unit forcing function and to set relative
parameters.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: enable.
th
7 row: 180 s.
th
8 row: 180 s.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| DATALINK Fd11| | DATALINK Fd11| | DATALINK Fd11| | DATALINK Fd11|
|Funz.forzatura unità | |Unit forcing function | |Fonct.forÇage unité | |Einheit Störfunktion |
|Cond.di bassa temp. | |Cond.of low temp. | |Cond.de basse temp. | |Zustand niedr.Temp. |
|Diff.: 04.0C| |Diff.: 04.0C| |Diff.: 04.0C| |Diff.: 04.0C|
|Offset: 02.0C| |Offset: 02.0C| |Offset: 02.0C| |Offset: 02.0C|
|Cond.di alta temp. | |Cond.of high temp. | |Cond.de temp.élevée | |Zustand hoher Temp. |
|Diff.: 04.0C| |Diff.: 04.0C| |Diff.: 04.0C| |Diff.: 04.0C|
|Offset: 02.0C| |Offset: 02.0C| |Offset: 02.0C| |Offset: 02.0C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when Datalink is enabled, allows to differential and offset for low and high temperature
unit forcing function.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: 4.0°C.
th
5 row: 2.0°C.
th
7 row: 4.0°C.
th
8 row: 2.0°C.

123
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| DATALINK Fd12| | DATALINK Fd12| | DATALINK Fd12| | DATALINK Fd12|
| | | | | | | |
|Abilita rotaz.unità □ | |En. unit rotation □ | |Perm.rotation unité □ | |Akt.Einheit Rotation □|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Forza manual.rot. □ | |Force manual rot. □ | |Forcer rot.man. □ | |Erzw.manuelle Drehung□|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, shown only when Datalink is enabled, allows to enable unit rotation and to force manual rotation.
Unit rotation must be enabled only after Datalink configuration; every time a parameter is changed on
Datalink configuration, it is necessary to disable and enable again unit rotation in order to send new
parameters to all units.
Default parameters are as follow:
rd
3 row: enable.
th
7 row: use only to manually force unit rotation.

8.4.5 Fe. Advanced settings

This menu loop contains all masks for advanced User settings.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Impost.avanzate Fe1| | Adv.Settings Fe1| | Param.avancés Fe1| | Erweit.EinstellungFe1|
| | | | | | | |
|Abilita On/Off unità | |Enable unit OnOff | |Activ.unité On/Off | |Aktiv.Einheit Ein/Aus |
|Da ingres.digitale: □ | |By digit input: □ | |Par.entrée digit. □ | |Durch Zifferneing.: □ |
|Da supervisore: □ | |By supervisor: □ | |Par superviseur □ | |Durch Supervisor: □ |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enable unit ON/OFF by digital input or by supervisor.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: don’t enable.
th
5 row: don’t enable.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Impost.avanzate Fe2| | Adv.Settings Fe2| | Param.avancés Fe2| | Erweiterte EinstelFe2|
| | | | | | | |
| Modifica | | Change | | Changer | | Wechseln |
| password | | user | | Utilisateur | | Anwender |
| utente | | password | | password | | password |
| | | | | | | |
|Inserire nuova | |Insert new | |Saisir nouveau mot | |Neues Password |
|password (PW3): 0000| |password (PW3): 0000| |de passe (PW3): 0000| |Eing. (PW3): 0000|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set a new User password.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Impost.avanzate Fe3| | Adv.Settings Fe3| | Param.avancés Fe3| | Erwert.Einstell. Fe3|
| | | | | | | |
|Carica configuraz.: NO| |Load configuration: NO| |Charger config.: NO| |Konfig.laden: N|
| | | | | | | |
|______________________| |______________________| |______________________| |______________________|
| | | | | | | |
|______________________| |______________________| |______________________| |______________________|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to restore factory software configuration, erasing all changes to settings and parameters
that have been done after factory testing.

WARNING!
This operation will erase all parameters and settings that have been changed after
factory testing and will restore factory parameters and configuration.

124
8.5 E. Data logger
The Data logger menu can be accessed from the main menu without any password; it contains a log of last
100 alarms that have occurred, both serious and non-serious, displaying also some parameters stored when
the alarm has triggered. If more than 100 alarms occur, only last 100 alarms will be logged and the older ones
will be overwritten.
Note that active alarms can be shown also by pressing the alarm key of the display (which has red lightning
when at least one alarm is active) and they can be reset by pressing for at least 3 seconds the alarm key and
by pressing ENTER key when asked.
Even if an alarm is reset, it will be logged anyway in the data logger loop.
An example of data logger mask is the following:

+----------------------+
1 |N°001 16:06 28/05/14| 2
3 | A035 |
|EVD (Circ1) high evap.|
|temperature (MOP) | 4
| |
|Tret 24.0C Tsup 18.0C| 5
| |
| Altre info |
+----------------------+

For each alarm, reported information are:

1. Sequential alarm number
2. Time and date of alarm triggering
3. Alarm code
4. Alarm description
5. Return & supply air temperature at alarm occurrence

By pressing the “Enter” key, it is possible to visualize, for each alarm, another screen with some operating
parameters of the refrigeration circuit, captured at alarm occurrence:

+----------------------+
|N°001 16:06 28/05/14|
| A035 |
| Cir.1 Cir.2|
6 |Pc (barg) 00.0 00.0|
7 |Pe (barg) 00.0 00.0|
8 |SH (°C) 00.0 00.0|
9 |ExV (stp) 000 000|
10 |Envelope Z.1 |

6. Condensing pressure of circuit 1 and 2 (if present)

7. Evaporating pressure of circuit 1 and 2 (if present)
8. Suction superheat of circuit 1 and 2 (if present)
9. EEV opening steps
10. Envelope zone (only for circuits with BLDC compressor)

By pressing “Enter” key again, it is possible to return to first alarm screen.

Alarm log can be erased from Service Menu.

125
8.6 D. Input/Output
The Input/Output menu can be accessed from the main menu without any password; it contains information
about the status of unit inputs and outputs. Masks layout and input/output displayed change depending on
unit configuration; all parameters shown are read-only.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D1| | Input/Output D1| | Entrée/Sortie D1| | Eing./Ausg. D1|
| | | | | | | |
|INGRESSI ANALOGICI | |ANALOG INPUTS | |ENTRÉES ANALOGIQUES | |ANALOGEINGÄNGE |
|T aria ritorno: 00.0°C| |Ret.air temp.: 00.0°C| |T air retour: 00.0°C| |T Rõckluft: 00.0°C|
|Umidità 00.0g/Kg| |Humiditydity: 00.0g/Kg| |Humidity: 00.0g/Kg| |Humidityht.: 00.0g/Kg|
|T aria mandata: 00.0°C| |Sup.air temp.: 00.0°C| |T air refoulem.:00.0°C| |T Zuluft: 00.0°C|
|Portata aria:00000m3/h| |Air flow: 00000m3/h| |Flux d'air: 00000m3/h| |Luftstrom: 00000m3/h|
|Pressione aria: 0000Pa| |Air pressure: 0000Pa| |Pression air: 0000Pa| |Luftdruck: 0000Pa|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows values of the following analogue inputs:
th
4 row: return air temperature.
th
5 row: return air humidity (only for units with humidity probe), expressed in g/kg if absolute humidity control
is active, or in rH% if relative humidity control is active.
th
6 row: supply air temperature.
th
7 row: air flow, calculated through air pressure measured by differential air pressure transducer (only for
units with differential air pressure transducer enabled).
th
8 row: air pressure measured by differential air pressure transducer (only for units with differential air
pressure transducer enabled).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D2| | Input/Output D2| | Entrée/Sortie D2| | Eing./Ausg. D2|
| | | | | | | |
|INGRESSI ANALOGICI | |ANALOG INPUTS | |ENTRÉES ANALOGIQUES | |ANALOGEINGÄNGE |
|T aria esterna: 00.0°C| |Ext.air temp.: 00.0°C| |T externe air: 00.0°C| |T AuBenluft: 00.0°C|
| | | | | | | |
|Set point variabile: | |Variable set point: | |Point de cons.variab.:| |Variable Sollwert: |
| | | | | | | |
| 24.0°C| | 24.0°C| | 24.0°C| | 24.0°C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows values of the following analogue inputs:
th
4 row: external air temperature.
th
8 row: variable set point.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D3| | Input/Output D3| | Entrée/Sortie D3| | Eing./Ausg. D3|
| | | | | | | |
|INGRESSI ANALOGICI | |ANALOG INPUTS | |ENTRÉES ANALOGIQUES | |ANALOGEINGÄNGE |
|T ingres.acqua batt.: | |Inlet water coil: | |T entrée eau batt.: | |T Eing.Wasser Regist.:|
| 00.0°C| | 00.0°C| | 00.0°C| | 00.0°C|
| | | | | | | |
|T uscita acqua batt.: | |Outlet water coil: | |T sortie eau batt.: | |T Ausg.Wasser Regist.:|
| 00.0°C| | 00.0°C| | 00.0°C| | 00.0°C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows values of the following analogue inputs:
th
4 row: inlet water coil.
th
8 row: outlet water coil.

126
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ingressi/Uscite D4| | Input/Output D4| | Entrée/Sortie D4| | Eing./Ausg. D4|
| | | | | | | |
|INGRESSI ANALOGICI | |ANALOG INPUTS | |ENTRÉES ANALOGIQUES | |ANALOGEINGÄNGE |
|Pressione condensaz. | |Condensing pressure | |Press. condensation | |Verflõssigungsdruck |
|cir.1: 00.0 barg| |cir.1: 00.0 barg| |cir.1: 00.0 barg| |Kreisl1: 00.0 barg|
| | | | | | | |
|cir.2: 00.0barg | |cir.2: 00.0barg | |cir.2: 00.0barg | |Kreisl2: 00.0 barg|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the status of the following analogue inputs:
th
4 row: condensing pressure of circuit 1.
th
7 row: condensing pressure of circuit 2.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D5| | Input/Output D5| | Entrée/Sortie D5| | Eing./Ausg. D5|
| | | | | | | |
|INGRESSI DIGITALI | |DIGITAL INPUTS | |ENTRÉES NUMÉRIQUES | |DIGITALEINGÄNGE |
|1:Hp circuito 1 | |1:Hp circuit 1 | |1:Hp circuit 1 | |1:HP Kreislauf 1 |
|2:Termico BLDC c.1 | |2:Thermal BLDC c.1 | |2:Thermiq. BLDC c.1 | |2:Schutzs.BLDC K.1 |
| | | | | | | |
|3:Termico resist.1 | |3:Thermal heater 1 | |3:Thermiq.resist.1 | |3:Schutzs.Heizung1 |
|4:Termico Fix. c.1 | |4:Thermal Fix. c.1 | |4:Thermiq.Fix.c.1 | |4:Schutzs.Fix. c.1 |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the status of the following digital inputs:
th
4 row: high pressure switch of circuit 1.
th
5 row: BLDC compressor thermal protection of circuit 1.
th
7 row: heater 1 thermal protection.
th
8 row: ON/OFF compressor thermal protection of circuit 1.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D6| | Input/Output D6| | Entrée/Sortie D6| | Eing./Ausg. D6|
| | | | | | | |
|INGRESSI DIGITALI | |DIGITAL INPUTS | |ENTRÉES NUMÉRIQUES | |DIGITALEINGÄNGE |
|5:Filtri sporchi | |5:Clogged air filter | |5:Filtres encrassés | |5:Verschmutze Filt. |
|6:Termico resist.2 | |6:Thermal heater 2 | |6:Thermiq.résist.2 | |6:Schutzs.Heizung 2 |
| | | | | | | |
|7:Term.vent.mandata | |7:Air.flowoverload | |7:Thermiq.vent.air | |7:Schutzs.Lüfter |
|8:On/Off remoto | |8:Remote On/Off | |8:On/Off à distance | |8:On/Off Remote |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the status of the following digital inputs:
th
4 row: clogged air filter.
th
5 row: heater 2 thermal protection.
th
7 row: supply air fan thermal protection.
th
8 row: unit remote ON/OFF.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D7| | Input/Output D7| | Entrée/Sortie D7| | Eing./Ausg. D7|
| | | | | | | |
|INGRESSI DIGITALI | |DIGITAL INPUTS | |ENTRÉES NUMÉRIQUES | |DIGITALEINGÄNGE |
|9:Hp circuito 2 | |9:Hp circuit 2 | |9:Hp circuit 2 | |9:HP Kreislauf 2 |
|10:Term.fisso 2 c.2 | |10:Thermal Fix2 C2 | |10:Thermiq.Fix 2 C2 | |10:Schutzs.Fix.2 K.2 |
| | | | | | | |
|11:Term.fisso 1 c.2 | |11:Thermal Fix1 C2 | |11:Thermiq.Fix 1 C2 | |11:Schutzs.Fix.1 K.2 |
|12:DC flusso acqua | |12:DC water flow | |12:DC debit d’eau | |12:DC Wasser Fluss |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the status of the following digital inputs:
th
4 row: high pressure alarm of circuit 2.
th
5 row: thermal protection of fixed compressor 2 of circuit 2.
th
7 row: thermal protection of fixed compressor 1 of circuit 2.
th
8 row: dual cooling water flow switch alarm.

127
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ingressi/Uscite D8| | Input/Output D8| | Entrée/Sortie D8| | Eing./Ausg. D8|
| | | | | | | |
|INGRESSI DIGITALI | |DIGITAL INPUTS | |ENTRÉES NUMÉRIQUES | |DIGITALEINGÄNGE |
|13:Fuoco/fumo | |13:Fire/Smoke | |13:Feu/Fumée | |13:Feuer/Rauch |
|14:Allagamento | |14:Water leakege | |14:Fuite eau | |14:Wass.Leckage |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the status of the following digital inputs:
th
4 row: fire/smoke alarm.
th
5 row: water leakage alarm.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D9| | Input/Output D9| | Entrée/Sortie D9| | Eing./Ausg. D9|
| | | | | | | |
|INGRESSI DIGITALI | |DIGITAL INPUTS | |ENTRÉES NUMÉRIQUES | |DIGITALEINGÄNGE |
|15:Term.pompa cond. | |15:Thermal cond.pump | |15:Therm.pomp.cond. | |15:Therm.Kondensatp. |
|16:Off resistenze | |16:Heaters Off | |16:Résist.Off | |16:Heizungen Aus |
| | | | | | | |
|17:Programmabile | |17:Programmable | |17:Programmable | |17:Programmierbare |
|18:Al.umidif.ester. | |18:Ext.humid.alarm | |18:Alarme humid.ext. | |18:Ext.Befeucht.Al. |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the status of the following digital inputs:
th
4 row: thermal protection of condensate drain pump.
th
5 row: remote OFF of heaters/humidifier.
th
7 row: programmable alarm.
th
8 row: external humidifier alarm.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D10| | Input/Output D10| | Entrée/Sortie D10| | Eing./Ausg. D10|
| | | | | | | |
|USCITE ANALOGICHE | |ANALOG OUTPUTS | |SORTIES ANALOGIQUES | |ANALOGAUSGÄNGE |
|Valv.acq.calda: 000.0%| |Hot water valve:000.0%| |Vanne eau chaud 000.0%| |Warmwasservent. 000.0%|
|Ventil.mandata: 000.0%| |Supply air fan: 000.0%| |Vent.soufflage 000.0%| |Vorlaufgebläse 000.0%|
| | | | | | | |
|Condensazione: 000.0%| |Condensing 1: 000.0%| |Condensation 000.0%| |Verflüss.: 000.0%|
|Dry cooler: 000.0%| |Condensing 2: 000.0%| |Dry cooler 000.0%| |Dry cooler 000.0%|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the values of the following analogue outputs:
th
4 row: percentage of signal sent to the hot modulating actuator, which can be hot water valve, modulating
electrical heaters or modulating hot gas post heating valve.
th
5 row: supply air fan.
th
7 row: condensing fans of circuit 1 or water condensing valve.
th
8 row: condensing fans of circuit 2.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D11| | Input/Output D11| | Entrée/Sortie D11| | Eing./Ausg. D11|
| | | | | | | |
|USCITE ANALOGICHE | |ANALOG OUTPUTS | |SORTIES ANALOGIQUES | |ANALOGAUSGÄNGE |
|Umidif.esterno: 000.0%| |Ext.humidifier: 000.0%| |Humidif.ext. 000.0%| |Ext.Befeuchter 000.0%|
| | | | | | | |
| | |Free Cooling air | | | | |
|Serrand.aria FC:000.0%| |damper: 000.0%| |FC air registre 000.0%| |FC Luftklappe 000.0%|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the values of the following analogue outputs:
th
4 row: external humidifier.
th
7 row: Free Cooling air damper.

128
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ingressi/Uscite D12| | Input/Output D12| | Entrée/Sortie D12| | Eing./Ausg. D12|
| | | | | | | |
|USCITE DIGITALI | |DIGITAL OUTPUTS | |SORTIES NUMÉRIQUES | |DIGITALAUSGÄNGE |
|1:Ventilat.mandata | |1:Supply fan | |1:Vent.soufflage | |1:Zulufventil. |
|2:Valv.solenoide c.1 | |2:Solenoid valve c.1 | |2:Solenoid vanne c.1 | |2:Magnetventil c.1 |
| | | | | | | |
|3:Compr.fisso c.1 | |3:Fixed compress.c.1 | |3:Fixe compress.c.1 | |3:Fixed Kompress.c.1 |
|4:Valv.eq.olio c.1 | |4:Oil eq.valve c.1 | |4:Vanne eq.huille c.1 | |4:ölausgleichsvent.c1 |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the status of the following digital outputs:
th
4 row: supply air fan.
th
5 row: liquid solenoid valve of circuit 1.
th
7 row: ON/OFF (fixed) compressor of circuit 1.
th
8 row: oil equalization solenoid valve of circuit 1.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Input/Output D13| | Input/Output D13| | Entrée/Sortie D13| | Eing./Ausg. D13|
| | | | | | | |
|DIGITAL OUTPUTS | |DIGITAL OUTPUTS | |SORTIES NUMÉRIQUES | |DIGITALAUSGÄNGE |
|5:Resistenza 1 | |5:Heater 1 | |5:Chauffe 1 | |5:Heizung 1 |
|6:Resistenza 2 | |6:Post Hot Gas valve | |6:Chauffe 2 | |6:Heizung 2 |
| | | | | | | |
|7:Segnalazione | |7:Warning | |7:Attention | |7:Warnung |
|8:Allarme generale | |8:General alarm | |8:Alarme Générale | |8:Allgem.Alarm |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the status of the following digital outputs:
th
4 row: ON/OFF heating device 1, which can be electrical heater or ON/OFF hot water valve.
th
5 row: ON/OFF heating device2, which can be electrical heater or ON/OFF hot gas post heating valve.
th
7 row: warning (light alarm) relay.
th
8 row: serious alarm relay.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D14| | Input/Output D14| | Entrée/Sortie D14| | Eing./Ausg. D14|
| | | | | | | |
|USCITE DIGITALI | |DIGITAL OUTPUTS | |SORTIES NUMÉRIQUES | |DIGITALAUSGÄNGE |
|9:Val.solenoide c.2 | |9:Solenoid valve c.2 | |9:Solenoid vanne c.2 | |9:Magnetventil c.2 |
|10:Comp.fisso 2 c.2 | |10:Fixed compr.2 c.2 | |10:Fixe compr.2 C2 | |10:Kompr.Fix 2 c.2 |
|11:Comp.fisso 1 c.2 | |11:Fixed compr.1 c.2 | |11:Fixe compr.1 C2 | |11:Kompr.Fix 1 c.2 |
|12:Pompa dry cooler | |12:Ex.humidifier | |12:Pompe dry cooler | |12:Trockenkül.Pumpe |
|13:Serranda aria | |13:Supply air damper | |13:Reg.d’ari approv. | |13:Zuluftklappe |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the status of the following digital outputs:
th
4 row: liquid solenoid valve of circuit 2.
th
5 row: ON/OFF (fixed) compressor of circuit 1.
th
6 row: oil equalization solenoid valve of circuit 2.
th
7 row: external humidifier.
th
8 row: supply air damper.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D15| | Input/Output D15| | Entrée/Sortie D15| | Eing./Ausg. D15|
| | | | | | | |
|USCITE DIGITALI | |DIGITAL OUTPUTS | |SORTIES NUMÉRIQUES | |DIGITALAUSGÄNGE |
|14:Programmabile 1 | |14:Programmable 1 | |14:Programmable 1 | |14:Programmierb.1 |
|15:Programmabile 2 | |15:Programmable 2 | |15:Programmable 2 | |15:Programmierb.2 |
|16:Programmabile 3 | |16:Programmable 3 | |16:Programmable 3 | |16:Programmierb.3 |
|17:Programmabile 4 | |17:Programmable 4 | |17:Programmable 4 | |17:Programmierb.4 |
|18:Programmabile 5 | |18:Programmable 5 | |18:Programmable 5 | |18:Programmierb.5 |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the status of the programmable digital outputs; see User chapter for available programming
options.

129
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ingressi/Uscite D20| | Input/Output D20| | Entrée/Sortie D20| | Eing./Ausg. D20|
| | | | | | | |
|Stato cilindro: | |Cylinder state: | |Cylindre etat: | |Zylinderzustand : |
| Produzione nulla | | No production | | No production | | No production |
| | | | | | | |
|Corrente: 00.0A| |Current: 00.0A| |Courant: 00.0A| |Strom: 00.0A|
|Conducibilita': 0000µS| |Conductivity: 0000µS| |Conductivité: 0000µS| |Leitfähigkeit: 0000µS|
|Prod.Vapore: 000.0kg/h| |Steam prod.: 000.0kg/h| |Prod.vapeur: 000.0kg/h| |Dampf prod.: 000.0kg/h|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the following parameters for CPY humidifier:
th
4 row: cylinder status.
th
6 row: cylinder input current.
th
7 row: water conductivity.
th
8 row: steam production.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D21| | Input/Output D21| | Entrée/Sortie D21| | Eing./Ausg. D21|
|EVO n° 1 | |EVO n° 1 | |EVO n° 1 | |EVO n° 1 |
| | | | | | | |
|Stato valvola: --- | |Valve status: --- | |Etat vanne: --- | |Ventil status: --- |
|Apert.valvola: 000.0%| |Valve opening: 000.0%| |Ouvert.vanne: 000.0%| |Ventilöffnung: 000.0%|
|Pos.valvola: 0000stp| |Valve position:0000stp| |Vanne position:0000stp| |Ventilposition:0000stp|
|Capacita'afrig.: 000%| |Cool.capacity:: 000%| |Capacitépfrig.: 000%| |Kõhlkapazit¼t:: 000%|
|Surriscaldam.:000.0---| |Superheat: 000.0-- | |Surchauf.: 000.0-- | |Überhitzung: 000.0-- |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ingressi/Uscite D22| | Input/Output D22| | Entrée/Sortie D22| | Eing./Ausg. D22|
|EVO n° 2 | |EVO n° 2 | |EVO n° 2 | |EVO n° 2 |
| | | | | | | |
|Stato valvola: --- | |Valve status: --- | |Etat vanne: --- | |Ventil status: --- |
|Apert.valvola: 000.0%| |Valve opening: 000.0%| |Ouvert.vanne: 000.0%| |Ventilöffnung: 000.0%|
|Pos.valvola: 0000stp| |Valve position:0000stp| |Vanne position:0000stp| |Ventilposition:0000stp|
|Capacita' frig.: 000%| |Cool.capacity:: 000%| |Capacité frig.: 000%| |Kühlkapazität:: 000%|
|Surriscaldam.:000.0---| |Superheat: 000.0-- | |Surchauf.: 000.0-- | |Überhitzung: 000.0-- |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
These masks shows the following parameters for EEV of cooling circuit 1 and 2:
th
4 row: valve status.
th
5 row: valve opening in percentage.
th
6 row: valve opening in steps.
th
7 row: valve cooling capacity.
th
8 row: calculated superheating.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Input/Output D24| | Ingressi/Uscite D24| | Entrée/Sortie D24| | Eing./Ausg. D24|
|Capacity regul. | |Regol.capacità | |Regul.capacite | |Verdichterregelung |
|Circ.1 BLDC compr. | |Circ.1 compr. BLDC | |Circ.1 BLDC compr. | |Circ.1 BLDC compr. |
|Required cap.: 000.0%| |Capacità rich.: 000.0%| |Capacite dde: 000.0%| |Leistungsanfor.:000.0%|
|Actual cap.: 000.0%| |Capacità reale: 000.0%| |Capacite actuel:000.0%| |Ist-Leistung: 000.0%|
|Actual speed: 000.0rps| |Veloc.compr.: 000.0rps| |Vit.actuel: 000.0rps| |Ist-Geschw.: 000.0rps|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the following parameters for BLDC compressor of circuit 1:
th
4 row: required cooling capacity.
th
5 row: actual cooling capacity.
th
6 row: actual compressor speed.

130
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ingressi/Uscite D25| | Input/Output D25| | Entrée/Sortie D25| | Eing./Ausg. D25|
|Dati inviluppo | |Envelope data | |Donnee enveloppe | |Huellkurvendaten |
|Circ.1 | |Circ.1 | |Circ.1 | |Circ.1 |
|Press.cond.: 00.0bar| |Cond.pressure: 00.0bar| |Press.cond.: 00.0bar| |Verflue.druck: 00.0bar|
|Press.evap.: 00.0 bar| |Evap.pressure:00.0 bar| |Press.evap.: 00.0 bar| |Verdamp.druck:00.0 bar|
|Zona inviluppo: | |Envelope status: | |Etat enveloppe: | |Huellkurvenzone: |
| | | | | | | |
|Allarme tra: 00000s| |Alarm countdown:00000s| |Delais avt al.: 00000s| |Alarm in: 00000s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the following parameters for BLDC compressor of circuit 1:
th
4 row: condensing pressure.
th
5 row: evaporating pressure.
th
7 row: envelope status.
th
8 row: out of envelope alarm countdown.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Input/Output D26| | Ingressi/Uscite D26| | Entrée/Sortie D26| | Eing./Ausg. D26|
|Envelope data | |Dati inviluppo | |Donnee enveloppe | |Huellkurvendaten |
|Circ.1 | |Circ.1 | |Circ.1 | |Circ.1 |
|Press.diff.: 00.0 bar| |Diff.press.: 00.0 bar| |Press.diff.: 00.0 bar| |Druckdelta: 00.0 bar|
|Press.ratio: 000.0 | |Rapporto press.:000.0 | |Ratio press.: 000.0 | |Druckverhaeltn.: 000.0|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Low PD countdown: 000s| |AL basso DP tra: 000s| |Tps PD bas: 000s| |Niedr.Dr.D.Countd:000s|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the following parameters for BLDC compressor of circuit 1:
th
4 row: pressure differential between discharge and suction.
th
5 row: pressure ratio between discharge and suction.
th
8 row: low pressure differential alarm countdown.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D27| | Input/Output D27| | Entrée/Sortie D27| | Eing./Ausg. D27|
|Controllo gas scarico | |Discharge gas control | |Contrôle gaz refoul. | |Abgasregelung |
|Circ.1 | |Circ.1 | |Circ.1 | |Circ.1 |
|Temperatura gas di | |Discharge gas | |Gaz refoulement | |Abgastemp.: 000.0°C|
|scarico: 000.0°C| |temperature: 000.0°C| |temperature: 000.0°C| | |
| | | | | | | |
|Stato: OK| |Status: OK| |Etat: OK| |Status: OK|
|Zona: Max. 120°C| |Zone: Max. 120°C| |Zone: Max. 120°C| |Zone: Max. 120°C|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the following parameters for BLDC compressor of circuit 1:
th
5 row: discharge gas temperature.
th
7 row: envelope status regarding discharge gas temperature control.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D28| | Input/Output D28| | Entrée/Sortie D28| | Eing./Ausg. D28|
|Regolazione EEV | |EEV Regulation | |Regulation EEV | |EEV-Regelung |
|Circ.1 | |Circ.1 | |Circ.1 | |Circ.1 |
|Surriscaldamento gas | |Discharge gas | |Gaz refoulement | |Abgasueberhitzung: |
|di scarico: 00.0 °C| |superheat: 00.0 °C| |surchauffe: 00.0 °C| | 00.0 °C|
| | | | | | | |
|Regolazione attiva: | |Actual working mode: | |Regulation actuel: | |Aktive regelung: |
|Surr.di aspirazione | |Suction superheat | |Surchauffe aspiration | |Sauggasueberhitz. |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the following parameters for BLDC compressor of circuit 1:
th
5 row: discharge gas superheat.
th
8 row: superheat control working mode, always on suction superheat.

131
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Ingressi/Uscite D29| | Input/Output D29| | Entrée/Sortie D29| | Eing./Ausg. D29|
|Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 |
| | | | | | | |
|Stato drive: | |Drive status: | |Etat driver: | |Antriebsstatus: |
|[104] Stop | |[104] Stop | |[104] Arret | |[104] Stopp |
|Codice allarme [105]: | |Alarm code [105]: | |Alarme code [105]: | |Alarmcode [105]: |
|0: Nessun errore | |0: No fault | |0: Pas d'erreur | |0: Kein Fehler |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the following parameters for Power+ inverter of circuit 1:
th
5 row: Power+ drive status.
th
6 row: Power + alarm code and description.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D30| | Input/Output D30| | Entrée/Sortie D30| | Eing./Ausg. D30|
|Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 |
|Velocita' rotore: | |Speed reference: | |Reference vitesse: | |Geschw.anford.: |
|[102] 000.0Hz | |[102] 000.0Hz | |[102] 000.0Hz | |[102] 000.0Hz |
|Riferimento velocita':| |Operating freq.: | |Freq. effective: | |Betriebsfreq.: |
|[125] 000.0Hz | |[125] 000.0Hz | |[125] 000.0Hz | |[125] 000.0Hz |
|Setp.freq.effettivo: | |Rotor speed: | |Vitesse rotor: | |Rotorgeschw.: |
|[132]0000rpm =000.0Hz | |[132]0000rpm =000.0Hz | |[132]0000rpm =000.0Hz | |[132]0000rpm =000.0Hz |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the following parameters for Power+ inverter of circuit 1:
th
4 row: speed reference.
th
6 row: operating frequency.
th
8 row: compressor electric motor rotor speed in rpm and Hz.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D31| | Input/Output D31| | Entrée/Sortie D31| | Eing./Ausg. D31|
|Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 |
| | | | | | | |
|Corrente motore: | |Motor current: | |Courant moteur: | |Motorstrom: |
|[109] 00.0Arms| |[109] 00.0Arms| |[109] 00.0Arms| |[109] 00.0Arms|
| | | | | | | |
|Tensione motore: | |Motor voltage: | |Tension moteur: | |Motorspannung: |
|[111] 000Vrms| |[111] 000Vrms| |[111] 000Vrms| |[111] 000Vrms|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the following parameters for Power+ inverter of circuit 1:
th
5 row: motor current.
th
8 row: motor voltage.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Ingressi/Uscite D32| | Input/Output D32| | Entrée/Sortie D32| | Eing./Ausg. D32|
|Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 | |Power+ n°1 |
| | | | | | | |
|Potenza motore: | |Motor power: | |Puiss.moteur: | | |
|[110] 0000.0kW| |[110] 0000.0kW| |[110] 0000.0kW| |[110] 0000.0kW|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask shows the following parameters for Power+ inverter of circuit 1:
th
5 row: motor power input.

132
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Temp.mandata D52| | Supply temp. D52| | Temp.approv. D52| | Vorlauftemp. D52|
| 35| | | 35| | | 35| | | 35| |
| | | | | | | | | | | |
| | --- | | | --- | | | --- | | | --- |
| | ----- -- | | | ----- -- | | | ----- -- | | | ----- -- |
| |--- -----| | |--- -----| | |--- -----| | |--- -----|
| 0|__________________| | 0|__________________| | 0|__________________| | 0|__________________|
|Att. 18.0 /<->/ 3min| |Act. 18.0 /<->/ 3min| |Act. 18.0 /<->/ 3min| |Akt. 18.0 /<->/ 3min|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Temp.ritorno D53| | Return temp. D53| | Temp.retour D53| | Rücklauftemp. D53|
| 45| | | 45| | | 45| | | 45| |
| |- | | |- | | |- | | |- |
| | - | | | - | | | - | | | - |
| | --------- ----| | | --------- ----| | | --------- ----| | | --------- ----|
| | --- | | | --- | | | --- | | | --- |
| 10|__________________| | 10|__________________| | 10|__________________| | 10|__________________|
|Att. 24.0 /<->/ 3min| |Act. 24.0 /<->/ 3min| |Act. 24.0 /<->/ 3min| |Akt. 24.0 /<->/ 3min|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Umidità D54| | Humidity D54| | Humidité D54| | Luftfeuchtigkeit D53|
|100| | |100| | |100| | |100| |
| | | | | | | | | | | |
| |-- | | |-- | | |-- | | |-- |
| | ----------------| | | ----------------| | | ----------------| | | ----------------|
| | | | | | | | | | | |
| 0|__________________| | 0|__________________| | 0|__________________| | 0|__________________|
|Att. 50.0 /<->/ 3min| |Act. 50.0 /<->/ 3min| |Act. 50.0 /<->/ 3min| |Akt. 50.0 /<->/ 3min|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
The above masks show charts for supply air temperature, return air temperature and return air humidity (if
Charts are enabled on Manufacturer Menu). Each chart is shown with a preset time window and sampling
time, but it is possible to scroll different windows using “arrow” and “enter” keys.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Modem Gsm D60| | Modem Gsm D60| | Modem Gsm D60| | Modem Gsm D60|
| | | | | | | |
|Stato: | |Status: | |Etat: | |Status: |
|Stand-by modem | |Stand-by modem | |Stand-by modem | |Stand-by modem |
| | | | | | | |
|Segnale: 80%| |Field: 80%| |Champ: 80%| |Bereich: 80%|
| | | | | | | |
|Coda SMS: 0| |SMS Queue: 0| |SMS file d’attent: 0| |SMS Schwanz: 0|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, enabled only if the GSM communication protocol is enabled, shows the GSM modem status, GSM
signal strength and number of queued SMS, i.e. waiting to be sent.

8.7 C. Clock/Scheduler
The Clock/Scheduler menu can be accessed from the main menu and is password-protected. Form this
menu, it is possible to set clock, data and to enable and configure time scheduler.
A password is required to enter Clock/Scheduler menu:
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Orologio | | Clock | | Horloge | | Uhr |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Inserire password | |Insert new Clock | |Saisir mot de passe | |Password eingeben |
|orologio (PW4): 0000| |password (PW4): 0000| |horloge (PW4): 0000| |uhr (PW4): 0000|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
The default Clock password is 0400.

133
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Orologio C1| | Clock C1| | Horloge C1| | Uhr C1|
| | | | | | | |
|MARTEDI’ | |TUESDAY | |MARDI | |DIENSTAG |
| | | | | | | |
|Data: 30/12/14| |Date: 30/12/14| |Date: 30/12/14| |Datum: 30/12/14|
| | | | | | | |
|Ora: 12:00| |Hour: 12:00| |Heure: 12:00| |Stunde: 12:00|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set date and hour.
rd
3 row: week day, it is automatically displayed when date is set.
th
5 row: set current date.
th
7 row: set current hour.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Orologio C2| | Clock C2| | Horloge C2| | Uhr C2|
| | | | | | | |
|Ora legale: ABILITA| |DST: ENABLE| |DST: ACTIVE| |Sommerzeit: AKTIVIEREN|
|Tempo transiz.: 60min| |Transition time: 60min| |Temps transit.: 60min| |Übergangs Zeit: 60min|
|Iniz.:ULTIMA DOMENICA| |Start: LAST SUNDAY | |Deb:DERNIERE DIMANCHE| |Start:LAST SONNTAG|
|in MARZO alle 03.00| |in MARCH at 03.00| |in MARS à 03.00| |in MÄRZ bei 03.00|
|Fine: ULTIMA DOMENICA| |End: LAST SUNDAY | |Fin: DERNIERE DIMANCHE| |Ende: LAST SONNTAG|
|in OTTOBRE alle 03.00| |in OCTOBER at 03.00| |in OCTOBRE à 03.00| |in OKTOBER bei 03.00|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enable automatic daylight saving time (DST) transition and to configure its parameters.
rd
3 row: enable if automatic DST transition is desired.
th
4 row: set 60 min.
th
5 row: set starting day of DST (typically last Sunday).
th
6 row: set starting month and hour of DST (typically March and 03.00).
th
7 row: set ending day of DST (typically last Sunday).
th
8 row: set ending month and hour of DST (typically October and 03.00).

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Orologio C3| | Clock C3| | Horloge C3| | Uhr C3|
|Optional addizonale | |Additional optional | |Options supplément. | |zusátzliche optionale |
| | | | | | | |
|Fasce orarie □ | |Clock scheduler □ | |Planific. horloge | |Uhr scheduler □ |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to enable unit scheduler by checking the box.
Note that this mask and all masks for scheduler configuration will not be displayed in the following cases,
because the following options are not compatible with unit scheduler:
• when Datalink p-LAN network is enabled;
• When variable set point from analogue input is enabled.

Note also that unit temperature set point for scheduler is unique, meaning that there aren’t two different set
points for return air temperature and for supply air temperature; the selection of thermoregulation type will
always be done from User menu, as described before.
Default parameters are as follow:
th
4 row: don’t enable.

134
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Orologio C4| | Clock C4| | Horloge C4| | Uhr C4|
|Giorno: LUNEDI’ | |Day: MONDAY | |Jour: LUNDI | |Tag: MONTAG |
|Copia a: MARTEDI’ NO| |Copy to: MONDAY NO| |Cop.sur: MARDI NO| |Kop. in: DIENSTAG NO|
| %rH °C| | %rH °C| | %rH °C| | %rH °C|
|F1:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F1:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F1:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F1:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0|
|F2:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F2:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F2:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F2:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0|
|F3:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F3:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F3:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F3:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0|
|F4:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F4:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F4:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0| |F4:00:00 □ 50.0 24.0|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set scheduler time bands and to copy programming of one day to another one.
nd
2 row: shows the week day, scroll with arrow keys to change it.
rd
3 row: allows to copy the displayed programmed time bands to another week day; choose the desired day
and then choose YES; a message will confirm the successful copy of time bands. Note: first program time
bands, then copy them to another day, if desired.
th th
5 to 8 row: allow to program 4 time bands for each week day. From left to right, it is possible to:
• set starting time of the time band;
• set if the unit has to be ON (checked box) or OFF (unchecked box or blank field) in the time band;
• set humidity set point for the time band, in relative humidity (rH%) or absolute humidity (g/kg)
depending on the humidity control type set from User menu;
• set temperature set point for the time band.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Orologio C5| | Clock C5| | Horloge C5| | Uhr C5|
|Periodi speciali | |Holiday period | |Périodes spéciales | |Sonderzeitráume |
| | | | | | | |
|Iniz. Fine g/Kg | |Start Stop g/Kg | |Début Fin g/Kg | |Anf. Ende g/Kg |
|--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--| |--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--| |--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--| |--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--|
|--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--| |--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--| |--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--| |--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--|
|--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--| |--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--| |--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--| |--/-- --/-- 50.0 20--|
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set 3 holiday periods and to set unit status and set points for each one; during a holiday
period, unit status and set points from time bands are ignored and the ones set for the holiday period are
considered. Leave all fields blank if it is not desired to program holiday periods.
th th
5 to 7 row: allow to program 3 holiday periods. From left to right, it is possible to:
• set starting day (from 00:00 hour) of the holiday period;
• set ending day (from 00:00 hour) of the holiday period;
• set if the unit has to be ON (checked box) or OFF (unchecked box or blank field) during the holiday
period;
• set humidity set point for the holiday period, in relative humidity (rH%) or absolute humidity (g/kg)
depending on the humidity control type set from User menu;
• set temperature set point for the holiday period.

135
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
| Orologio C6| | Clock C6| | Horloge C6| | Uhr C6|
|Giorni spec. g/Kg | |Spec.days g/Kg | |Jour.spéc. g/Kg | |Besond.Tag g/Kg |
| --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20.0| | --/-- 50.0 20.0| | --/-- 50.0 20.0|
| --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--|
| --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--|
| --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--|
| --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--|
| --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--| | --/-- 50.0 20--|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to set 6 special days and to set unit status and set points for each one; during a special day,
unit status and set points from time bands are ignored and the ones set for the special day are considered.
Leave all fields blank if it is not desired to program special days.
rd th
3 to 8 row: allow to program 6 special days. From left to right, it is possible to:
• set starting day (from 00:00 hour) of the special day;
• set ending day (from 00:00 hour) of the special day;
• set if the unit has to be ON (checked box) or OFF (unchecked box or blank field) during the special
day;
• set humidity set point for the special day, in relative humidity (rH%) or absolute humidity (g/kg)
depending on the humidity control type set from User menu;
• set temperature set point for the special day.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Orologio C7| | Clock C7| | Horloge C7| | Uhr C7|
| | | | | | | |
| Modifica | | Change | | Changer | | Wechseln |
| password | | clock | | horloge | | uhr |
| orologio | | password | | password | | password |
| | | | | | | |
|Inserire nuova | |Insert new | |Saisir nouveau mot | |Neues Password |
|password (PW4): 0004| |password (PW4): 0004| |de passe (PW4): 0004| |Eing. (PW4): 0004|
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask allows to change Clock password.

8.8 B. Setpoint
The Setpoint menu can be accessed from the main menu without any password;. Form this menu, it is
possible to change unit set points. Different masks and set points are displayed, depending on
thermoregulation on air return temperature or on air supply temperature and on humidity regulation on relative
humidity or absolute humidity. Set point limits are defined on User menu.

Setpoint B1 Setpoint B1 Point de consigne B1 Sollwert B1

24.0°C 24.0°C 24.0°C 24.0°C

50.0%rH 50.0%rH 50.0%rH 50.0%rH

This mask is displayed if thermoregulation on return air temperature is active (it can be selected from User
menu) and shows return air temperature set point and humidity set point, in absolute humidity (g/kg) or in
relative humidity (%rH) depending on humidity regulation selected from User menu.
Note that:
• if set point by analogue input is enabled (from Manufacturer menu), return air temperature set point
will be read-only;
• if Scheduler is enabled, return air temperature can be modified only by Scheduler menu masks.

136
Setpoint B2 Setpoint B2 Point de consigne B2 Sollwert B2

Sup.:18.0°C Sup.:18.0°C Sup.:18.0°C Sup.:18.0°C

Ret.:24.0°C Ret.:24.0°C Ret.:24.0°C Ret.:24.0°C
50.0%rH 50.0%rH 50.0%rH 50.0%rH
This mask is displayed if thermoregulation on supply air temperature is active (it can be selected from User
menu); an arrow indicates that thermoregulation is on supply temperature, return temperature is displayed
anyway because supply air fan regulation will always refer to this set point value for POC fan controlling
system. Displayed information are supply air temperature set point (unit thermoregulation will refer to this set
point value), return air temperature set point (supply air fan regulation will refer to this set point value for POC
fan controlling system) and humidity set point, in absolute humidity (g/kg) or in relative humidity (%rH)
depending on humidity regulation selected from User menu.
Note that:
• if set point by analogue input is enabled (from Manufacturer menu), supply air temperature set point
will be read-only;
• if Scheduler is enabled, supply air temperature can be modified only by Scheduler menu masks.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Set point B4| | Set point B4| | Set point B4| | Set point B4|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
|Setpoint manuale vent.| |Manual fan set point | |Point c. manuel vent. | |Sollwert man. Gebláse |
| | | | | | | |
| 050.0%| | 050.0%| | 050.0%| | 050.0%|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask is displayed only if manual supply air fan control (fixed speed) is enabled from Manufacturer menu
and is used for setting fan set point.

WARNING!
If using manual fan speed, always be sure that fan speed set point is inside unit air
flow limits; using values of air flow not recommended by Manufacturer can cause
problems to unit.

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Set point B5| | Set point B5| | Set point B5| | Set point B5|
|Logica PRC | |PRC logic | |Logique PRC | |PRC Logik |
| | | | | | | |
|Setpoint 20Pa| |Setpoint 20Pa| |Point de cons. 20Pa| |Sollwert 20Pa|
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
This mask, displayed only if PRC logic for supply air fans has been enabled on Manufacturer Menu, allows to
set the supply air pressure set point.

137
8.9 A. Unit On/Off
The On/Off unit menu can be accessed from the main menu without any password. Form this menu, it is
possible to switch ON and OFF the unit, except if ON/OFF from digital input or from supervisor is enabled
from User menu, in this case it

+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+

| Unità On/Off A1| | On/Off Unit A1| | Unité On/Off A1| | On/Off Unit A1|
|Stato attuale: | |Curr.Status: | |État actuel: | |Aktueller Status: |
|Unità ON | |Unit ON | |Unité ON | |Einheit EIN |
|Cambia in: | |Change to: | |Change en: | |Wechseln auf: |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
+----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+ +----------------------+
rd
3 row shows current unit status, which is displayed also in the last row of main mask; refer to main mask
description paragraph for possible unit statuses.
Press ENTER key and use arrow keys to change unit status, then press ENTER key again to confirm.

8.10 i. info menu (or Main menu)

The info menu (or Main menu) provides a summary of the current operating conditions and of main unit
parameters. Different masks and parameters are displayed, depending on the unit configuration.

2 4

5 6

7 8

3
Main mask contains information about current date and time, unit status, active devices, return and supply air
temperature, return humidity (if the humidity probe is enabled), air flow (if differential air pressure transducer
is enabled), unit network address; some of these information are given with graphic items.
One between return and supply air temperature is displayed with bigger characters, indicating which
temperature is controlled by unit thermoregulation; this selection can be done from User menu.
Main mask zone and displayed information are:

1. current date, week day and time.

2. active requests with different icons:

Cooling

Heating

Dehumidification

Humidification

138
3. A schematic representation of the close control unit. When fans are running, an animation on the top of the
drawing symbolize the air flowing through the unit cabinet. When compressors are OFF unit panels are
closed, while when compressors are ON panels are open and different icons are displayed, depending on the
number and type of compressors running:
BLDC compressor icon
ON/OFF compressor icon

4. additional actuators that are active:

st
Electrical heater (1 stage)

nd
Electrical heater (2 stage)

rd
Electrical heater (3 stage with binary management)

Modulating electrical heaters, with a bar showing the percentage of heating power

Hot water coil ON/OFF valve

Hot water coil modulating valve, with a bar showing the valve opening grade

Hot gas post heating with ON/OFF valve

Hot gas post heating modulating valve, with a bar showing the valve opening grade
Dual Cooling modulating valve, with a bar showing the valve % opening

(water) Free Cooling modulating valve, with a bar showing the valve % opening

(air) Free Cooling modulating damper, with a bar showing the damper % opening

5. return air temperature.

6. supply air temperature.

7. return air humidity, which can be displayed in relative humidity (%rH) or in absolute humidity (g/kg),
depending on humidity regulation selected from User menu.

8. Supply air flow, displayed only if differential air pressure transducer is present and is enabled from
Manufacturer menu.

9. Last row shows on the left corner the info icon, indicating the possibility of scrolling the info menu with
down arrow key, current unit status and on the right corner the unit Datalink network address.
Current unit status can be one of the following:

139
Unit status Description
Unit ON Unit is ON
OFFbyKEY Unit is OFF by keyboard
OFFbySCH Unit is OFF by scheduler time bands
OFFbyDIN Unit is OFF by digital input
OFFbyNET Unit is OFF by Datalink network rotation
OFFbyBMS Unit is OFF by BMS supervisor
OFFbyALR Unit is OFF by serious alarm
Manual Manual testing mode is active (from Service menu)

Moreover, different messages are displayed in the last row of main mask, giving information about unit
operation; these messages roll on the same mask row with the unit status message. Possible displayed
messages are:

Message Description
Unit is waiting the opening of anti-recirculation damper (only if this option is
Open damper
enabled) to start supply air fans
Lim.Sup.Req. Limitation of supply air temperature is active
Supply air flow is limited to dehumidification value because dehumidification
Lim.air sup.fan
request is active
C1 Profiling BLDC compressor of cooling circuit 1 is starting
C1 Equalization Circuit 1 is waiting for high and low pressure equalization to start compressors
Pressure difference between HP and LP of circuit 1 is over the maximum limit for
C1 Max DP
compressor starting
C1 oil return Oil return cycle is active on circuit 1 (for BLDC compressors)
C1 OilRec.OnOff Oil recovery cycle is active on circuit 1 (for ON/OFF compressors)
C2 Profiling BLDC compressor of cooling circuit 2 is starting
C2 Equalization Circuit 2 is waiting for high and low pressure equalization to start compressors
Pressure difference between HP and LP of circuit 2 is over the maximum threshold
C2 Max DP
for compressor starting
C2 oil return Oil return cycle is active on circuit 2 (for BLDC compressors)
C2 OilRec.OnOff Oil recovery cycle is active on circuit 2 (for ON/OFF compressors)
Frc.ON BckUnit The unit has been forced in ON status by Datalink local network request
Light Alarm A non-serious alarm (warning) has been triggered
Serious Alarm A serious alarm has been triggered

Informazioni i1 Information i1 Information i1 Informationen i1

TRet.24.0°C TRet.24.0°C TRet.24.0°C TRet.24.0°C

TSup.24.0°C TSup.24.0°C TSup.24.0°C TSup.24.0°C
TAvg.24.0°C TAvg.24.0°C TAvg.24.0°C TAvg.24.0°C

50.0%rH 50.0%rH 50.0%rH 50.0%rH

This mask displays return and supply air temperature and humidity; there are also 2 graphics showing the
percentage request of cooling/heating and humidification/dehumidification.
When Datalink network and distributed control are enabled, it will be displayed also the average return
temperature calculated as a mean of all temperatures read by units that are part of the network.
Note that humidity value is displayed only if humidity probe is enabled, moreover it can be displayed in
absolute value (%rH) or in relative value (g/kg), depending on the humidity control mode set on User menu.

Informazioni i3 Information i3 Information i3 Informationen i3

Ventil.di mandata Supply air fan Venti.d’alimentation Teillüfter

10800 m3/h 10800 m3/h 10800 m3/h 10800 m3/h

This mask displays air flow of supply air fan, if differential air pressure transducer is enabled, while the
graphic shows the percentage request of ventilation.

140
Informazioni i4 Information i4 Information i4 Informationen i4

Set: 30Pa Set: 30Pa Set: 30Pa Set: 30Pa

20Pa 20Pa 20Pa 20Pa

80% 80% 80% 80%

This mask is shown only of the PRC control mode of supply air fans is enabled, and indicates the pressure
set point (in bigger font), the pressure actually measured from the differential pressure transducer (or the
average calculated over the units connected in local Datalink network with distributed control enabled), the
requested % ventilation (on the right side) and eventually the % output of the supply fans (below).

Informazioni i6 Information i6 Information i6 Informationen i6

Dry cooler Dry cooler Dry cooler Dry cooler

Tdry: 7.0°C Tdry: 7.0°C Tdry: 7.0°C Tdry: 7.0°C
Tset: 10.0°C Tset: 10.0°C Tset: 10.0°C Tset: 10.0°C

This mask, displayed only if the drycooler for water Free Cooling is enabled, shows the outlet water
temperature from the drycooler, the set point water outlet from drycooler, while the chart shows the drycooler
fan percent speed.

Following i7 mask carries changing information according to additional cooling device that has been enabled.

Informazioni i7 Information i7 Information i7 Informationen i7

Tin:7.0°C Tin:7.0°C Tin:7.0°C Tin:7.0°C

Tret:25.0°C Tret:25.0°C Tret:25.0°C Tret:25.0°C

Tdew:13.9°C Tdew:13.9°C Tdew:13.9°C Tdew:13.9°C
Tsup:16.0°C Tsup:16.0°C Tsup:16.0°C Tsup:16.0°C
Hum.:50.0%rH Hum.:50.0%rH Hum.:50.0%rH Hum.:50.0%rH
This mask, shown as above if the Dual Cooling is enabled as additional cooling device, shows the following
information:
nd rd
2 and 3 row: to the left, inlet water temperature to Dual Cooling coil; to the right, Dual Cooling status
th
5 row: dry bulb return air temperature
th
6 row: wet bulb return air temperature
th
7 row: dry bulb supply air temperature
th
8 row: to the left, return air humidity; to the right, two charts show the % operation of Dual Cooling and
compressors.

Informazioni i7 Information i7 Information i7 Informationen i7

Tin:7.0°C Tin:7.0°C Tin:7.0°C Tin:7.0°C

Tret:25.0°C Tret:25.0°C Tret:25.0°C Tret:25.0°C

Tdew:13.9°C Tdew:13.9°C Tdew:13.9°C Tdew:13.9°C
Tsup:16.0°C Tsup:16.0°C Tsup:16.0°C Tsup:16.0°C
Hum.:50.0%rH Hum.:50.0%rH Hum.:50.0%rH Hum.:50.0%rH
This mask, shown as above if the water Free Cooling is enabled as additional cooling device, shows following
information:
nd rd
2 and 3 row: to the left, inlet water temperature to Free Cooling coil; to the right, a chart showing Free
Cooling status
th
5 row: dry bulb return air temperature
th
6 row: wet bulb return air temperature
th
7 row: dry bulb supply air temperature
th
8 row: to the left, return air humidity; to the right, two charts show the % operation of Free Cooling and
compressors.

141
Informazioni i7 Information i7 Information i7 Informationen i7

Text:12.0°C Text:12.0°C Text:12.0°C Text:12.0°C

Tret:25.0°C Tret:25.0°C Tret:25.0°C Tret:25.0°C

Tsup:16.0°C Tsup:16.0°C Tsup:16.0°C Tsup:16.0°C

Hum.:50.0%rH Hum.:50.0%rH Hum.:50.0%rH Hum.:50.0%rH
This mask, shown as above if the air Free Cooling is enabled as additional cooling device, shows following
information:
nd rd
2 and 3 row: to the left, external air temperature inlet to Free Cooling damper; to the right, a chart showing
Free Cooling status
th
5 row: dry bulb return air temperature
th
7 row: dry bulb supply air temperature
th
8 row: to the left, return air humidity; to the right, two charts show the % operation of Free Cooling and
compressors.

Informazioni i9 Information i9 Information i9 Informationen i9

Condens.ad acqua Water condens. Condens. eau Wasserverflüssiger
24.0barg 24.0barg 24.0barg 24.0barg
41.4°C >Wait< 41.4°C >Wait< 41.4°C >Wait< 41.4°C >Wait<

C1: 24.0barg 41.4°C C1: 24.0barg 41.4°C C1: 24.0barg 41.4°C C1: 24.0barg 41.4°C
C2: 18.0barg 30.3°C C2: 18.0barg 30.3°C C2: 18.0barg 30.3°C C2: 18.0barg 30.3°C
This mask displays condensing pressure and temperature and output (in percentage) for water condensing
valve, if water condensing is enabled.
th
4 row: current condensing pressure on which regulation is made
th
6 row: to the left, the saturated condensing temperature; to the right, under the valve symbol, the valve
status
th
7 row: condensing pressure and saturated temperature of circuit 1
th
8 row: condensing pressure and saturated temperature of circuit 2
In case of units with two refrigerant circuits, the condensation control valve is single and therefore the valve
th
will regulate on the greater among the the pressures of the two circuits, i.e. the value shown on 4 row.

Informazioni i10 Information i10 Information i10 Informationen i10

Cond.remoti Condens. Condens. Kondens.
Vent.1 Fan 1 Vent.1 Luft.1
18.0barg 18.0barg 18.0barg 18.0barg

Condens. Condens. Condens. Condens.

Vent.2 Fan 2 Vent.2 Luft.2
18.0barg 18.0barg 18.0barg 18.0barg
This mask displays condensing pressure and output (graphically and in percentage) for remote condenser
fans of circuit 1 and 2 depending on unit configuration, if air condensing is enabled.

142
Informazioni i20 Information i20 Information i20 Informationen i20
Rich.comp.: 0.0% Comp.req.: 0.0% Demande: 0.0% Anforder.: 0.0%
Cir.1: Cir.1: Cir.1: Kreis1:
Z=6 Z=6 Z=6 Z=6
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
0.0rps 0.0rps 0.0rps 0.0rps
180s 180s 180s 180s
180s 180s 180s 180s
Informazioni i21 Information i21 Information i21 Informationen i21
Rich.comp.: 0.0% Comp.req.: 0.0% Rich.comp.: 0.0% Rich.comp.: 0.0%
Cir.1: Cir.2: Cir.1: Cir.2: Cir.1: Cir.2: Kreis1: Kreis2:
Z=6 Z=6 Z=6 Z=6
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
0.0rps 0.0rps 0.0rps 0.0rps 0.0rps 0.0rps 0.0rps 0.0rps
180s 180s 180s 180s 180s 180s 180s 180s
180s 180s 180s 180s 180s 180s 180s 180s
These masks display the status of compressors and parameters for BLDC and ON/OFF compressors, for
units with 1 or 2 refrigerant circuits respectively, depending on unit configuration.
On the left side of the mask, a scheme of the unit is displayed, graphically showing how many compressors
are running.
nd
2 row shows the request sent to compressors.
th
4 row shows envelope status for BLDC compressor.
th
5 row shows the request sent to BLDC compressor, which can be different from the request sent to
compressors due to the envelope status of BLDC compressor.
th
6 row shows shows BLDC compressor speed in rps (revolution per second).
th
7 row shows the countdown for BLDC compressor restart.
th
8 row shows the countdown for ON/OFF compressor restart.

Informazioni i22 Information i22 Information i22 Informationen i22

Dati inviluppo cir.1 Envelope data cir.1 Données envel. cir.1 Kurvendaten Kreisl.1
Pc: 24.0bar 41.4°C Pc: 24.0bar 41.4°C Pc: 24.0bar 41.4°C Pc: 24.0bar 41.4°C
Pe: 10.0bar 10.5°C Pe: 10.0bar 10.5°C Pe: 10.0bar 10.5°C Pe: 10.0bar 10.5°C
Veloc.rotore: 90.0rps Rotor speed: 90.0rps Vitesse rotor: 90.0rps Rotorgeschw.: 90.0rps
Temp.scarico OK Discharge temp. OK Temp.refoulem. OK Zufuhrtemp. OK
Dentro inviluppo Inside envelope Dans k’enveloppe Innerh.huellkurve
Allarme tra: 60s Alarm countdown: 60s Alarme entre: 60s Alarm zwischen: 60s

Informazioni i24 Information i24 Information i24 Informationen i24

Dati inviluppo cir.2 Envelope data cir.2 Données envel. cir.2 Kurvendaten Kreisl.2
Pc: 24.0bar 41.4°C Pc: 24.0bar 41.4°C Pc: 24.0bar 41.4°C Pc: 24.0bar 41.4°C
Pe: 10.0bar 10.5°C Pe: 10.0bar 10.5°C Pe: 10.0bar 10.5°C Pe: 10.0bar 10.5°C

These masks display information relevant to refrigerant circuit 1 and 2 (if present).
nd
3 row shows condensing pressure (measured) and temperature (converted).
rd
4 row shows evaporating pressure (measured) and temperature (converted).
th
5 row shows BLDC compressor speed in rps (revolution per second), only for circuit 1
th
6 row shows the status of discharge temperature, only for BLDC compressor of circuit 1
th
7 row shows BLDC compressor envelope status, only for circuit 1
th
8 row shows the BLDC compressor alarm countdown, which starts in case an alarm with a delay is going to
be triggered, for example an out of envelope alarm.

143
 EVO n° 1 i25
SH: 5.0 K
13.0°C

240stp
50%
EVD: 9.2barg
On 8.0°C

EVO n° 1 i26
SH: 5.0 K
13.0°C

240stp
50%
EVD: 9.2barg
On 8.0°C
These masks display information about the electronic expansion valve of circuit 1 and 2, if present.
nd
2 row shows calculated suction superheating.
rd
Then a synoptic of EEV is displayed, with the measured suction temperature on the right side of 3 row.
Below the EEV valve symbol, the following information are displayed: position of the EEV in steps, opening
percentage, status of the EEV.
On the right side, suction pressure (measured) and suction temperature (calculated, hence without
superheating) are displayed.

Informazioni i31 Information i31 Information i31 Informationen i31

DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET.

DISTR.CONTR. DISTR.CONTR. DISTR.CONTR. DISTR.CONTR.

Ts: 18.0°C Ts: 18.0°C Ts: 18.0°C Ts: 18.0°C
Tr: 24.0°C Tr: 24.0°C Tr: 24.0°C Tr: 24.0°C
50.0%rH 50.0%rH 50.0%rH 50.0%rH

Informazioni i32 Information i32 Information i32 Informationen i32

DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET.

DISTR.CONTR. DISTR.CONTR. DISTR.CONTR. DISTR.CONTR.

Ts: 18.0°C Ts: 18.0°C Ts: 18.0°C Ts: 18.0°C
Tr: 24.0°C Tr: 24.0°C Tr: 24.0°C Tr: 24.0°C
50.0%rH 50.0%rH 50.0%rH 50.0%rH
Masks i31 and i32 are displayed only on unit with p-LAN network address 1 (master) if Datalink network is
enabled and show the status of all connected units:

Unit OFF by network Unit is forced ON by low or high

temperature
Unit ON by network Unit is working independently from unit
rotation
Unit is in stand-by Unit is working alone, meaning that it is
connected to the local network but it
doesn’t participate to units rotation
Unit is offline

The lower right part of the mask is displayed only if distributed control is enabled, showing supply
temperature, return temperature and humidity average values.

144
Informazioni i33 Information i33 Information i33 Informationen i33
DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET.
Contaore unità Units working hours Compteur horaire unité Stundenzähler Einheit
U1:000000h U6:000000h U1:000000h U6:000000h U1:000000h U6:000000h U1:000000h U6:000000h
U2:000000h U7:000000h U2:000000h U7:000000h U2:000000h U7:000000h U2:000000h U7:000000h
U3:000000h U8:000000h U3:000000h U8:000000h U3:000000h U8:000000h U3:000000h U8:000000h
U4:000000h U9:000000h U4:000000h U9:000000h U4:000000h U9:000000h U4:000000h U9:000000h
U5:000000h U5:000000h U5:000000h U5:000000h

Informazioni i34 Information i34 Information i34 Informationen i34

DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET.
Contaore unità Units working hours Compteur horaire unité Stundenzähler Einheit
U10:000000h U15:000000h U10:000000h U15:000000h U10:000000h U15:000000h U10:000000h U15:000000h
U11:000000h U16:000000h U11:000000h U16:000000h U11:000000h U16:000000h U11:000000h U16:000000h
U12:000000h U12:000000h U12:000000h U12:000000h
U13:000000h U13:000000h U13:000000h U13:000000h
U14:000000h U14:000000h U14:000000h U14:000000h
Masks i33 and i34 are displayed only on unit with p-LAN network address 1 if Datalink network is enabled and
rotation based upon working hours is enabled and show working hours of each unit connected in Datalink
network.

Informazioni i35 Information i33 Information i33 Informationen i33

DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET.

Rotazione:1g. 20:00 Rotation: 1day 20:00 Rotation: 1our 20:00 Rotation: 1Tag 20:00
Countdown:0g. 0180m Countdown:0day 0180m Countdown:0jour 0180m Countdown:0Tag 0180m

Informazioni i35 Information i35 Information i35 Informationen i35

DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET. DATALINK NET.

Rotation time: 00480m Temps rotation: 00480m Drehzeit: 00480m

Tempo rotazione:00480m
Countdown: 00060m Countdown: 00060m Countdown: 00060m
Countdown: 00060m

These masks are displayed only on unit with p-LAN network address 1 if Datalink network is enabled and
daily rotation is enabled and shows following information:
• If daily rotation is enabled, it shows rotation time and countdown for next rotation (first mask)
• If working hours rotation is enabled, it shows rotation interval and countdown for net rotation (second
mask).

Informazioni i36 Information i36 Information i36 Informationen i36

DISTR.CONTROL DISTR.CONTROL DISTR.CONTROL DISTR.CONTROL
T:25.0°C T:25.0°C T:25.0°C T:25.0°C
A:24.5°C D: 0.5°C A:24.5°C D: 0.5°C A:24.5°C D: 0.5°C A:24.5°C D: 0.5°C

H:50.0%rH H:50.0%rH H:50.0%rH H:50.0%rH

A:50.0&rH D:00.0%Rh A:50.0&rH D:00.0%rH A:50.0&rH D:00.0%rH A:50.0&rH D:00.0%rH

This mask is displayed only on unit with p-LAN network address 1 if Datalink network is enabled and
distributed control is enabled and shows unit read (T) and average (A) temperature, read (H) and average (A)
humidity and delta (D) between read and average values. Arrows indicate that thermoregulation and humidity
regulation is performed considering average values of temperature and humidity, calculated as mean of
values read by units connected in local network.

145
Informazioni i37 Information i37 Information i37 Informationen i37

Forza unità riserva ON Force ON backup unit Forç.unité backup ON Zwang. Einh. Backup ON
T:25.5°C 180s T:25.5°C 180s T:25.5°C 180s T:25.5°C 180s

20.0°C Set 28.0°C 20.0°C Set 28.0°C 20.0°C Set 28.0°C 20.0°C Set 28.0°C
This mask is displayed only on unit with p-LAN network address 1 if Datalink network is enabled and unit
forcing function is enabled and shows air temperature, delay for forcing backup unit, low and high
temperature thresholds for forcing backup unit, a message indicating if unit is in forcing status by high
temperature (“Force by HT”) or by low temperature (“Force by LT”).

146
9 ALARMS
When an alarm is triggered, the terminal connected to the pCO board lights up the red LED below the ALARM
key and energises the warning digital output (NO7) or the alarm digital output (NO8). Press the ALARM key to
display the active alarm; to reset an active alarm, press for at least 3 seconds the ALARM key and then press
ENTER key when required; note that an alarm can be reset only if the conditions allow this, i.e. if the relative
digital input is closed or if the value that have caused the alarm has decreased below its alarm threshold.
Last 100 alarms triggered are stored into the data logger, accessible from the corresponding menu.

9.1 Alarm table

The following table describes the meaning of each alarm, its main possible causes, some brief
troubleshooting suggestions and the devices that are shutdown when the alarm is triggered.
The type of alarm reset is described on the “RES” column:
• A = automatic, meaning that when the alarm condition is disappeared the alarm resets automatically;
• AC = automatic controlled, the alarm reset is automatic for a certain number of retries in a
determined time and then becomes manual;
• M = manual reset from unit keyboard or from supervisor.

On “Unit OFF” column, it is described whether the alarm stops or not the unit:
• Yes = the alarm stops the unit;
• No = the alarm does not stop the unit but stops only the mentioned devices;
• Cfg = it is possible to choose from User menu whether the alarm has to stop the unit or not.

UNIT DEVICES
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING RES
OFF SHUTDOWN
Remove cause of smoke/fire.
Smoke/Fire alarm is active from
A001 Smoke/Fire Check smoke/fire sensor and cabling. M Yes All
smoke/fire sensor (digital input)
Check pCO board.
Remove water leakages.
Water leakage alarm is active from Check water leakage sensor and
A002 Water leakage M Cfg All / None
water leakage detector (digital input) cabling.
Check pCO board.
Check supply air fans.
Air flow is below minimum threshold.
Check air flow switch.
A003 Air Flow This alarm is triggered by air flow M Yes All
Check position of sensing pipes for air
switch
flow switch.
Check operating conditions.
Check condensing pressure.
Check refrigerant charge.
High Pressure Switch High pressure alarm of cooling circuit Check remote condenser or water Compressors of
A004 M No
(Circ.1) 1 from high pressure switch condensing valve and relative settings. circuit 1
Manually reset high pressure switch
before resetting the alarm from
display.
Check operating conditions.
Check condensing pressure.
High Condensing High pressure alarm of cooling circuit Compressors of
A005 Check refrigerant charge. AC No
Pressure (Circ.1) 1 from high pressure transducer circuit 1
Check remote condenser or water
condensing valve and relative settings.
Check operating conditions.
Low Evaporation Low pressure alarm of cooling circuit 1 Check evaporating pressure. Compressors of
A006 AC No
Pressure (Circ.1) from low pressure transducer Check refrigerant charge. circuit 1
Check expansion valve.
Check operating conditions.
Electrical motor overheating (thermal
On/Off Compressor 2 Check motor wirings and absorbed Compressor 2
A007 protection open) of ON/OFF M No
Thermal Prot. (Circ.1) current. of circuit 1
compressor of circuit 1
Check discharge temperature.

147
 UNIT DEVICES
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING RES
OFF SHUTDOWN
Clean or replace air filters.
Clogged air filter alarm from dirty filter Check dirty filter switch.
A008 Air Filter Clogged M No None
switch (digital input) Check position of sensing pipes for
dirty filter switch.
Thermal load too high.
High Return Air High return air temperature threshold
A009 Check probe and wiring. A No None
Temperature has been exceeded
Check alarm threshold.
Thermal load too low.
Low Return Air Low return air temperature threshold
A010 Check probe and wiring. A No None
Temperature has been exceeded
Check alarm threshold.
Latent load too high.
High return humidity threshold has
A011 High Return Humidity Check probe and wiring. A No None
been exceeded
Check alarm threshold.
Latent load too low.
Low return humidity threshold has
A012 Low Return Humidity Check probe and wiring. A No None
been exceeded
Check alarm threshold.
Check pCO control board.
Clock Board fault or not
A013 Fault on pCO internal clock board Reboot pCO control board. A No None
connected
Replace pCO control board.
Check pCO control board.
A014 Extended memory fault Fault on pCO extended memory Reboot pCO control board. A No None
Replace pCO control board.
Thermoregulatio
Check probe and wiring.
Return air temperature probe (U5) n on return air
Probe U5 fault or not Check probe parameters.
A015 faulty or not connected or reading a A No temperature and
connected Replace probe.
value outside of its limits corresponding
Check pCO board.
devices
Thermoregulatio
Check probe and wiring.
Supply air temperature probe (U4) n on supply air
Probe U4 fault or not Check probe parameters.
A016 faulty or not connected or reading a A No temperature and
connected Replace probe.
value outside of its limits corresponding
Check pCO board.
devices
Check probe and wiring. Humidity control
Humidity probe (U3) faulty or not
Probe U3 fault or not Check probe parameters. and
A017 connected or reading a value outside A No
connected Replace probe. corresponding
of its limits
Check pCO board. devices
Loss of Oil Return
A018 Not used.
BLDC (Circ.1)
Loss of Oil Return
A019 Not used.
Fixed Compressor 1
Check motor wirings.
Check operating conditions.
BLDC compressor has failed its start,
Compressor start fail Check refrigerant charge. Compressors of
A020 due to low differential pressure AC No
BLDC (Circ.1) Check refrigerant piping layout and circuit 1
between HP and LP
diameters (for air condensed units).
Check cooling circuit.
Check operating conditions.
BLDC compressor has worked outside
Check condensing and evaporating
Envelope alarm (Circ.1) its envelope for a time greater than its Compressors of
A021 pressures. M No
zone: limit (see relative paragraph for circuit 1
Check refrigerant charge.
envelope zone description)
Check EEV and relative parameters.
Check operating conditions.
High discharge gas Refrigerant discharge temperature is Compressors of
A022 Check refrigerant charge. A No
temperature (Circ.1) over the threshold limit circuit 1
Check discharge superheating.
Check operating conditions.
The pressure differential between HP
Low press.differential Check condensing and evaporating Compressors of
A023 and LP is too low, thus not ensuring A No
insuff.lubrication pressures. circuit 1
correct BLDC compressor lubrication
Check refrigerant charge.

148
 UNIT DEVICES
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING RES
OFF SHUTDOWN
Troubles on the serial connection
between pCO board and Power+ Check power supply to the Power+
inverter. inverter.
Power supply to Power+ is missing. Check serial connection between pCO
Inverter model not
High pressure switch intervention has board and Power+ inverter. Compressors of
A024 compatible! Power+ M No
cut off power supply to Power + Check Power+ wirings. circuit 1
only allowed
inverter through the safety torque-off Check high pressure switch.
input. Replace Power+ inverter.
Troubles on Power+ inverter Check pCO board.
programming.
Power+ inverter of circuit 1 is offline,
Check power supply to the Power+
due to power supply cut-off or missing
inverter.
serial communication between pCO
Check serial connection between pCO
board and Power+. Compressors of
A025 Power+ (Circ.1) off line board and Power+ inverter. A No
High pressure switch intervention has circuit 1
Check Power+ wirings.
cut off power supply to Power +
Check high pressure switch.
inverter through the safety torque-off
Replace Power+ inverter.
input.
Alarm of Power+ inverter of circuit 1,
Power+ (Circ.1) alarm Refer to Power+ alarm table (see next Compressors of
A026 with alarm description that vary M No
code paragraph) circuit 1
depending on the triggered alarm
Power+ inverter of circuit 2 is offline,
Check power supply to the Power+
due to power supply cut-off or missing
inverter.
serial communication between pCO
Check serial connection between pCO
board and Power+. Compressors of
A027 Power+ (Circ.2) off line board and Power+ inverter. A No
High pressure switch intervention has circuit 2
Check Power+ wirings.
cut off power supply to Power +
Check high pressure switch.
inverter through the safety torque-off
Replace Power+ inverter.
input.
Alarm of Power+ inverter of circuit 2,
Power+ (Circ.2) alarm Refer to Power+ alarm table (see next Compressors of
A028 with alarm description that vary M No
code paragraph) circuit 2
depending on the triggered alarm
Check operating conditions.
Low pressure transducer S1, Check evaporating pressure.
EVD (Circ.1) Probe S1 connected to EVD EVO driver, is Check refrigerant charge. Compressors of
A029 A No
alarm reading a pressure outside its Check probe S1 and its wiring. circuit 1
operating limits Check probe S1 parameters.
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check operating conditions.
Check evaporating
Suction temperature probe S2,
pressure/temperature.
EVD (Circ.1) Probe S2 connected to EVD EVO driver, is Compressors of
A030 Check refrigerant charge. A No
alarm reading a temperature outside its circuit 1
Check probe S2 and its wiring.
operating limits
Check probe S2 parameters.
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check operating conditions.
High pressure transducer S3, Check condensing pressure.
EVD (Circ.1) Probe S3 connected to EVD EVO driver, is Check refrigerant charge. Compressors of
A031 A No
alarm reading a pressure outside its Check probe S3 and its wiring. circuit 1
operating limits Check probe S3 parameters.
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check operating conditions.
Check condensing
Discharge temperature probe S4,
pressure/temperature.
EVD (Circ.1) Probe S4 connected to EVD EVO driver, is Compressors of
A032 Check refrigerant charge. A No
alarm reading a temperature outside its circuit 1
Check probe S4 and its wiring.
operating limits
Check probe S4 parameters.
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check operating conditions.
Check evaporating
EVD (Circ.1) Low Suction superheating of circuit 1 is pressure/temperature. Compressors of
A033 A No
superheat below the limit threshold Check refrigerant charge. circuit 1
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check EEV parameters.

149
 UNIT DEVICES
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING RES
OFF SHUTDOWN
Check operating conditions.
Check evaporating
EVD (Circ.1) Low Evaporating temperature of circuit 1 is
pressure/temperature. Compressors of
A034 evap.temperature below the minimum limit threshold A No
Check refrigerant charge. circuit 1
(LOP) (LOP)
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check EEV parameters.
Check operating conditions.
Check evaporating
Evaporating temperature of circuit 1 is
EVD (Circ1) High evap. pressure/temperature. Compressors of
A035 above the maximum limit threshold A No
temperature (MOP) Check refrigerant charge. circuit 1
(MOP)
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check EEV parameters.
Check operating conditions.
Condensing temperature of circuit 1 is Check condensing
EVD (Circ.1) High above the maximum limit threshold. pressure/temperature. Compressors of
A036 A No
cond.temp. (HiTcond) This alarm is used only with ON/OFF Check refrigerant charge. circuit 1
compressors and EVD EVO driver. Check EVD EVO driver.
Check EEV parameters.
Reboot unit control.
EVD (Circ.1) Alarm Internal memory of EVD EVO driver of Compressors of
A037 If the problem persists, replace EVD M No
EEPROM circuit 1 is faulty circuit 1
EVO driver.
Reboot unit control.
EVD (Circ.1) EEV Compressors of
A038 EEV motor is faulty. If the problem persists, replace EEV or M No
motor err. circuit 1
EVD EVO driver.
Check serial connection.
Check power supply to EVD EVO
EVD (Circ.1) Driver Serial connection between pCO board Compressors of
A039 driver. A No
offline and EVD EVO driver is faulty circuit 1
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check pCO board.
Check operating conditions.
Check evaporating
EVD (Circ.1) Low Evaporating temperature of circuit 1 is pressure/temperature. Compressors of
A040 A No
suction temperature below the maximum limit threshold Check refrigerant charge. circuit 1
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check EEV parameters.
Check EVD EVO backup battery
EVD (Circ.1) Battery EVD EVO backup battery module of Compressors of
A041 module. M No
discharge circuit 1 is low circuit 1
Check power supply and wirings.
EVD (Circ.1) Incompl. EEV of circuit 1 is not completely Check EEV and its wirings. Compressors of
A042 A No
valve closing closed Check EVD EVO driver. circuit 1
Reboot unit.
Check EVD EVO driver.
EVD (Circ.1) Firmware Firmware of EVD EVO of circuit 1 is Check serial communication and Compressors of
A043 M No
not compatible not compatible or corrupted wiring. circuit 1
Restore default parameters.
Check pCO board.
Reboot unit.
Check EVD EVO driver.
EVD (Circ.1) EVD EVO parameters are not correctly Check serial communication and Compressors of
A044 M No
Configuration error configured wiring. circuit 1
Restore default parameters.
Check pCO board.
Check operating conditions.
Low pressure transducer S1, Check evaporating pressure.
EVD (Circ.2) Probe S1 connected to EVD EVO driver, is Check refrigerant charge. Compressors of
A045 A No
alarm reading a pressure outside its Check probe S1 and its wiring. circuit 2
operating limits Check probe S1 parameters.
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check operating conditions.
Check evaporating
Suction temperature probe S2,
pressure/temperature.
EVD (Circ.2) Probe S2 connected to EVD EVO driver, is Compressors of
A046 Check refrigerant charge. A No
alarm reading a temperature outside its circuit 2
Check probe S2 and its wiring.
operating limits
Check probe S2 parameters.
Check EVD EVO driver.

150
 UNIT DEVICES
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING RES
OFF SHUTDOWN
Check operating conditions.
High pressure transducer S3, Check condensing pressure.
EVD (Circ.2) Probe S3 connected to EVD EVO driver, is Check refrigerant charge. Compressors of
A047 A No
alarm reading a pressure outside its Check probe S3 and its wiring. circuit 2
operating limits Check probe S3 parameters.
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check operating conditions.
Check condensing
Discharge temperature probe S4,
pressure/temperature.
EVD (Circ.2) Probe S4 connected to EVD EVO driver, is Compressors of
A048 Check refrigerant charge. A No
alarm reading a temperature outside its circuit 2
Check probe S4 and its wiring.
operating limits
Check probe S4 parameters.
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check operating conditions.
Check evaporating
EVD (Circ.2) Low Suction superheating of circuit 1 is pressure/temperature. Compressors of
A049 A No
superheat below the limit threshold Check refrigerant charge. circuit 2
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check EEV parameters.
Check operating conditions.
Check evaporating
EVD (Circ.2) Low Evaporating temperature of circuit 1 is
pressure/temperature. Compressors of
A050 evap.temperature below the minimum limit threshold A No
Check refrigerant charge. circuit 2
(LOP) (LOP)
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check EEV parameters.
Check operating conditions.
Check evaporating
Evaporating temperature of circuit 1 is
EVD (Circ2) High evap. pressure/temperature. Compressors of
A051 above the maximum limit threshold A No
temperature (MOP) Check refrigerant charge. circuit 2
(MOP)
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check EEV parameters.
Check operating conditions.
Check condensing
EVD (Circ.2) High Condensing temperature of circuit 1 is pressure/temperature. Compressors of
A052 A No
cond.temp. (HiTcond) above the maximum limit threshold Check refrigerant charge. circuit 2
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check EEV parameters.
Reboot unit control.
EVD (Circ.2) Alarm Internal memory of EVD EVO driver of Compressors of
A053 If the problem persists, replace EVD M No
EEPROM circuit 2 is faulty circuit 2
EVO driver.
Reboot unit control.
EVD (Circ.2) EEV Compressors of
A054 EEV motor is faulty. If the problem persists, replace EEV or M No
motor err. circuit 2
EVD EVO driver.
Check serial connection.
Check power supply to EVD EVO
EVD (Circ.2) Driver Serial connection between pCO board Compressors of
A055 driver. A No
offline and EVD EVO driver is not working circuit 2
Check EVD EVO driver.
Check pCO board.
Check operating conditions.
Evaporating temperature of circuit 2 is Check evaporating
EVD (Circ.2) Low below the maximum limit threshold. pressure/temperature. Compressors of
A056 A No
suction temperature This alarm is used only with ON/OFF Check refrigerant charge. circuit 2
compressors and EVD EVO driver. Check EVD EVO driver.
Check EEV parameters.
Check EVD EVO backup battery
EVD (Circ.2) Battery EVD EVO backup battery module of Compressors of
A057 module. M No
discharge circuit 2 is low circuit 2
Check power supply and wirings.
EVD (Circ.2) Incompl. EEV of circuit 2 is not completely Check EEV and its wirings. Compressors of
A058 A No
valve closing closed Check EVD EVO driver. circuit 2
EVD (Circ.2) Firmware Firmware of EVD EVO of circuit 2 is Check EVD EVO driver. Compressors of
A059 M No
not compatible not compatible or corrupted Replace EVD EVO driver. circuit 2

151
 UNIT DEVICES
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING RES
OFF SHUTDOWN
Reboot unit.
Check EVD EVO driver.
EVD (Circ.2) EVD EVO parameters are not correctly Check serial communication and Compressors of
A060 M No
Configuration error configured wiring. circuit 2
Restore default parameters.
Check pCO board.
Fan Ebmpapst n.1
A061 Not used.
Alarm code
Fan Ebmpapst n.1
A062 Not used.
Warning code
Fan Ebmpapst n.2
A063 Not used.
Alarm code
Fan Ebmpapst n.2
A064 Not used.
Warning code
Fan Ebmpapst n.3
A065 Not used.
Alarm code
Fan Ebmpapst n.3
A066 Not used.
Warning code
Fan Ebmpapst n.4
A067 Not used.
Alarm code
Fan Ebmpapst n.4
A068 Not used.
Warning code
Generic alarm of CPY control board,
See specific CPY alarms and warnings
A069 CPY Alarm code with alarm description that vary M No Humidifier
paragraph
depending on the triggered alarm
Generic warning of CPY control board,
See specific CPY alarms and warnings
A070 CPY Warning code with warning description that vary A No Humidifier
paragraph
depending on the triggered alarm
High Oil Return Temp.
A071 Not used.
(BLDC n.1)
High Oil Return Temp.
A072 Not used.
(Comp n.1)
On/Off Compressors
A073 Not used.
wrong phase sequence
Check operating conditions.
Check condensing pressure.
Check refrigerant charge.
High Pressure Switch High pressure alarm of cooling circuit Check remote condenser or water Compressors of
A074 M No
(Circ.2) 2 from high pressure switch condensing valve and relative settings. circuit 2
Manually reset high pressure switch
before resetting the alarm from
display.
Check operating conditions.
Check condensing pressure.
High Condensing High pressure alarm of cooling circuit Compressors of
A075 Check refrigerant charge. M No
Pressure (Circ.2) 2 from high pressure transducer circuit 2
Check remote condenser or water
condensing valve and relative settings.
Check operating conditions.
Low Evaporation Low pressure alarm of cooling circuit 2 Check evaporating pressure. Compressors of
A076 AC No
Pressure (Circ.2) from low pressure transducer Check refrigerant charge. circuit 2
Check expansion valve.
Check operating conditions.
Electrical motor overheating (thermal
On/Off Compressor 2 Check motor wirings and absorbed Compressors of
A077 protection open) of ON/OFF M No
Thermal Prot. (Circ.2) current. circuit 2
compressor 1 of circuit 2
Check discharge temperature.
On/Off Compressor 3
A078 Not used.
Thermal Prot. (Circ.1)
Check operating conditions.
Electrical motor overheating (thermal
On/Off Compressor 3 Check motor wirings and absorbed Compressors of
A079 protection open) of ON/OFF M No
Thermal Prot. (Circ.2) current. circuit 2
compressor 2 of circuit 2
Check discharge temperature.

152
 UNIT DEVICES
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING RES
OFF SHUTDOWN
Reboot the unit control.
Check EVD EVo driver.
The EVD n.1 type is
The model of EVD EVO driver of Check serial communication between Compressors of
A080 UNIVERSAL, Not M No
circuit 1 is not correct EVD EVo and pCO board. circuit 1
compat.
If the problem persists, replace EVD
EVO driver.
Reboot the unit control.
Check EVD EVo driver.
The EVD n.2 type is
The model of EVD EVO driver of Check serial communication between Compressors of
A081 UNIVERSAL, Not M No
circuit 2 is not correct EVD EVo and pCO board. circuit 2
compat.
If the problem persists, replace EVD
EVO driver.
A082 Water flow alarm Not used.
A083 High water temperature Not used.
Envelope alarm (Circ.2)
A084 Not used.
zone:
Compressor start fail
A085 Not used.
BLDC (Circ.2)
Reboot pCO board.
Chip I/O configuration
A086 I/O chip of pCO board is faulty Restore default parameters. M Yes All
error
Replace pCO board.
Probe B08 fault or not
A087 Not used.
connected
Probe B09 fault or not
A088 Not used.
connected
Probe B10 fault or not
A089 Not used.
connected
Please, check module
A090 Not used.
TT_BLDC_FixedMng
Please, check module
A091 Mod_MB_BLDC_Comp Not used.
_Mng
Low Evaporation
A092 Not used.
press.switch (Circ.1)
Low Evaporation
A093 Not used.
press.switch (Circ.2)
Check compressor.
Thermal protection Thermal overload protection of BLDC Compressor
A094 Check refrigerant charge. M No
BLDC (Circ.1) compressor of circuit 1 is open BLDC of circuit 1
Check operating conditions.
Thermal protection
A095 Not used.
BLDC (Circ.2)
Check air flow.
Thermal protection Thermal overload protection of Electrical heater
A096 Check thermal protection and wiring. M No
heater 1 electrical heater 1 is open 1
Check electrical heater.
Check air flow.
Thermal protection Thermal overload protection of Electrical heater
A097 Check thermal protection and wiring. M No
heater 2 electrical heater 2 is open 2
Check electrical heater.
Check probe and its wirings.
Probe connected to pCO analogue
Probe U2 fault or not Check probe parameters. Compressors of
A098 input U2 is reading a value outside of A No
connected Replace probe. circuit 1
its limits
Check pCO board.
Check probe and its wirings.
Probe connected to pCO analogue
Probe U7 fault or not Check probe parameters. Dual Cooling /
A099 input U7 is reading a value outside of A No
connected Replace probe. Free cooling
its limits
Check pCO board.
Check probe and its wirings.
Probe connected to pCO analogue
Probe U8 fault or not Check probe parameters. Dual Cooling /
A100 input U8 is reading a value outside of A No
connected Replace probe. Free cooling
its limits
Check pCO board.
Probe U9 fault or not
A101 Not used.
connected
Check probe and its wirings.
Probe connected to pCO analogue
Probe U10 fault or not Check probe parameters.
A102 input U10 is reading a value outside of A No Air free cooling
connected Replace probe.
its limits
Check pCO board.

153
 UNIT DEVICES
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING RES
OFF SHUTDOWN
Check probe and its wirings.
Probe connected to pCO analogue
Probe U1 fault or not Check probe parameters.
A103 input U1 is reading a value outside of M Yes All
connected Replace probe.
its limits
Check pCO board.
Check probe and its wirings.
Probe connected to pCO analogue
Probe U2 fault or not Check probe parameters. Compressors of
A104 input U2 is reading a value outside of A No
connected Replace probe. circuit 1
its limits
Check pCO board.
Probe U2 fault or not
A105 Not used.
connected
Probe U6 fault or not
A106 Not used.
connected
Check probe and its wirings.
Inlet water sensor connected to
Probe U7 fault or not Check probe parameters. Dual Cooling /
A107 anolgue input U7 of pCO controller is A No
connected Replace probe. Free Cooling
reading a value out of allowable limits.
Check pCO board.
Check probe and its wirings.
Outlet water sensor connected to
Probe U8 fault or not Check probe parameters.
A108 anolgue input U8 of pCO controller is A No None
connected Replace probe.
reading a value out of allowable limits.
Check pCO board.
Check probe and its wirings.
Probe connected to pCO analogue
Probe U10 fault or not Check probe parameters.
A109 input U10 is reading a value outside of A No Air free cooling
connected Replace probe.
its limits
Check pCO board.
Check air flow.
Air flow read by differential air Check supply air fans.
A110 Air Flow by transducer pressure transducer is below the Check differential pressure transducer. M Yes All
minimum threshold Check position of sensing pipes for air
pressure transducer.
Supply air temperature is above the
High Supply Air Reduce thermal load.
A111 maximum threshold. A No None
Temperature Check air supply probe and wiring.
Thermal load is too high.
Supply air temperature is below the
Low Supply Air Increase thermal load.
A112 minimum threshold. A No None
Temperature Check air supply probe and wiring.
Thermal load is too low.
Check condensate drain pump and All / Condensate
A113 Condensing pump Condensate drain pump is on alarm M Cfg
wiring. drain pump
Water flow forDC/FC coil is below Check water flow. Dual Cooling /
A114 Water flow DC M No
minimum required value Check flow switch and wiring. Free Cooling
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A115 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
1 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A116 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
2 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A117 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
3 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A118 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
4 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A119 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
5 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.

154
 UNIT DEVICES
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING RES
OFF SHUTDOWN
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A120 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
6 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A121 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
7 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A122 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
8 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A123 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
9 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A124 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
10 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A125 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
11 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A126 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
12 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A127 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
13 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A128 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
14 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A129 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
15 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
Check if there is power supply to the
unit.
DATALINK offline Unit Unit connected in Datalink pLAN local
A130 Check Datalink configuration. A No None
16 network is offline.
Check pLAN wiring.
Check pCO board.
External
Check external humidifier.
humidifier
A131 External Humidifier External humidifier is on alarm Check wiring. A No
request (Y5
Check pCO board.
analogue output)
Warning Device A unit device has reached the Substitute the device.
A132 A No None
maintenance maintenance hours threshold Reset working hours.
Supply fan Thermal Supply air fan motor thermal protection Check air fan motor.
A133 M No Supply air fan
Prot. is open, due to motor overheating Check wiring.
A blackout of power supply has
A134 Blackout Check main power supply to the unit. A No None
happened

155
 UNIT DEVICES
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING RES
OFF SHUTDOWN
Inverter model not
A135 compatible! Power+ Not used.
only allowed (circ. 2)
The unit connected on Datalink
DATALINK unit OFF by
A136 network is in OFF by alarm status (it is Check cause of alarm A No None
alarm
a warning)
A backup unit connected on Datalink
DATALINK backup unit network is in ON status because
A137 A No None
ON another unit is in OFF by alarm status
(it is a warning)
Reboot pCO board.
Error read/write the pCO board permanent memory is
A138 Restore default parameters. M Yes All
permanent memory faulty
Replace pCO board.
Check the presence of water flow.
A139 Dry cooler water flow Water flow on dry cooler is missing Check the fow switch and its cabling. AC No Dry cooler
Chech the pCO board digital input.
Maintenance hours threshold of BLDC Do maintenance on the component,
Warning maintenance
A140 compressor of circuit 1 has been following instructions on the M No None
compr. BLDC C1
reached installation and operation manual
Maintenance hours threshold of Fix Do maintenance on the component,
Warning maintenance
A141 compressor of circuit 1 has been following instructions on the M No None
compr. Fix 1 C1
reached installation and operation manual
Warning maintenance
A142 Not used M No None
compr. Fix 2 C2
Warning maintenance
A143 Not used
compr. BLDC C2
Maintenance hours threshold of Fix Do maintenance on the component,
Warning maintenance
A144 compressor 1 of circuit 2 has been following instructions on the M No None
compr. Fix 1 C2
reached installation and operation manual
Maintenance hours threshold of Fix Do maintenance on the component,
Warning maintenance
A145 compressor 2 of circuit 2 has been following instructions on the M No None
compr. Fix 2 C2
reached installation and operation manual
Maintenance hours threshold of Do maintenance on the component,
Warning maintenance
A146 condenser fans of circuit 1 has been following instructions on the M No None
condenser fan 1
reached installation and operation manual
Maintenance hours threshold of Do maintenance on the component,
Warning maintenance
A147 condenser fans of circuit 1 has been following instructions on the M No None
condenser fan 2
reached installation and operation manual
Do maintenance on the component,
Warning maintenance Maintenance hours threshold of
A148 following instructions on the M No None
humidifier humidifier has been reached
installation and operation manual
Do maintenance on the component,
Warning maintenance Maintenance hours threshold of
A149 following instructions on the M No None
heating heaters heaters has been reached
installation and operation manual
Warning free cooling Water inlet temperature to the free Check free cooling water source.
A150 hot water inlet cooling coil is above the maximum Check maximum temperature A No Free cooling
temperature threshold threshold.
Warning free cooling External air inlet temperature to the
A151 hot damper inlet air free cooling damper is above the None. A No Free cooling
temperature maximum threshold
Warning free cooling Water inlet temperature to the free Check free cooling water source.
A152 low water inlet cooling coil is below the minimum Check minimum temperature A No Free cooling
temperature threshold threshold.
Warning free cooling External air inlet temperature to the
A153 low damper inlet air free cooling damper is below the None. A No Free cooling
temperature minimum threshold
Check the alarm source.
Custom alarm Configurable alarm, the text of this
A154 Check external alarm digital input of A Cfg All / None
“TEXT” alarm is defined by the user
pCO board.

156
9.1.1 Power+ inverter alarm A026
As reported in the previous table, all peculiar alarms of Power+ inverter of circuit 1 are grouped under the
alarm code A026. If an alarm of Power+ is triggered, alarm A026 will be displayed and the description of this
alarm will contain a Power+ alarm code. Refer to following table and Power+ manufacturer manual for alarms
description, main causes and troubleshooting.

CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING

0 No alarm
The drive has detected a current supplied that is
Check the load.
too high due to:
1 Overcurrent Decrease acceleration.
- sudden strong load increase;
Check the motor parameters.
- acceleration that is too high.
The current supplied has exceeded the motor Check the load.
2 Motor overload
rated current over the maximum time accepted. Check the motor parameters.
The DC voltage of the intermediate circuit has
exceeded the limits envisioned due to:
Decrease deceleration.
3 Overvoltage - deceleration that is too high;
Check for peaks on the power supply network.
- high over-voltage peaks on the power supply
network.
The DC voltage of the intermediate circuit is below
Check the power supply voltage.
the limits envisioned due to:
4 Undervoltage Reset the alarm and re-start the drive by switching
- insufficient power supply voltage;
it OFF and ON again.
- fault inside the drive.
Check that the flow of cooling air is
regular. Check environment and cooling air
The temperature inside the drive has exceeded the temperatures.
5 Drive overtemperature
maximum level allowed. Check that the heat sink is clean and eventually
clean it.
Check the drive fans.
Drive The temperature of the drive is below the minimum
6 Warm up the ambient where the drive is installed.
undertemperature level allowed.
The drive has detected an istantaneous current
supplied that is too high due to: Check the load.
7 Overcurrent HW
- sudden strong load increase; Check the motor cabling.
- motor cables short circuit.
The temperature detected by the PTC thermistor Reduce the motor load.
8 Motor overtemperature
corresponds to a resistance > 2600 ohm. Check motor cooling.
Reserved (for future
9
use)
Re-start the drive by switching it OFF and ON again.
10 CPU error Loss of data in memory.
Call for assistance.
Execution of reset parameter default command. Re-start the drive by switching it OFF and ON again.
11 Parameter default
Parameters user setting corrupted. Restore default parameters.
12 DCbus ripple Input power supply phase loss Check the input power supply phases to the drive.
Data communication Check the serial connection. Re-start the drive by
13 Data reception failure
fault switching it OFF and ON again.
Re-start the drive by switching it OFF and ON again.
14 Drive thermistor fault Internal fault
Call for assistance.
Re-start the drive by switching it OFF and ON again.
15 Autotuning fault Wrong parameter values
Restore default parameters.
Cable disconnected. Restore high pressure switch and check if its
Drive disabled (Safety
High pressure switch is triggered, so the external contact is closed.
16 Torque STO input
contact is open. Check the wiring.
open or de-energized)
24V power supply loss. Check 24V power supply.
A motor phase is missing, due to a problem of
Check the electrical motor.
17 Motor phase fault electrical motor.
Check the connections of the motor cable.
Motor cable disconnected.
Reserved (for future
18
use)
Re-start the drive by switching it OFF and ON again.
19 Speed fault Wrong parameters values or unsuited load. Check the motor load.
Restore default parameters.
Re-start the drive by switching it OFF and ON again.
20 PFC module error PFC overcurrent.
Call for assistance.

157
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING
Too high power supply voltage.
Power supply Check input power supply and if inductive load
21
overvoltage generating overvoltage are connected to the line.

Power supply
22 Too low power supply voltage. Check input power supply.
undervoltage
Re-start the drive by switching it OFF and ON again.
23 *STO detection error Internal fault.
Call for assistance.
Reserved (for future
24
use)
25 Ground fault The drive has detected a ground current too high. Check ground insulation of the motor and wires.
Re-start the drive by switching it OFF and ON again.
26 CPU sync error 1 Overload CPU
Call for assistance.
Re-start the drive by switching it OFF and ON again.
27 CPU sync error 2 Loss of data in memory
Call for assistance.
The current supplied has exceeded the drive rated
28 Drive overload Check the load and compressor working conditions.
current over the maximum time accepted.
Reserved (for future
29
use)

158
9.1.2 CPY board alarm A069 and warning A070
As reported in the previous table, all peculiar alarms of CPY board are grouped under the alarm code A069,
while all intrinsic warnings are grouped under the alarm code A070. If an alarm or a warning of CPY board is
triggered, alarm A069 or warning A070 will be displayed and its description will contain a CPY alarm code.
Refer to following table and CPY manufacturer manual for alarms description, main causes and
troubleshooting.

CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING

Current on the electrodes is too high, because The water conductivity must be between 75 and1250
conductivity of the wateris too high. µS/cm. Softening the water may worsen the problem
Switch unit off and confi gure TAM jumper. Switch
TAM electrical circuit not confi gured correctly.
unit on and check if the alarm is repeated.
Check the correct operation of the TAM circuit:
Excess electrode 1. Check the signal generated by the TAM: this
EH
current must be inside its operating range.
2. Check the correct connection between the
Malfunction in the TAM electrical circuit.
TAM and the board: restore the connection if
necessary.
3. Replace the TAM.
4. Replace the board.
The software or the configuration parameters are Restore default parameters.
E0 Internal memory error
corrupted. Replace the CPY board.
Configuration Restore default parameters.
E1 The confi guration parameters are corrupted
parameter error Replace the CPY board.
Increase the high water conductivity alarm
High water conductivity alarm threshold.
threshold with parameter “b6”.
Treat the supply water with RO and ensure the
Conductivity of the minimum supply water requirements (see the KUE
water too high. manual) .
Conductivity of the water higher than1250 µS/cm. The water conductivity must be between 75 and
The alarm occurs: 1250 µS/ cm. Softening the water may worsen the
• After 1 hour if problem.
EC
conductivity > b6 for
more than 1 hour, Conductivity probes shortcircuited. Clean the probes or replace the humidifier cylinder.
OR Check the correct operation of the conductivity
• Immediately if meter electrical circuit:
conductivity > 3 x b6 1. Check the electrical connections between the
Malfunction in the conductivity meter electrical circuit
conductivity meter and the board;
2. Replace the conductivity meter/fill tank;
3. Replace the board.
Power OFF and ON again the CPY board.
E2 Memory backup fail Error of CPY board internal memory
Replace the CPY board.
Maintenace time The hour counter has reached the maintenance Replace humidifier cylinder and reset the hour
CY
expired threshold counter.
The hour counter has reached 1.5 times the Replace humidifier cylinder and reset the hour
Mn Life time expired
maintenance threshold counter.
Power OFF and ON again the CPY board and the
pCO board.
Check cabling and connections.
SU Serial disconnected The serial connection is not working Restore default parameters.
Reprogram the pCO board.
Replace the CPY board.
Replace the pCO board
Check water supply to the humidifier cylinder.
Water supply to the humidifier cylinder is missing or
Check the correct operation of fill valve.
its pressure is too low.
Power OFF and ON again the CPY board and the
Pressure of supply water must be between 0.1 and
pCO board.
0.8 MPa (1-8 bar).
Replace the CPY board.
EF No supply water Steam hose is obstructed by condensate: this may
cause a high counterpressure which stops the water Check steam hose.
inlet to the cylinder.
Check and clean the drain valve.
Drain valve leakage.
Replace the drain valve.

159
CODE DESCRIPTION MAIN POSSIBLE CAUSE TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the correct operation of the fill valve:
1. Power OFF and ON: can a noise be heard at
valve opening? YES: see point “2”; NO: see point
“3”.
2. Clean or change the fill valve. If the internal flow
Fill valve obstructed or faulty.
limiter, installed at valve outlet, is not connected to
the valve, water can go straight to the discharge
through the fill tank, because water flow rate is too
high. If necessary, replace the valve.
3. Replace the CPY board.
Check that water conductivity is between 75 and
Water conductivity too low.
1250 µS/cm.
Too much foam in the cylinder. Perform the pre-wash cycle.
Excess scale in the cylinder. Replace the cylinder.

Check the correct operation of the TAM circuit:

EP Low steam flowrate 1. Check the signal generated by the TAM: this
must be between 0-2 Vac.
TAM electrical circuit not correctly configured or 2. Check the correct connection between the
malfunctioning. TAM and the board: restore the connection if
necessary.
3. Replace the TAM.
4. Replace the board.

Check that the drain valve is working correctly:

1. Switch unit off;
2. short-circuit M2.5 with M2.6;
3. switch unit on;
Drain circuit is not working properly.
4. can noise of the drain valve opening be heard?
Ed Drain problem YES: remove drain valve and clean; NO: replace the
valve.
Replace the cylinder.
Remove the cylinder and the drain valve and clean
Obstructed manifold.
the manifold.
Obstructed cylinder filter. Replace the cylinder.
Cylinder maintenance
due to the The lime scale level is too high, thus limiting steam
CP Replace the cylinder.
accumulation of lime production
scale.
External control signal
E3 Not used
not connected correctly
The water level has reached the high level electrode
without humidification demand, due to: Check the fill valve, clean or replace it.
- leaks of the fill valve; Check electrical connections of the high level
EU High water level electrode.
- high level sensor short-ciorcuited;
Replace the cylinder.
- malfunction of the high level sensor. Replace CPY board.

Presence of foam in the cylinder, due to: Carefully wash and clean the water supply hose.
- lubricants, chemicals, cleansing in the Check that water conductivity is between 75 and
supply water; 1250 µS/cm. Softening the water may worsen the
problem.
EA Foam - softened water;
Check electrical connections of the high level
- high level sensor short-ciorcuited; electrode.
- malfunction of the high level sensor. Replace the cylinder.
Replace the CPY board.
CL Cylinder depleted The cylinder is full of flakes Replace the cylinder.
Pre/Cln Cylinder pre-cleaning Cylinder pre-cleaning process is started None (this is not an alarm).
dr Cylinder drain Cylinder drain in progress None (this is not an alarm).
Dr/TOT Complete drain Complete cylinder drain cycle due to inactivity None (this is not an alarm).
AF Antifoam Antifoam cycle is active None (this is not an alarm).

160
161
162
163
164
10362050202_SERVICE_SW_CC_ FLBB0mCRCP_30-11-2015